You are on page 1of 394

ALCplus2e

Manager
No Ethernet Enhanced functionality
Application of the NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX system
for the management of equipment
of series ALS with ALCplus2e IDU
Release 1.9.0

User manual

MN.00276.E - 012

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.

ALCplus2e Manager
Contents

MANUAL CONTENT ................................................................................................................. 15

ALCPLUS2E MANAGER APPLICATION ..................................................................................... 16
FUNCTIONALITIES .............................................................................................................. 17

WEB CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB CT) PAGE ................................................................................. 18
OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB CT PAGE........................................................................................... 19
Open the WEB CT page ................................................................................................. 19
Open more WEB CT pages ............................................................................................. 19
Close the WEB CT page ................................................................................................. 20
Automatic closing of the WEB CT page............................................................................. 20
ELEMENTS OF THE WEB CT PAGE ......................................................................................... 21
Equipment Menu area ................................................................................................... 22
Equipment info area...................................................................................................... 23
Users/Connection area .................................................................................................. 25
Access box............................................................................................................. 25
Status box ............................................................................................................. 25
LCT box................................................................................................................. 26
[Logged Users] parameter ....................................................................................... 26
Verify the users connected to the equipment ........................................................ 27
Force the logout of a user .................................................................................. 27
[Logout] parameter ................................................................................................ 27
[Help] parameter.................................................................................................... 28
Remote elements list area ............................................................................................. 29
Remote equipment list (info) .................................................................................... 31
Contextual area............................................................................................................ 32
Equipment status area .................................................................................................. 33
Verify the active manual operations .......................................................................... 34
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ............................................................... 34
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB CT PAGE ........................................................................ 35

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

1

UPDATE THE INFORMATION IN THE WEB CT PAGE .................................................................. 36
AVAILABILITY OF COMMANDS IN WEB CT PAGE ..................................................................... 37
LOCAL MANAGEMENT PROGRAM (WEB LCT) ........................................................................... 38
Types of WEB LCT-equipment connection......................................................................... 38
Manage the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Configuration mode..................................... 38
Verify the enabling status of the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Configuration mode .. 39
Forbid the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode ...................... 39
Permit the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode ...................... 39

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU) ......................................................................... 40
MAIN ................................................................................................................................ 41
Equipment Properties .................................................................................................... 42
Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.) ................................ 42
Verify the equipment addresses ................................................................................ 42
Verify the equipment units ....................................................................................... 42
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 42
Equipment Properties contextual area........................................................................ 43
General Info tab ............................................................................................... 43
Network tab ..................................................................................................... 43
Equipment Units tab.......................................................................................... 44
Port Configuration & ACL ............................................................................................... 45
Verify the Ethernet port configuration ........................................................................ 45
Verify the LCT PPP port configuration......................................................................... 45
Verify the Radio port configuration ............................................................................ 45
Verify the Radio 1A port configuration ....................................................................... 46
Verify the Radio 2A port configuration ....................................................................... 46
Verify the Line EOC port configuration ....................................................................... 46
Verify the IP Over OSI port configuration ................................................................... 46
Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List....................................................... 47
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 47
Port Configuration & ACL contextual area ................................................................... 48
Ethernet tab..................................................................................................... 48
LCT PPP tab ..................................................................................................... 49
Radio tab ......................................................................................................... 50
Radio 1A tab .................................................................................................... 50
Radio 2A tab .................................................................................................... 51
Line EOC tab .................................................................................................... 51
IP Over OSI tab ................................................................................................ 52
NSAP tab ......................................................................................................... 53
ACL tab ........................................................................................................... 53
Available of the communication port.......................................................................... 55
IP Access Control List (info) ..................................................................................... 57
Routing Table............................................................................................................... 58
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment ...................... 58
Routing Table contextual area .................................................................................. 59
Routing Table and Default Gateway (info) .................................................................. 60

2

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Stored Routing Table .................................................................................................... 61
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory of the controller.................................................................................................................... 61
Stored Routing Table contextual area ........................................................................ 62
Performance Monitoring................................................................................................. 63
Verify the status of the PM measures......................................................................... 63
Activate one or more PM measures ........................................................................... 63
Deactivate one or more PM measures ........................................................................ 64
Verify the results of the PM measures ........................................................................ 64
Reset the values of the control parameters of a measure ............................................. 64
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of a measure .................................................... 65
Set the thresholds of the control parameters of a measure ........................................... 65
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio) .................................... 70
Performance Monitoring contextual area .................................................................... 71
PM measures ......................................................................................................... 72
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>.................................................................. 72
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> ............................................................. 72
G828 Radio <radio branch> ............................................................................... 73
G828 E1 Line Side............................................................................................. 73
G828 E1 Internal Side ....................................................................................... 74
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>....................... 74
ACM Radio <radio branch> ................................................................................ 75
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> .............................................................................. 76
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> .............................................................................. 76
PM measures (info) ................................................................................................. 77
SNTP & Wake Up Config. ............................................................................................... 78
Verify the SNTP functionality .................................................................................... 78
Verify the Wake Up functionality status...................................................................... 78
SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area ................................................................... 79
SNTP tab ......................................................................................................... 79
Wake Up tab .................................................................................................... 80
SNTP functionality (info) .......................................................................................... 81
Wake Up functionality (info) ..................................................................................... 82
SD Memory Management............................................................................................... 83
Verify the status and the configuration of the SD ........................................................ 83
Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU ............ 83
Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD ................................ 85
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD.............................. 86
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD ....................................................... 86
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD ...................................................................................... 86
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to the controller.................................................................................................................... 86
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD) ............................... 86
SD Memory Management contextual area .................................................................. 87
SD memory card (info) ............................................................................................ 89
Storing the equipment data into SD..................................................................... 89
Use of the SD for the equipment management ...................................................... 89
Commands for the management/maintenance of SD.............................................. 90
Warnings about the correct use of SD card ........................................................... 91

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

3

Software Info & Maint. .................................................................................................. 92
Verify the firmware version of the equipment ............................................................. 92
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller........................ 92
Software Info & Maint contextual area ....................................................................... 93
Equipment Firmware tab .................................................................................... 93
Equipment firmware (info) ....................................................................................... 95
Security Config............................................................................................................. 96
Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3) .................. 96
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode .................................................. 96
Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode ............................................ 97
Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode) ..... 97
Configure the SSH protocol ...................................................................................... 97
Security Config. contextual area ............................................................................... 99
Security (info) .......................................................................................................101
SSH protocol (info) ................................................................................................102
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).....................................................................................103
FTP/SFTP protocol (info) .........................................................................................104
SNMP protocol (info) ..............................................................................................105
EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................................106
Configurator ...............................................................................................................107
Verify/modify the radio configuration........................................................................108
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality ...............................110
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation .....................................................110
Verify/modify the management of STM-1 ..................................................................110
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH
ring .....................................................................................................................111
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality...........................................111
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node..............................................112
Verify/modify the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1s ..................................112
Configurator contextual area ...................................................................................113
Configurator tab ..............................................................................................113
Tributary A-B Mapping tab ................................................................................114
Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info) .............116
BW & Mod./Link ID ......................................................................................................117
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters
of the adaptive modulation .....................................................................................117
Modify the reference band/modulation ......................................................................118
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation...............................................118
Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) ......................................118
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) .....119
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled) ........................................119
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams).........................119
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)....................119
Verify/modify the link identification number ..............................................................120
Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1..............................................................120
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area ..........................................................................121
Modulation & Capacity tab.................................................................................121
Local Link ID tab..............................................................................................122
Extra TDM Priority tab ......................................................................................123

4

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Adaptive modulation (info)......................................................................................125
Ethernet transport ...........................................................................................125
TDM transport .................................................................................................125
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (TDM Capacity) ...........................................126
Multiple ACM profiles per modulation ..................................................................126
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter ....................................127
General Preset ............................................................................................................128
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception ..........................................128
Verify/modify the radio branch label .........................................................................128
Verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol ...........................129
Verify/modify the enabling status of the switch in transmission ....................................129
Verify/modify the T and N parameters ......................................................................129
Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm..........................................................130
Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function ............................130
Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN ...........................................................130
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM) ..........................130
General Preset contextual area ................................................................................132
General tab.....................................................................................................132
MCM tab .........................................................................................................133
Local/remote synchronization protocol (info) .............................................................134
MCM functionality (info)..........................................................................................135
Xpic ...........................................................................................................................136
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function .............................................136
Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch ............................................136
Restore the XPIC function of the single branch...........................................................137
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) .............................................137
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection ........................................................137
Xpic contextual area...............................................................................................138
XPIC function (info) ...............................................................................................139
STM1 Bulk Config. .......................................................................................................140
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 Bulk function ...................................................140
STM1 Bulk Config. contextual area ...........................................................................141
STM-1 Bulk function (info) ......................................................................................142
SYNCHRONISATION...........................................................................................................143
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 and T4 synchronism ......................................143
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ......................................................................144
Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted ............................................144
Enable/disable the T4 Squelch.......................................................................................144
Set the Hold Off Time parameter ...................................................................................144
Set the WTR Time parameter ........................................................................................145
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm.........................................................................145
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism .......145
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism ..................146
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources..........................................146
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source...............................................................146
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source ...............................................................147
Force the use of a synchronism source ...........................................................................147

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

5

Set a synchronism source as preferential ........................................................................148
Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input.............................................148
Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input .........................149
Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input...............149
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source................................150
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the
expiry of Wait Time......................................................................................................150
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of
tributary A/B...............................................................................................................151
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation .............151
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources..152
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism
sources ......................................................................................................................152
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN..................................153
Synchronisation contextual area ....................................................................................154
General tab...........................................................................................................154
T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab .............................................................................................156
E1 Source Type tab................................................................................................158
E1 Retiming tab.....................................................................................................159
T2/T3 E1 SA Bit / 1000Base-T Role tab.....................................................................159
LAN SSM Enabling tab ............................................................................................160
Synchronisation (info) ..................................................................................................161
Management of synchronisation...............................................................................161
Synchronism sources .............................................................................................161
Enabling of the synchronism sources ..................................................................165
Configuration of the synchronism sources ...........................................................165
Priority of the synchronism source......................................................................165
Quality of synchronism source ...........................................................................166
Forcing of a synchronism source ........................................................................168
Function of preferential synchronism source ........................................................168
Internal synchronism T0 .........................................................................................168
Synchronism in output T4 .......................................................................................168
Synchronism in output T12 .....................................................................................169
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ....169
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the base board (tributary A and B) .....169
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the expansion (tributary 1...n) ...........170
BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................172
Ethernet Switch...........................................................................................................173
Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field ............................................173
Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet .............................................173
Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table ...........................................174
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table .........................174
Display the MAC Table ............................................................................................174
Reset the MAC Table ..............................................................................................175
Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch ..........................................................175
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue ..........176
Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its Tag 802.1p (level 2) ............176
Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality ................................176

6

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3).....176
Verify the existing virtual LANs ................................................................................177
Create a virtual Lan ...............................................................................................177
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan ...................................................................178
Delete a virtual Lan................................................................................................178
Ethernet Switch contextual area ..............................................................................179
General tab.....................................................................................................179
LLF tab ...........................................................................................................180
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab.....................................................................................180
Virtual Lan Config. tab ......................................................................................181
Ethernet Switch (info) ............................................................................................183
Construction of C-TAG on non-802.1Q LAN..........................................................183
Replacement of C-TAG in a packet with original C-TAG..........................................183
Construction of S-TAG (QinQ – Double Tag) in a packet with C-TAG........................183
Analysing the priority .......................................................................................184
MAC Table ......................................................................................................184
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 ..........................................................................................186
Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN .............................................................187
Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN .............................187
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN......................188
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN ...................................188
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN .......189
Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN.............................189
Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port .......................189
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN ....................................................190
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN .............190
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism for the LAN..............................................................................................190
Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN ...............................................................190
Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN ............................................................191
Create a PIRL instance for the LAN...........................................................................191
Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN .................................................................192
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN ............................................................................192
Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN ............................................................................192
Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN...........................................................192
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the LAN.............193
Verify/modify the behaviour of the LAN towards the packets in output ..........................193
Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value ................................................194
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN ...................194
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the
output queue ........................................................................................................195
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LAN which,
in output, the Tag is added to..................................................................................195
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN ...............................195
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN .........196
Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN....................................................196
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol ...........................196
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN ...............................................197
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP) .........................................................197
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP) ..............................................197

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

7

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection ..........................198
Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN ..............................................198
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode.......................................199
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN ...........................................................199
Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN) ............................................199
Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN).............................................................200
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)........................................................200
Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)............................................................201
Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN) ..........................................................201
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 contextual area..............................................................202
Interface tab ...................................................................................................202
Rate Limiter tab...............................................................................................204
VLan(802.1Q) tab ............................................................................................205
Priority Management tab ...................................................................................206
LLF tab ...........................................................................................................207
Line Loop tab ..................................................................................................208
STP/ELP Trunking tab .......................................................................................208
Laser Control tab .............................................................................................210
PIRL function (info) ................................................................................................212
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info) .........................................................................213
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info) ........................................................................214
Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment) ...................................214
Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)...................................................215
Trunking mode (info) .............................................................................................217
Ethernet Trunking mode (LANs) .........................................................................217
Radio Trunking mode (Radio port - Port A) ..........................................................217
Bidirectional LLF (info)............................................................................................218
Port A, Port B..............................................................................................................219
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Radio port ....................................................220
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for
the Radio port .......................................................................................................220
Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the Radio port..................................................220
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port ....221
Verify/modify the behaviour of the Radio port towards the packets in output .................221
Force the value of VID of the Radio port to the default value .......................................222
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port ..........222
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio port
to the output queue ...............................................................................................222
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the Radio port
which, in output, the Tag is added to........................................................................223
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port.......................223
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol ..................223
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the Radio port.......................................224
Verify/modify the priority of the Radio port (STP) .......................................................224
Verify/modify the connection cost of the Radio port (STP) ...........................................224
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode ..............................224
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the Radio port ..................................................225
Port A, Port B contextual area .................................................................................226
Interface tab ...................................................................................................226
VLan(802.1Q) tab ............................................................................................226
Priority Management tab ...................................................................................228

8

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

STP tab ..........................................................................................................228
STP/Trunking tab .............................................................................................229
Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................231
Verify/modify the STP version .................................................................................231
Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets........................................231
Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval ..................................................................232
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets ...........................................232
Verify the status of the ports in relation to the STP or ELP ...........................................232
Verify the MAC Address of a Bridge ..........................................................................232
Verify/modify the priority of a Bridge........................................................................232
Spanning Tree contextual area ................................................................................233
Setting tab......................................................................................................233
Summary tab ..................................................................................................233
Bridges tab .....................................................................................................235
Ring Protection............................................................................................................236
Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances ................236
Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances ..............236
Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance ............237
Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance..........237
Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance...................................238
Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance ......................239
Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance .....................................................239
Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance .................................239
Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed .....................240
Associate a VLAN to an ERP instance ........................................................................240
Ring Protection contextual area ...............................................................................241
Common tab ...................................................................................................241
Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs .....................................................................................242
VLan/Ring Binding tab ......................................................................................243
TDM Tributaries...........................................................................................................244
E1 .......................................................................................................................245
Verify the status and configuration of the E1s ......................................................245
Modify the label of an E1...................................................................................245
Activate/deactivate the E1 use...........................................................................245
Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ........................................................................246
Modify the management status of LOS alarm .......................................................246
E1 contextual area ...........................................................................................247
STM-1 ..................................................................................................................248
Lim A STM-1 [x] ..............................................................................................249
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1...........................................................249
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and internal side)............249
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte .......................250
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace
Identifier ..................................................................................................250
Verify the STM-1 alarms .............................................................................250
Verify/modify the B2 Signal Degrade alarm threshold......................................251
Verify/modify the B2 Excessive BER alarm threshold .......................................251
Verify the status and configuration of the laser ..............................................251
Modify the enabling status of the laser ..........................................................252
Modify the transmission mode of the laser .....................................................252
Enable manually the laser transmission.........................................................253

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

9

Execute the test laser functioning status .......................................................253
Verify/modify the transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1
Radio channel............................................................................................253
Lim A STM-1 contextual area .......................................................................255
Settings tab ........................................................................................255
Thresholds tab ....................................................................................256
Laser Control tab ................................................................................256
SOH Transport tab ..............................................................................257
VC-4 ....................................................................................................................258
Lim A VC-4 [x] ................................................................................................259
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte .......................259
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J1 Trace
Identifier ..................................................................................................259
Verify the VC-4 alarms................................................................................260
Verify/modify the B3 Signal Degrade alarm threshold......................................260
Verify/modify the B3 Excessive BER alarm threshold .......................................260
Verify/modify the Signal Label value .............................................................260
Lim A VC-4 contextual area .........................................................................262
J1/Alarms tab .....................................................................................262
B3/Signal Label tab .............................................................................262
VC-12 ..................................................................................................................264
VC-12 Thresholds ............................................................................................265
Verify/modify the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm threshold.................................265
Verify/modify the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm threshold ..................................265
VC-12 Thresholds contextual area ................................................................266
Lim A VC-12 [x]...............................................................................................267
Verify the alarms status of the VC-12 ...........................................................267
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12 .......267
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace
Identifier of a VC-12...................................................................................267
Verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12 .............................................268
Lim A VC-12 contextual area .......................................................................269
Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window 269
Cross Connection.........................................................................................................271
Cross Connection ...................................................................................................272
Display the connections of the equipment in graphic format...................................272
Display the connections of the equipment in table format ......................................272
Execute an unprotected Tributary-Radio connection..............................................273
Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection ...................................................274
Execute a Pass Through connection ....................................................................274
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ............................................................275
Delete one or more connections .........................................................................275
Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ............................................275
Disable an Auto-Loop .......................................................................................276
Modify the connection label ...............................................................................276
Save the list of the connections .........................................................................276
Verify the status and the configuration of a protected connection ...........................277
Modify the modality used to manage the switch in the protected connection ............277
Modify the modality used to manage the preferential connection ............................278
Modify the Wait Time parameter (protected connection)........................................278
Force the switch on preferential connection without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration .......................................................................................................278
Modify the structure of the Radio E1 involved by a connection................................279

10

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Cross Connection contextual area ......................................................................280
Cross Connection Matrix window ..................................................................280
Cross connection matrix (info) ...........................................................................284
TDM matrix ...............................................................................................284
Connection Type ........................................................................................284
E1 channels ..............................................................................................284
Display of the cross-connections ..................................................................288
Creation of a cross-connection .....................................................................289
Manual deletion of the cross-connections.......................................................289
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections ..................................................289
Cross Connection (PWE3 function enable) .................................................................290
Radio E1 Framing ........................................................................................................291
Verify/modify the structure of the Radio E1s..............................................................291
Radio E1 Framing contextual area ............................................................................292
RADIO .............................................................................................................................293
Radio Branch ..............................................................................................................294
Verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment ........294
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier .................................................295
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter ...........................................................295
Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply....................................................295
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) .............................................296
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) .........................................296
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC ........................................................296
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter...............................297
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation..........................................................297
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device ..........................................................297
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every
ACM profile ...........................................................................................................298
Radio Branch contextual area ..................................................................................299
Settings tab ....................................................................................................299
Powers tab......................................................................................................300
MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................301
Lan Statistics ..............................................................................................................302
Verify the counters of the Ethernet ports subdivided by each port ................................302
Reset the counters’ results ......................................................................................302
Activate/deactivate the division by 1000 of the counter results ....................................302
Lan Statistics contextual area ..................................................................................303
Lan Stat. Summary......................................................................................................305
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports ....................................305
Reset the counters’ results ......................................................................................305
Lan Stat. Summary contextual area .........................................................................306
OAM ..........................................................................................................................307
Verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment...............................308
Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment .................................................................308
Remove the OAM-FM Domain of equipment ...............................................................308
Verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality .................308
Associate a MA to a VLAN .......................................................................................309
Associate a MEP to a VLAN ......................................................................................309
Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN ..............................................................................310

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

11

Enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP .......................................310
Modify the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP .........310
Verify the table of remote MEPs (RMep table) ............................................................311
Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table .....................................................................311
Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table ....................................................................311
Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table ...................................................................312
Remove a remote MEP from RMep table....................................................................312
Send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP..............................312
Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of the same
VLAN ...................................................................................................................313
OAM contextual area ..............................................................................................314
OAM-FM Domain area.......................................................................................314
OAM-FM MA/MEP table .....................................................................................314
RMEP tab ........................................................................................................316
LBM tab..........................................................................................................316
LTM tab ..........................................................................................................317
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info) ........................................................................319
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality...........................................................................319
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by WEB CT.......319
OAM-FM Domain ..............................................................................................320
MA.................................................................................................................320
MEP ...............................................................................................................320
MIP ................................................................................................................321
Remote MEPs ..................................................................................................322
CCM...............................................................................................................324
LBM ...............................................................................................................324
LTM ...............................................................................................................325
Example of configuration of a OAM-FM Domain for a set of ALCplus2e equipment .....326
S/N Meas ...................................................................................................................328
Verify the value of the S/N measure .........................................................................328
Update the value of the S/N measure .......................................................................328
S/N Meas. contextual area ......................................................................................329
PRBS .........................................................................................................................330
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure ......................330
Activate/reset the PRBS measure.............................................................................330
Deactivate the PRBS measure .................................................................................330
Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure................................................330
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .....................................................331
PRBS contextual area .............................................................................................332
Radio Loop .................................................................................................................333
Verify the radio loops status ....................................................................................333
Activate a radio loop ..............................................................................................333
Deactivate a radio loop...........................................................................................334
Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN .............................334
Radio Loop contextual area .....................................................................................335
Radio loop (info)....................................................................................................336
Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info) .....................................337
Radio Switch ...............................................................................................................338
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches .......................338
Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)......................338

12

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch) .................339
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) ..............339
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..............................................................................339
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .340
Radio Switch contextual area...................................................................................341
Radio switch (info) .................................................................................................342
Management of the radio switch ........................................................................342
Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)....342
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission).................................................342
SWITCH ...........................................................................................................................343
STM-1........................................................................................................................344
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch ........................344
Modify the management of the STM-1 switch.............................................................344
Modify the logic of STM-1 switch ..............................................................................345
Set the primary STM-1 as preferential ......................................................................345
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..............................................................................345
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .......345
STM-1 contextual area ...........................................................................................346
STM-1 switch (info)................................................................................................347
Management of the STM-1 switch.......................................................................347
STM-1 switching criteria....................................................................................347
Forcing of the STM-1 to operation ......................................................................347
Preferential primary STM-1 ...............................................................................347
Nodal.........................................................................................................................349
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch .........................349
Modify the management of the nodal switch ..............................................................349
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..............................................................................350
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration...................................................................................................................350
Nodal contextual area ............................................................................................351
Nodal switch (info).................................................................................................352
Management of the nodal switch ........................................................................352
Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation .................................................................352
Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection ...........................................................352
USER INPUT .....................................................................................................................353
Local User Input ..........................................................................................................354
Verify the local User Input status and configuration ....................................................354
Modify the name of a local User Input.......................................................................354
Modify the rest condition of a local User Input ...........................................................354
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local User Input ...............355
Local User Input contextual area..............................................................................356
Enabling the User Input alarms (info) .......................................................................357
Remote User Input ......................................................................................................358
Verify the remote User Input status and configuration ................................................358
Modify the name of a remote User Input ...................................................................358
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote User Input............358
Remote User Input contextual area ..........................................................................360
USER OUTPUT...................................................................................................................361

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

13

Verify the User Output status and configuration ...............................................................361
Modify the name of an User Output ................................................................................361
Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output ..................................361
Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output........................................................362
Force the User Output activation....................................................................................362
Remove the forcing of the User Output ...........................................................................363
User Output contextual area .........................................................................................364

ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 365

OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 373

PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 383

ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 391

14

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

MANUAL CONTENT
Equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2e IDU can operate with Ethernet Enhanced functionality active or
inactive (see Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality).
In the first case, the GUI will contain the commands for the management of functionality Ethernet Enhanced; while in the second case the commands for the management of Ethernet functionality compatible
with ALCplus2 (Radio side) will be available.
This manual describes the commands and the functionalities of the ALCplus2e Manager application (release 1.9.0) when the management of Ethernet Enhanced is not active.
For the description of the available commands and functionalities when the management of Ethernet Enhanced is active, refer to user manual ALCplus2e Manager code MN.00275.E.
The release of the application can be verified opening the relevant WEB Craft Terminal page and selecting,
in the Equipment Menu area the Main > Equipment Properties command - General Info tab - Equip. Manager Ver parameter.
The use of the NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX supervision system and all the functions available for the system
administrator are reported in the relevant documentation.
In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording:

ALCplus2e identifies the equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2e IDU.

WEB CT page identifies the WEB Craft Terminal page for ALCplus2e.

NMS identifies the supervision system NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

15

ALCPLUS2E MANAGER APPLICATION
NMS is a very versatile system thanks to its modular structure.
It is composed by a group of main application programs which, depending on the type of the equipment
to manage, a further application is added to.
The group of the main application programs manages the NMS graphical interface (GUI) at general level
that allows the user graphically displaying the whole network, activating/deactivating the connection with
the equipment, checking the operating status (current alarms and alarm history), the results of the Performance Monitoring measurements, etc.
At this level, the equipment is considered as a whole element.
The additional application program has the task to provide to the NMS GUI the commands and the specific
functions relevant to the type of the equipment to manage.
Each additional application program manages a specific equipment GUI, through which the user can, besides controlling the operating status of the equipment, directly manage it verifying/modifying the configuration parameters (see Functionalities, Menu and commands (Equipment Menu).
In order to control and manage the ALCplus2e equipment by means of the NMS supervisory system, the
application ALCplus2e Manager has been developed.
The start-up of ALCplus2e Manager application makes the page WEB Craft Terminal (WEB CT) page opens
in the browser (equipment GUI - see Fig.1).
The access to the GUI at general level takes place with the start of the NMS GUI.
The access to the GUI at equipment level is carried out selecting, in the map window, the relevant NE symbol (see Open/close the WEB CT page).
The access to the GUI at equipment level is subjected to the access to the GUI at general level.
Fig.1 ALCplus2e Manager application
X Terminal
NMS GUI
Map Manager
Equipment
(ALCplus2e)

X Terminal

Browser
Web page
WEB CT
(ALCplus2e)

NMS
GUI

Internet (HTTP)

WS/Server
NMS
system
Equipment
network

Applic. X
Data Base
(Oracle)

16

Web Container
(e.g. Tomcat)
Applic. X

Application
ALCplus2e Manager

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

FUNCTIONALITIES

Besides the applications available in the NMS GUI at general level, the ALCplus2e Manager application allows, by means of the commands present in the WEB CT page, executing the following operations:

The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, hardware, features key, etc.) and to
execute the reset of the equipment software (Equipment Properties).

The communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment and the
IP Access Control List (Port Configuration & ACL).

The stating Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment
(Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway) (Routing Table).

The static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway) (Stored Routing Table).

The measures of Performance Monitoring (Performance Monitoring).

The automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element
and the Wake Up trap (SNTP & Wake Up Config.).

The SD memory card for the backup/restore of the equipment configuration and software (SD
Memory Management).

The equipment firmware (Software Info & Maint.).

The equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and SNMPv3) (Security Config.).

The equipment general configuration (radio configuration, modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation, etc.) (Equipment).

The sources and the outputs of synchronism (Synchronisation).

The Ethernet Switch, Ring Protection mode (G.8032), TDM tributary and cross connection matrix
(TDM) (Base Band).

The radio parameters (Radio).

The LAN statistics, OAM, S/N, PRBS, radio loop and radio switch (Maintenance).

The switch of the STM-1 protected and of the Nodal Bus protected (Switch).

The local and remote User Input (User Input).

The User output (User Output).

The remote element list (Remote elements list area)

The manual operations and the relevant timeout (Equipment status area).

The users connected to the equipment ([Logged Users] parameter).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

17

WEB CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB CT) PAGE
Open/close the WEB CT page
Elements of the WEB CT page
Messages displayed in the WEB CT page
Update the information in the WEB CT page
Availability of commands in WEB CT page
Local management program (WEB LCT)

18

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB CT PAGE

Open the WEB CT page
Open more WEB CT pages
Close the WEB CT page
Automatic closing of the WEB CT page

Open the WEB CT page
WARNING The following procedure assumes that:

ALCplus2e Manager application program has been installed and enabled to operate.

The NMS GUI is open.

The NE object relevant to the equipment is present in the map window.

The connection with the equipment has been activated AT LEAST one time.

The start-up of GUI, the procedure to graphically represent the network, to create and connect the NE objects is reported into the supervision system user manual.
1. In the map window of the supervision system, double click on the NE object or select the object, open
the pop-up menu and select Open.
The system opens the WEB CT page.
If the selected equipment is in:

Connected status and WEB LCT program is not connected to the equipment in Configuration
mode. The operating status (alarms) and the configuration pointed out into the page correspond
to the real condition present in the equipment.

Connected status and WEB LCT program is connected to the equipment in Configuration mode.
The operating status (alarms) and the configuration pointed out into the page could not correspond to those really present on the equipment.

Disconnected, unreachable or maintenance status. The operating status (alarms) and the configuration pointed out into the page correspond to the last known configuration.

The WEB CT page will have access:

Read & Write if, for the selected NE object, the considered page constitutes the first session open
in the current map or in another map.

Read Only if, for the selected NE object, the considered page does not constitute the first opened
session: at least one WEB CT page relevant to the selected NE object is already opened in the
current map or in another map.

In this condition, the user can both verify and modify the parameters.

When the page has Read Only access, the user can only verify the parameters.
WARNING The WEB CT page will be opened with Read Only access if the NE object (even if it is the first

opened session) is in disconnected, unreachable, maintenance status or if the WEB LCT program is connected to the equipment in Configuration mode.

Open more WEB CT pages
More WEB CT pages, relevant to the same NE object present in the same map or in different maps, can be
opened at the same time.
The first user who opens the page will have Read & Write access and will be able to both verify (get operations) and modify (set operations) the equipment configurations parameters.
The other users who open the page will have Read Only access and will be able only to verify the parameters.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

19

WARNING The WEB CT page will be open with Read Only access (even if it is the first opened session) if

the equipment is in disconnected, unreachable or maintenance status or if the WEB LCT program is connected to the equipment in Configuration mode.
More WEB CT pages relevant to different ALCplus2e equipment, present in the same map or in different
maps, can be opened.

Close the WEB CT page

1. Select the [Logout] parameter.
A message warns that the session has been terminated as consequence of logout operations.
Closing of WEB CT page does not influence the status of the connection to the equipment in any way.

Automatic closing of the WEB CT page
The WEB CT page is automatically closed when:

The system displays the message WARNING. ALCplus2e Manager <logic and physical address
of the equipment>: Forced Logout Superuser or an Error message (see Messages displayed in
the WEB CT page).

The WEB LCT program connects to the equipment in Configuration mode (see Local management program (WEB LCT).

The WEB CT page is automatically closed and opened when the system displays the message Equipment
in Maintenance mode…

20

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

ELEMENTS OF THE WEB CT PAGE

1 - Equipment Menu area
2 - Equipment info area
3 - Users/Connection area
4 - Remote elements list area
5 - Contextual area
6 - Equipment status area

Fig.2 shows an example of WEB CT page on an ALCplus2e equipment.

Fig.2 Elements of the WEB CT page (ALCplus2e)

1

2

3

5

4

6

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

21

Equipment Menu area

This area contains the commands to manage the equipment configuration (see Fig.2).
Commands

The commands are subdivided in groups:
Main. Commands to manage the general equipment parameters: supervision ports,
Routing Table, Performance Monitoring measures, etc.
Equipment, Synchronisation, etc. Commands to manage the configuration parameters typical of the equipment type which the WEB CT page refers to.
For the description of every group/command see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu).
The selection of a group expands or compresses the list of the underlaying commands. At each
selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes
expanded, or vice versa). The symbol:
identifies an expanded group.
identifies a compressed group.
It is possible:

Expand all the groups at the same time, pressing

Compress all the groups at the same time, pressing

.

The symbol
identifies a command which, once selected, displays the parameters associated
to it in the context area (see Contextual area).
Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Menu area is displayed.
Press

22

to hide the area. Press

to display the area again.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Equipment info area

This area shows the equipment general properties.
Parameters

Equipment Type. Equipment type.
Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
Radio System. Radio configuration:

Unequipped. Equipment without radio.

1+0. Equipment with radio in unprotected configuration.

1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential
type.

1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential
type.

2x1+0 Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected
configuration and two Ethernet channels.

2x1+0 XPIC Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and
two Ethernet channels.

Agent IP. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.
Tables

LEFT

TABLE

(see Fig.2). Status and radio parameters of the transmitter and receiver.

Every row of the table corresponds to a radio branch for which is displayed:
Branch which the data present in the relevant row refer to:

Tx Status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to transmission.

Rx Status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to reception.

The Tx2A and Rx2A boxes are present only for the equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration.
The operating status of the branch is represented by the colour of the box:

Green. Working branch.

White. StandBy branch.

In the equipment in 1+1 heterofrequential configuration, the branches 1 and 2 transmit
at the same time; in this case both the Tx1A and Tx2A boxes will be green.
RF channel frequency. The wording:

Channel Not Set. RF channel is not set.

ODU Hardware Failure. Hardware problem. E.g. check that the connection cable between the IDU and the ODU is not failure or missing.

RF channel number.
Power in input to the receiver (lines Rx…) and in output to the transmitter (lines Tx…).
In the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the wording Std-by is present in
the line Tx… relevant to the StandBy branch.
Both the powers are measured at the antenna flange.
The wording Tx Off (row Tx1A/Tx2A) indicates that the transmitter is off due to an action
by the user (see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter - selection of option Off
or Permanent Off) or due to the activation of one or more alarms which cause the switchoff of the transmitter (for instance, ...RT Vco Fail Alarm).
If the radio is not equipped (Radio System: [Unequipped]) the parameters present in this table
are not meaningful. In the area the Data Unavailable wording is displayed.
RIGHT TABLE. Current ACM profile and the radio transport (Tx/Rx) subdivision between Ethernet
and E1:
ACM Profile. Current ACM profile.
TDM Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to the TDM tributaries (E1, STM-1)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

23

ETH Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to the Ethernet tributaries.
The Tx2A and Rx2A boxes are present only for the equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration.
Update data

Press

to update the information in the Equipment Info area.

Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Info area is displayed.
Press

24

to hide the area. Press

to display the area again.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Users/Connection area

Access box
Status box
LCT box
[Logged Users] parameter
[Logout] parameter
[Help] parameter

Access box
Mode to access the WEB CT page.
Options

Read & Write (green box). The user who accesses the page in this mode can:

Verify the equipment configuration parameters.

Modify the equipment configuration parameters (only if the NE object is in connected
status and is not connected to WEB LCT program in Configuration mode).

The access in Read & Write mode to every WEB CT page relevant to the same equipment is assigned to one user at a time.
This user corresponds to the first NMS5UX authorized user who opens the WEB CT page in any
map managed by the supervision system.
Read Only (orange box) The user who accesses to the page in this mode can verify the equipment configuration parameters.
The access in Read Only mode for every WEB CT page relevant to the same equipment is assigned to all users who access the page after the first.
WARNING The user has access in Read Only mode even if he is the first user to open the page,

when the equipment is in status: disconnected, unreachable, maintenance or connected with the
local connection WEB LCT-equipment active in Configuration mode.
See also

Availability of commands in WEB CT page
Local management program (WEB LCT)

Status box
Status of the NE object connection to the supervision system.
Options

Connected (green box). The NE object is in connected status. In this status, the user can:

Open the WEB CT page of the equipment.

Verify the equipment configuration parameters.

Modify the configuration parameters of the equipment (only if the page has Read &
Write access and the WEB LCT program is not connected in Configuration mode to the
equipment).

Disconnected (red box). The NE object is in disconnected status. In this status, the user can:

Open the WEB CT page of the equipment with Read Only access.

Verify the equipment configuration parameters: the WEB CT page indicates the last
acquired equipment configuration.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

25

Unreachable (red box). The NE object is in unreachable status. In this status, the user can:

Open the WEB CT page of the equipment with Read Only access.

Verify the equipment configuration parameters: the WEB CT page indicates the last
acquired equipment configuration.

Maintenance (red box). The NE object is in maintenance status. In this status, the user can:

Open the WEB CT page of the equipment with Read Only access.

When the NE is in maintenance status, the parameters in the WEB CT page are not meaningful,
because the maintenance status is a transitory status. To verify the parameters, it is suggested
to wait for the NE object passes from maintenance status to another status (connected, disconnected, unreachable). Moreover, no operation can be executed in this status.

LCT box
Status of connection between the local program WEB LCT and the equipment.
Options

Absent (light blue box). The local connection WEB LCT-equipment is not active. In this condition, the user can:

Open the WEB CT page of the equipment.

Verify the equipment configuration parameters.

Modify the equipment configuration parameters (only if the page has Read & Write
access and the NE object is in connected status).

Forbid the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode

Monitor (green box). The connection WEB LCT-equipment is active in Monitoring mode. In this
condition, the user can:

Open the WEB CT page of the equipment.

Verify the equipment configuration parameters.

Modify the equipment configuration parameters (only if the page has Read & Write
access and the NE object is in connected status).

Configuration (blue box). The connection WEB LCT-equipment is active in Configuration mode.
In this condition, the user can:

Open the WEB CT page of the equipment.

Verify the equipment configuration parameters.

Locked (light blue box). The WEB LCT user is forbidden to connect to the equipment through
the WEB LCT program in Configuration mode. In this condition, the user can:

Open the WEB CT page of the equipment.

Verify the equipment configuration parameters.

Modify the equipment configuration parameters (only if the page has Read & Write
access and the NE object is in connected status).

Permit the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode

See also

Local management program (WEB LCT)
Types of WEB LCT-equipment connection
Manage the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Configuration mode

[Logged Users] parameter
WARNING Parameter available only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

This parameter manages the users connected to the equipment.

26

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Operations

Verify the users connected to the equipment
Force the logout of a user

Verify the users connected to the equipment
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment using the protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

1. Select the [Logged Users] parameter.
The Current Logged User window displays the list of the users connected to the equipment when the
command is selected.
For each users, is pointed out in the column:

User. User name.
The wording NMS5UX shows the user of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system or a remote
user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login).
The other wordings identify the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT users connected to the equipment.

Profile. User profile.

Timeout. Timeout of the WEB CT session:

No Timeout. Session timeout disabled. WEB CT session opened by the user (even if disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time.

<number> Seconds. Session timeout enabled. WEB CT session opened by the user, if
disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.

With disconnected session we mean a WEB CT session whose relevant WEB CT has been closed
but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).

User IP Address. Machine IP address.
With the wording machine, it is intended the PC (for the WEB LCT and SCT/LMT users) or the
server/workstation (for the NMS5UX users and remote users) on which the application used by
the user is actually running.

Press Refresh to update the data present in the window.

Force the logout of a user
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Logging out oneself is not possible.

If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system automatically executes the restore of the user login.
Operation available only for equipment using the protocol SNMPv1/v2c.
1. Select the [Logged Users] parameter.
2. Select the wished user.
3. Press Force Logout and confirm.
The system removes the line relevant to the selected user.
If the push-button is not available, this means that the record relevant to one’s user has been selected.

[Logout] parameter
This parameter executes the logout of the current user.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

27

When this parameter is selected, a message warns that the session has been closed as consequence of a
logout operation.

[Help] parameter
This parameter opens the help online of application.

28

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Remote elements list area

In this area, you can display the remote equipment list stored in the equipment controller.
Parameters

Station/Equip. Name of the station and equipment in the list.
STATION (

)

Equipment is subdivided into stations.
Selecting the symbol of a station expands or compress the list of underlaying equipment.
At each selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes expanded and vice versa).
The name of the station is assigned by the user during the creation of the station itself.
The stations are displayed in the same order as they are inserted in the list
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, cannot be stored in the
list.
EQUIPMENT (

or

)

The
symbol represents the equipment of type Managed by SCT, Elem. Manager, Not
Managed or Node X; the
symbol represents the equipment of type Remote Link (see
column Type).
The name of the equipment is automatically assigned by the application during the creation of the equipment itself: Equipment <progressive number>.
Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP address.
IP Addr. IP address (Agent SNMP) of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment:

Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.

Remote Link. Equipment, managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application, constituting the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to
the local equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).

Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where
the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).

Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one piece of equipment inserted
into an OSI network.

Nodal X. Equipment belonging to the local node.
With local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2/
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or by a TDM nodal Bus,
where the considered equipment is an element. The X value correspond to a number
between 1 and 8 and indicates the subset.

2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1
configuration.

2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1
configuration.

OSI. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.
Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
Push-button

GENERAL

AREA

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Not available in this context.
Clear. Not available in this context.
Open. Not available in this context.
STATION

AREA

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

29

Add. Not available in this context.
Remove. Not available in this context.
Rename. Not available in this context.
ELEMENT

AREA

Add. Not available in this context.
Remove. Not available in this context.
Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Remote elements list area is hidden.
Press

to hide the area. Press

to display the area again.

See also

Remote equipment list (info)

30

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Remote equipment list (info)
Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller.
With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish
to connect to.
For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment
into stations, in such a way that, at the selection of a station, the application will display only the detail of
the equipment associated with such a specific station. The station does not have any particular meaning;
it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment.
Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station.
The remote equipment list can be used to connect, at the same time, to more equipment only if the program SCT/LMT is available.
When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment),
at the connection of such equipment, the SCT/LMT program reads its remote equipment list and automatically forwards the connection command to all pieces of equipment present into the list.
In such a way, the application displays, into the Station List area of the SCT/LMT window, all the stations
that group the equipment and, into the Equipment List area (selecting the relevant station), it displays the
functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the functional status
of all the remote equipment present into the list. The equipment that have answered to the connection
request of the application will result in connected/monitor status.
The application will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment that have not answered
to the connection request, until to:

It is deactivated the connection with the local equipment.

The user disables the equipment.

The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.

More information concerning the SCT/LMT program are reported into the relevant manuals.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

31

Contextual area

This area is the part of the WEB CT page where the equipment parameters are displayed.
Its content changes accordingly to the selected command in the Equipment Menu area, which is indicated
in the top part of the contextual area.
Push-button

Apply. Selecting it makes the changes, executed on the parameters present in the contextual
area, effective.
Its selection opens a confirmation window. The confirmation windows are timed. When this period is elapsed (pointed out by the progress bar), if the user has not confirmed the operation,
the window is closed and the operation cancelled.
If the push-button is not available:

It is not possible to execute changes because the access to the page or connection
status of the equipment does not allow this (see Access box).

No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button
becomes available when the value of a parameter is changed.

Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the operation or the change of the parameters.

Refresh. Force the reading of the data from equipment.
If the push-button is not available, the connection with the equipment is not active.
Help. Open the help on-line.
WARNING For some commands, other push-buttons are displayed relevant only to the context

which contains them. These push-buttons are described in the paragraph relevant to the specific
command.
Tabs

For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. The selection of a tab dynamically
changes the content of the contextual area.
Parameters

The parameters present in the contextual area can be read-only or set or modified.
The description of the single commands (see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu) indicates
the parameters which can be modified and modalities to do that.
Generally, for the parameter setting, the following rules are valid:

Entering a value (alphanumeric string) in a text box.
If a red line is displayed below the text box, the entered value is not allowed because,
for example, a number of characters greater than the allowed one or an invalid value
has been entered (for example, entering of value 172.18.70.334 as IP address).

Box with possible values displayed in a drop-down menu.
When the value is changed, a red triangle is displayed in the top left edge of the box.
It signals that the value has been changed, but the change has not been communicated yet to the equipment (pressure of push-button Apply).

32

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Equipment status area

This area shows the functional status of the equipment.
Parameters

URGENT <alarms number>. Number of Critical and/or Major alarms. Colour box:

Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity

Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity.

Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.

Select the box to display the active alarm.
NOT URG. <alarms number>. Number of Minor and/or Warning alarms. Colour box:

Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity.

Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity.

Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.

Select the box to display the active alarm.
RADIO 1A. Status of the radio connection with branch 1A. Equipment configuration:

1+0 or 2x(1+0). Colour box:

Green. The radio connection works properly.

Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A.

1+1. Color box:

Green. The radio connection works properly.

Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A works
correctly).

Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A does not
correctly work).

RADIO 2A. Status of the radio connection with branch 2A. Equipment configuration:

1+0. Colour box: Grey. Parameter not meaningful.

1+1 Colour box:

Green. The radio connection works properly.

Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 1A works
correctly).

Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 1A does not
correctly work).

2x(1+0). Colour box:

Green. The radio connection works properly.

Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A.

DOWNLOAD. Update of the equipment firmware. Colour box:

Light blue. The firmware update is in progress.

Grey. The firmware update is not in progress.

MAN. OP. Activation of the manual operations. Colour box:

Light blue. A manual forcing is enabled (e.g. a loop).

Grey. No manual forcing is active.

<number> °C. Operating temperature of the equipment. Colour box:

Green. The operating temperature of the equipment is lower than 75°C.

Orange. The operating temperature of the equipment is between 75°C and 80°C.

Red. The operating temperature of the equipment is higher than 80°C.

Events (area). List of the status/alarm signals of the equipment.
Each signal corresponds to a record that is displayed:

Coloured box. Signal type and alarm gravity:

Green/Status. Status signal.

Light blue/Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

33

Yellow/Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.

Orange/Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.

Red/Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.

White/Cleared. Alarm detected/cleared.

Alphanumeric string which details the nature of the signal.

Logic group which the signal belongs to: COMMON, etc.

Date/time of the signal detection.
If the row refers to a detected/cleared alarm, the date/time of alarm detection will be
pointed out under the date/time of alarm clearing.
The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is
the NE controller.

Operations

Verify the active manual operations
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout
Update data

The information present in the Equipment status area is updated every 5 seconds (timeout) if
the equipment is in connected status and is not connected to WEB LCT in Configuration mode
(see Update the information in the WEB CT page).
Press
to dynamically update information of the Events area and remove the detected and
cleared alarms (box White/Cleared).
Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Events area is displayed.
Press

to hide the area. Press

to display the area again.

See also

Alarm management chapter of the user manual of one’s supervision system NMS

Verify the active manual operations
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select the MAN. OP box.
A window displays the manual operations actually activated into the equipment.
The wording None active manual operation shows that no manual operation is active.
The information are not dynamically updated. Press

to update the information.

Verify/modify the manual operation timeout
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the equipment.

1. Select the MAN. OP box.
The Manual Operation Timeout box displays the current timeout of the manual operations.
Value 0 indicates that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a manual
operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. The activation of a manual forcing (for instance a loop) affects the traffic.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 172800 sec. (48 hours).
The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the timeout.
3. Press Change and confirm.

34

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB CT PAGE

Opening page

Equipment never connected. The equipment is disconnected and it has never been connected
from the moment of the creation of the relevant Network Element object.
The system does not open the WEB CT page. To open it, first it is necessary to activate the connection with the equipment at least once.
This happens because, when the supervisory system is not connected to equipment and the user
asks to open the relevant WEB CT page, the supervisory system itself takes the information concerning the configuration of its own database. If the equipment has never been connected, the
system has not any information concerning the configuration of such equipment into its own database, then it does not allow the opening of the page.
LCT in configuration mode. The WEB LCT program is connected to the equipment in Configuration mode (see LCT box). The page is opened in Read Only modality (see Access box). In this
mode, it is possible only to verify the equipment configuration.
Equipment unreachable. Equipment is unreachable. The system opens the WEB CT page, but
the displayed information could not correspond to the real configuration of the equipment.
Equipment disconnected. Equipment is disconnected. The system opens the WEB CT page, but
the displayed information could not correspond to the real configuration of the equipment.
Equipment in Maintenance mode. Please wait until the operation is completed or press OK button
to exit. Equipment is in transient status (maintenance). If you wish to cancel the operation
(opening of the WEB CT page) press OK, otherwise it is necessary to wait for the equipment
passing from the transitory status to another status (for example, connected) which allows the
opening of the page.
WARNING If the system displays other error messages that does not allow the opening of the
WEB CT page, as for instance Unable to register to Daemon, contact one’s system administrator.

Open page

When the page is open, self-explanatory messages are usually displayed about the result of an operation or the impossibility to carry out an action because of the incongruence of the selected parameters.
Moreover, one of the following messages can be displayed:
Equipment in Maintenance mode. Please wait until the operation is completed or press OK button
to exit. The equipment is passed to transitory status (maintenance).
If you wish to close the WEB CT page press OK, otherwise wait that the equipment passes from
the transitory status to another one (for example, connected). In this second, the WEB CT page
is closed and automatically opened again.
ALCplus2e Manager <logic and physical address of the equipment>: Received a logout request
from User <user name> press OK to exit your manager session. WARNING! If you don't acknowledge this dialog in 30 seconds your session will automatically be closed. A NMS5UX user
has required the closing of the WEB CT page. Pressing:

Cancel, the system refuses the request: the page does not close.

OK or no button within 30 seconds from the message displaying, the system accepts
the request: the page closes.

WARNING. ALCplus2e Manager <logic and physical address of the equipment>: Forced Logout
Superuser. NMS5UX user with Superuser profile has forced the closing of the WEB CT page. The
displaying of this message automatically closes the page.
Message from ‘Local Operator’: Lom connected in config for NE <logic address of the equipment> Manager is going to be closed. The WEB LCT program is connected to the equipment in
Configuration mode (see LCT box). The display of this message automatically closes the WEB
CT page.
WEB LCT. The session has been terminated by logout operation. The WEB CT page has been
closed after the logout by the user or the automatic logout by the system after an action (for
example, WEB LCT has connected the equipment).
WARNING If the system displays other error messages that automatically close the WEB CT

page, such as for instance Daemon is Down. Manager is Closing, contact the involved system
administrator.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

35

UPDATE THE INFORMATION IN THE WEB CT PAGE
When the WEB CT page is open, the displayed information (alarms, connection status, etc.) is updated each
5 seconds only if:

The NE object is in connected status (see Status box).

The page access is Read & Write (see Access box).

The WEB LCT program in Configuration mode is not connected to the equipment (see Local management program (WEB LCT).

If the NE object is in disconnected or unreachable status, the information displayed in the page (except for
the equipment status) refers to the last known configuration stored in the database of the supervision system.
If the WEB CT page is in Read Only mode, the alarms and the NE connection status are updated every 5
seconds.
The change of the NE configuration (after a change executed in the WEB CT page, it is in Read & Write
mode) is not dynamically signalled.
To update the data, the update of the page must be forced, selecting the command/push-button Refresh.
If the NE object is in connected status and the WEB LCT program is present in Configuration mode, the
information displayed in the page could not correspond to the real status of the equipment. In this case,
the NMS5UX user can check the equipment configuration but cannot change the parameters
When the WEB LCT user disconnects from the equipment, the supervisory system automatically forwards
a Configuration Upload command.

36

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

AVAILABILITY OF COMMANDS IN WEB CT PAGE
The availability of commands in the WEB CT page is affected by the access to the WEB CT page.
The access to the page is pointed out by the Access box.
If the access to the WEB CT page is in mode:

Read & Write. The user can both verify and modify the equipment configuration.

Read Only. The user can only verify the equipment configuration.

The access in Read & Write mode for every WEB CT page relevant to the same equipment is assigned to
only one user at a time.
This user is the first NMS5UX authorized user who opens the WEB CT page in any map managed by the
supervision system.
All the users who will then open the WEB CT page of the same NE object, will have the access in Read Only
mode.
WARNING The WEB CT page will be opened with Read Only access if the NE object (even if it is the first

opened session) is in disconnected, unreachable, maintenance status or the WEB LCT program is connected
to the equipment in Configuration mode.
If the NMS5UX user, whose access to the page is Read & Write, closes its WEB CT page, the Read & Write
access becomes available to all other users (Read Only) who have opened the WEB CT page relevant to
the same NE object.
The user who wish to change his own mode from Read Only to Read & Write must close and re-open the
WEB CT page.
The first user who will re-open the page will have Read & Write access.
The availability of Read & Write access is not signalled to the users who have opened the WEB CT page in
Read Only mode.
It is not possible to require or to force the closing of the WEB CT page in Read-Write mode, but it is possible
to require or force the closing of the relevant Manager application. For more information, refer to the user
manual of one’s NMS supervision system.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

37

LOCAL MANAGEMENT PROGRAM (WEB LCT)
The supervisory and the management of the equipment can be remotely executed by means of the NMS
system and even locally by means of a program, directly installed on the PC: SCT/LMT and/or WEB LCT.
In this manual the word WEB LCT identifies the local supervision system SCT/LMT or WEB LCT.
The operation that can be executed, by means of the WEB LC, are mainly the ones that can be executed
with the NMS system.
More information concerning the use of the WEB LCT program are reported into the relevant user manual.
Here below, there are only some indications concerning the relations between the WEB LCT program and
the NMS system:
Types of WEB LCT-equipment connection
Manage the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Configuration mode

Types of WEB LCT-equipment connection
The local user can activate the connection between the WEB LCT program and the equipment in two different modes: Monitoring or Configuration.
Monitoring mode

In this mode, the WEB LCT user locally can verify the configuration and the parameters of the
equipment, but he cannot execute any change or require the execution of an operation.
The local activation of the connection WEB LCT-equipment in Monitoring mode does not affect
the acknowledge of the alarms or the transmission of the commands by the NMS system:
NMS5UX user can open the WEB CT page, verify the equipment configuration (get operations)
and modify parameters and send commands (set operations).
The activation and the deactivation of the local connection in Monitoring mode is spontaneously
communicated by the equipment to the NMS system and signalled to the user in the WEB CT
page (see LCT box) and in the NMS GUI (see relevant documentation).
Configuration mode

In this mode, the WEB LCT user can locally verify and modify the configuration and the parameters of the equipment which he is connected to.
When the connection WEB LCT-equipment is locally activated in Configuration mode, the NMS
can open the WEB CT page (which is opened with Read Only access) and verify the equipment
configuration (get operations), but he cannot modify parameters or send commands (set operations).
During the period when the connection is active in Configuration mode, no change relevant to
the alarms is signalled to the supervision system.
When the local connection between WEB LCT and equipment is deactivated, the NMS automatically executes a configuration re-alignment procedure (transmission of the command Configuration Upload) to acknowledge the possible changes executed by the local user and acquire
all the current alarm signals.
If the local connection WEB LCT-equipment in Configuration mode is activated when the relevant
WEB CT page is already opened, this page will be automatically closed by the supervision system.
The activation and the deactivation of the local connection in Configuration mode is spontaneously communicated by the equipment to the NMS system and signalled to the user in the NMS
GUI.

Manage the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Configuration mode
The NMS5UX user can disable/re-enable the WEB LCT user to connect locally to the equipment through the
WEB LCT program, in Configuration mode.

38

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Operations

Verify the enabling status of the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Configuration mode
Forbid the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode
Permit the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode

Verify the enabling status of the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Configuration
mode
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if LCT box has value Absent or Locked.

1. Select the arrow present in LCT box.
The ball at the side of the wording:

Unlock, indicates that the WEB LCT user can activate the equipment connection both in Monitoring mode and in Configuration one.

Lock, indicates that the WEB LCT user can activate the equipment connection in Monitoring
mode only. The user is forbidden to connect to the equipment through the WEB LCT program in
Configuration mode.

Independently from the previous setting, when the NE object is disconnected, the parameter is automatically enabled (Unlock value).

Forbid the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if LCT box has value Absent.

1. Select the arrow present in LCT box.
2. Select the value Lock from the list.
The LCT box displays the value Locked.
The WEB LCT user, by means of WEB LCT program, can activate the connection to the equipment only
in Monitoring mode.
The disable condition is valid until the NMS5UX user removes it or the NE object is disconnected.

Permit the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if LCT box has value Locked.

1. Select the arrow present in LCT box.
2. Select the value Unlock from the list.
The LCT box displays the value Absent.
The WEB LCT user, by means of WEB LCT program, can activate the connection to the equipment both
in Monitoring and in Configuration mode.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

39

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU)
Main. It manages the general equipment parameters: supervision ports configuration, Routing Table,
Performance Monitoring measures, etc.
Equipment. It manages the equipment general configuration: radio configuration, modulation, capacity, etc.
Synchronisation. It manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism.
Base Band. It manages the base band parameters.
Radio. It manages the Radio parameters.
Maintenance. It manages the LAN statistics, OAM, S/N, PRBS, radio loop and radio switch.
Switch. It manages the switch of the STM-1 protected and of the Nodal Bus protected.
User Input. It manages the local and remote User Input.
User Output. It manages the User Output.

The description of every single command indicates the modality to access to the WEB CT page necessary
to use the command or execute the relevant procedures.
For more information see Availability of commands in WEB CT page and Access box.

40

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

MAIN

Equipment Properties. It manages the properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, etc.) and
executes the equipment software reset.
Port Configuration & ACL. It manages the communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment and the IP Access Control List.
Routing Table. It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by
the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Stored Routing Table. It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in
the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Performance Monitoring. It manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
SNTP & Wake Up Config. It manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element and the Wake Up trap.
SD Memory Management. It manages the SD memory card for the backup/restore of the equipment
configuration and software.
Software Info & Maint. It manages the equipment firmware
Security Config.. It manages the equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and SNMPv3).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

41

Equipment Properties
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The Equipment Properties command manages the equipment properties and executes the equipment
software reset.
Operations

Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.)
Verify the equipment addresses
Verify the equipment units
Execute the equipment software reset
GUI

Equipment Properties contextual area

Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.)
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
The General Info tab displays the equipment general properties.

Verify the equipment addresses
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
2. Select the Network tab.
The tab displays the equipment addresses (Ethernet port, LCT port, MAC address, IP Over OSI port,
NSAP)

Verify the equipment units
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
2. Select the Equipment Units tab.
The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.

Execute the equipment software reset
Access | Read & Write
WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
2. Press Restart Equip. and confirm.

42

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Equipment Properties contextual area
The contextual area displays the equipment properties.
Tabs

General Info tab. Equipment properties: type, ID, SNMP IP address, firmware version,
ALCplus2e Manager ID and version, date/time, communication stack.
Network tab. Equipment addresses: Ethernet port, LCT port, MAC address, IP Over OSI port,
NSAP.
Equipment Units tab. Equipment units.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Restart Equip. Execute the equipment software reset
Help. Open the help on-line.

General Info tab
The tab displays the general equipment properties.
Parameters

Equipment Type. Equipment type.
Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.
Firmware Version. File name and version of the equipment firmware present on the memory
bench in use.
Equip. Manager. Ver. ALCplus2e Manager version present into the server/WS.
Equip. Man. Prod. Code. Identification code of the ALCplus2e Manager application present into
the server/WS.
Equipment Date/Time. Reference date/time of the equipment.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
IP/OSI Stack. Communication stack in use.

Network tab
The tab displays the equipment addresses.
Parameters

Ethernet IP Address. IP Address of the communication port with the LAN network (Ethernet
port).
Ethernet IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition of the Ethernet port.
Ethernet MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment.
LCT PPP IP Address. IP/PPP Address of the port for the connection to the PC (LCT port).
LCT PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition of the LCT port.
IP Over OSI. IP address of the internal communication port of the equipment for the interfacing
with the OSI router.
Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

43

Gosip Address. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.
Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
See also

Verify the Ethernet port configuration
Verify the LCT PPP port configuration
Verify the IP Over OSI port configuration

Equipment Units tab
The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.
Every row of the table corresponds to an unit.
Parameters

Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment. The wording Unequipped indicates that
the unit is not physically present into the equipment.
Expected Type. Foreseen unit type. The wording Unequipped indicates that the unit is not foreseen.
HW Ver. Unit version.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
Par. Part Number. Part Number of the group that contains the unit. Usually the group represents the equipment part that can be replaced. Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the
field will result empty and the part that can be replaced will correspond to the unit itself.
Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit. If the unit is not contained
into a group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers to the unit.
Unit Alarms. Functional status of the unit. Each box identifies an alarm:

Fail. The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning.

Missing. The unit is not present into the equipment (Unequipped wording - Real Type
parameter) also if it is foreseen (unit name - Expected Type parameter).

Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the program interrogations.

HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen one (Expected Type parameter).

SW Mism. The firmware version present into the controller of the peripheral unit (Actual Release) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status (Release Bench) (see Verify the firmware version of the equipment).

The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

44

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

White. Alarm deactivated.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Port Configuration & ACL
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The command Port Configuration & ACL manages the communication ports reserved to local and remote
supervision of the equipment, the control list of IP accesses (IP Access Control List) and allows resetting
the equipment software.
Operations

SUPERVISION

PORTS

Verify the Ethernet port configuration
Verify the LCT PPP port configuration
Verify the Radio port configuration
Verify the Radio 1A port configuration
Verify the Radio 2A port configuration
Verify the Line EOC port configuration
Verify the IP Over OSI port configuration
IP ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL)
Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List
SOFTWARE

RESET

Execute the equipment software reset
GUI

Port Configuration & ACL contextual area
See also

Available of the communication port
IP Access Control List (info)

Verify the Ethernet port configuration
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
The Ethernet tab displays the configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.

Verify the LCT PPP port configuration
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the LCT PPP tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port for the connection to the PC where resides
the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.

Verify the Radio port configuration
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING The available of the Radio depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

45

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the Radio tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.

Verify the Radio 1A port configuration
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING The available of the Radio 1A depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the Radio 1A tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 1 A signal.

Verify the Radio 2A port configuration
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING The available of the Radio 2A depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the Radio 2A tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.

Verify the Line EOC port configuration
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING The available of the Line EOC depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the Line EOC tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.

Verify the IP Over OSI port configuration
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING The available of the IP Over OSI port (IP Over OSI and NSAP tabs) depends on the equipment

protocol (see Tab.1).
The availability of the parameters present in the IP Over OSI tab depends on the equipment configuration
(see Tab.2).
1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the IP Over OSI tab.
The tab displays some configuration parameters of the internal communication port for the interfacing
with the OSI router.
3. Select the NSAP tab.

46

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

The tab displays the remnant parameters for the configuration of the internal communication port which
interfaces with OSI router.

Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the ACL tab.
3. The tab displays the IP Access Control List (ACL) of the specific IDU.

Execute the equipment software reset
Access | Read & Write
WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Press Restart and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

47

Port Configuration & ACL contextual area
The contextual area displays the communication ports reserved to local and remote supervision of the
equipment, the control list of IP accesses (IP Access Control List).
Tabs

Ethernet tab. Configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.
LCT PPP tab. Configuration of the communication port for the connection to the PC where resides
the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.
Radio 1A tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 1A signal.
Radio 2A tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal or Radio
2A signal.
Line EOC tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
IP Over OSI tab / NSAP tab. Configuration of the internal communication port for the interfacing
with the OSI router.
ACL tab. IP Access Control List (ACL).
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.
Store. Not meaningful in this context.
Retrieve. Not meaningful in this context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Ethernet tab
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.
Parameters

IP Address. IP address of the communication port with the LAN network.
Net Mask. Mask for the network address definition.
Alarm Severity - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling/severity status of the
alarm of missing/fault of the connection cable (MNGT/ Cable Fail) relevant to the specific LAN
management:

Disable. Disabled alarm.

Status. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level: status signal.

Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level respectively: Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.

Enable - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the specific LAN management:

mdi. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).

mdi-x. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch
modality).

auto. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.

disable. LAN management disable.

Speed/Duplex - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed
used by the specific LAN management:

48

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

full duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

half duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

full duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

half duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

auto speed duplex. The auto negotiation is enabled.

In Band Management - LAN. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to
the supervision is achieved by means of the traffic LANs and/or the Radio ports of the Ethernet
Switch). If the LAN/Port box is:

Not active (

Active (

). The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is not active.

). The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is active.

Parameter available only if the Tagging procedure of management packets is not active (see
MNGT VLan Tagging).
In Band Management - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the in band supervision:

0. No VLan is reserved for the in band supervision.

Value different from 0. For the in band supervision, the VLan with the specific ID is
reserved.

Parameter available only if the Tagging procedure of management packets is not active (see
MNGT VLan Tagging).
MNGT VLan Tagging - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Activation status of the Tagging procedure of management packets in input/output from the specific LAN management:

Disable. The Tagging procedure is not active: the TAG is not managed for the management packets in input to/output from the LAN.

Enable. The Tagging procedure is active: the TAG is managed for the management
packets in input to/output from the LAN.

All the management packets in output from the equipment controller are tagged with
the VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure.

Enable Secure. The Tagging procedure is active: only the management packets with
VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure are accepted from the LAN.

Parameter available only if the in band supervision is not active (see In Band Management).
MNGT VLan Tagging - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the Tagging procedure:

0. No VLan is reserved for the Tagging procedure.

Value different from 0. For the Tagging procedure, the VLan with the specific ID is
reserved.

Parameter available only if the in band supervision is not active (see In Band Management).
See also

Verify the Ethernet port configuration

LCT PPP tab
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port for the connection to the PC where resides
the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Parameters

IP PPP Address. IP/PPP address of the port for the connection with the PC where resides the
SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
IP PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PC IP Address. IP address of the remote device:

Port IP Address + 1. The IP address of the considered port increased by 1 is assigned
to the remote device.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

49

For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 is assigned to the port, the address
10.10.10.9 will be automatically assigned to the remote device.

Ethernet Broadcast Ip Address - 1 or IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1. The last IP
address valid for the IP subnetwork connected to the considered port is assigned to
the remote device.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 with mask 255.255.255.0 is assigned
to the port, the address 10.10.10.254 will be automatically assigned to the remote
device.
If the equipment is managed with protocol:

IP, the value Ethernet Broadcast Ip Address - 1 is present.

OSI, the value IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1 is present.

Choose IP Address. The address set by the user in the box is assigned to the remote
device.

The PPP operating mode is automatic: the port self-configures in Server mode and, when the
connection is set up, assigns the IP address to the remote device (see parameter PC IP Address).
Push-button

IP Unnumbered. Not meaningful in this context.
See also

Verify the LCT PPP port configuration

Radio tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.
Parameters

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. Operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.

Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.

Push-button

IP Unnumbered. Not meaningful in this context.
See also

Verify the Radio port configuration

Radio 1A tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 1A signal.

50

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Parameters

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. Operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.

Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.

Push-button

IP Unnumbered Not meaningful in this context.
See also

Verify the Radio 1A port configuration

Radio 2A tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.
Parameters

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.

Push-button

IP Unnumbered. Not meaningful in this context.
See also

Verify the Radio 2A port configuration

Line EOC tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
Parameters

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

51

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.

Signal Input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:

Not Used. No interface.

E1. A timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).

EOC. Setting of the E1/timeslot used for the connection with the remote terminal:

2Mb Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates
that the system does not use any tributary.

Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot. The wording Not Assigned indicates that
no timeslot has ever been selected.

Parameter available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
Push-button

IP Unnumbered. Not meaningful in this context.
See also

Verify the Line EOC port configuration

IP Over OSI tab

WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol (see Tab.1).

The availability of the parameters present in the tab depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.2).
The tab displays some configuration parameters of the internal communication port for the interfacing with
the OSI router.
Parameters

IP Address. IP address of the internal port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI
router.
IP Net Mask. Mask for the internal network address definition.
Line EOC. Usage modality of the timeslot relevant to an E1:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Disable. The channel is not used.

Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input box.
Signal Input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:

Not used. No interface.

E1. A timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).

Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the User or Network value into the Line EOC
box.
EOC. Setting of the E1/timeslot used for the connection with the remote terminal:

2Mb Slot Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates that the system does not use any tributary.

Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot. The wording Not Assigned indicates that
no timeslot has ever been selected.

Parameter available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
Radio. Usage modality of the Radio channel:

52

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Bridge. The radio channel is used in Bridge Mode.

Disable. The radio channel is not used.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Radio 1A. Usage modality of the Radio 1A channel:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Bridge. The radio channel is used in Bridge Mode.

Disable. The radio channel is not used.

Radio 2A. Usage modality of the Radio 2A channel:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Disable. The radio channel is not used.

See also

Verify the IP Over OSI port configuration

NSAP tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol (see Tab.1).

The tab displays the remnant parameters for the configuration of the internal communication port which
interfaces with OSI router.
Parameters

Gosip Address. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.
Push-button

Set as Mac Address. Not meaningful in this context.
See also

Verify the IP Over OSI port configuration

ACL tab
The tab displays the IP Access Control List (ACL).
Parameters

Status parameter indicates the use status of the IP Access Control List:

Enable. The use of the IP Access Control List is enabled: the access to the equipment
by other elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is allowed only if the IP address of the element matches the rules pointed out in the list.

Disable. The use of the IP Access Control List is disabled: the access to the equipment
by other elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is not defined by the rules pointed out in the
list.

Table. Rules used by the IP Access Control List. Each line identifies a rule:
Name. Name of the rule.
IP Address. IP subnetwork or single IP network which the rule refers to.
Mask. Netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork or to the IP address which the rule refers to.
Permission. Usage conditions of the rule:

Allow Access. The IP subnetwork/address is allowed accessing the equipment.

Deny Access. The IP subnetwork/address is not allowed accessing the equipment.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

53

The rules are sorted in alphanumeric order with respect to their name (Name column).
Push-button

Add. Not meaningful in this context.
Remove. Not meaningful in this context.
See also

IP Access Control List (info)

54

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Available of the communication port
Depending on the type of configuration and protocol (IP/OSI) managed by the equipment, only the tabs
relevant to the communication ports managed by this configuration and/or protocol will be available as
shown in Tab.1.
For the IP Over OSI port the availability of the parameters present in the IP Over OSI tab depends on the
equipment configuration (see Tab.2).

Tab.1 Available of the communication ports
IP
Radio configuration

(1)

PROTOCOL

In Band Management
option

Unequipped

Available
communication ports

Enable/Disable

Ethernet
LCT PPP
Line EOC

1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option disable

Disable

Ethernet
LCT PPP
Radio
Line EOC

Enable

Ethernet
LCT PPP
Line EOC

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option enable

Disable

Ethernet
LCT PPP
Radio 1
Radio 2

Enable

Ethernet
LCT PPP

OSI
Radio configuration

(1)

Unequipped
1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option disable/enable
(1)

PROTOCOL

In Band Management
option

Available
communication ports

Enable/Disable

Ethernet
LCT PPP
IP Over OSI (IP Over OSI
and NSAP tabs)

See Configurator.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

55

Tab.2 Available parameters of the IP Over OSI tab
Radio configuration (1)
Unequipped

1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option disable

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option enable

(1)

56

In Band Management
option

Parameters present in the
IP Over OSI tab

Enable/Disable

IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC

Disable

IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC
Radio

Enable

IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC

Disable

IP Address
IP Net Mask
Radio 1
Radio 2

Enable

IP Address
IP Net Mask

See Configurator.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

IP Access Control List (info)
The IP Access Control List is a mechanism used to control and filter the source IP addresses which are allowed accessing to equipment.
This mechanism consists in a list of rules (Access Control Entry) which determine if an IP subnetwork or a
single IP address is allowed accessing to the selecting equipment.
Every rules are composed by a descriptive part and a decision-making part. The descriptive part of the rule
is represented by the IP address (or by a set of IP addresses) source of the packet. The decision-making
part is the action to execute: making the packet passes (Allow Access) or refusing it (Deny Access).
For an ALCplus2e equipment, the analysis of the packet consists in considering the following conditions:
1. The rules present in ACL are considered only if the use of ACL itself is enabled.
2. The control is applied only to the packets destined to the local equipment.
3. The access to the equipment is always allowed by the LCT PPP port (see Port Configuration & ACL).
4. The access is always allowed if the IP address coincides with that of a user who has executed a Login
procedure. The user is allowed modifying ACL without involving the loss of the connection with the
equipment.
5. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is not contained in any Deny Access
rule.
6. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is contained in, at least, one Allow
Access rule.
7. If ACL does not contain rules, enabling it is equivalent to forbidding the access to the equipment from
the Ethernet ports to every IP address.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

57

Routing Table
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING When all pieces of equipment belongs to the same IP network and sending packets to other networks is not necessary, the Routing Table and the address of the Gateway equipment must not be necessarily defined because the network can manage its own internal traffic.

Setting the Routing Table and Default Gateway is necessary when equipment must send packets between
two different networks, then the traffic must be re-routed from a network to another one (routing functionality of the equipment).
The Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Operations

Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment
GUI

Routing Table contextual area
See also

Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)

Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Routing Table.
The Routing Table contextual area displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).

58

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Routing Table contextual area
The contextual area shows the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the
equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Each row of the table corresponds to an item of the Routing Table.
Parameters

Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element.
Net Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element.
Hop. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway.
Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected
to:

Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.

Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.

Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.

Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.

Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb
EOC communication port.

<no wording>. internal port (internal loopback).

The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI). The
current setting of the parameters relevant to each port can be verified selecting Main > Port
Configuration & ACL.
Protocol. Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between specific port (Interface) and destination IP network:

Local. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface. The IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software.

NetMgmt. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the
user (static element).

Ospf. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment
interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the OSPF
protocol (dynamic element).

Other. All the other situations that are not comprised into one of the previous cases
(this label generally does not shown; it has been anticipated for future uses).

Default Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Running Default Gateway. The following box indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds to.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Add. Not available in this context.
Remove. Not available in this context.
Apply. Not available in this context.
Delete. Not available in this context.
See also

Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

59

Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)

Routing Table

The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages
exchanged among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one
network to the other one.
Running Routing Table
Each equipment at its initialization (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements
of the Routing Table that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication
ports provided with the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal).
These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.
If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically
change it into the equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the
equipment, because the elements of the Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.
If it is necessary, the user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other
ones.
The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller
(Stored Routing Table); the system does not record the elements (automatically set) into
the backup memory of the controller because they are newly set at every equipment
start-up.
The Running Routing Table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the
elements present into the Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up.
Stored Routing Table
The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the equipment restart.
In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the
Routing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid
only for the elements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants
to change an address of the equipment supervisory ports.
In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table).
The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At the next equipment
start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing
Table used by the equipment.
Default Gateway

The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a
receiver unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.

60

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Stored Routing Table
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The Stored Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Operations

Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory of the controller
GUI

Stored Routing Table contextual area
See also

Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)

Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory
of the controller
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Stored Routing Table.
The Stored Routing Table contextual area displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway
address present in the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored
Default Gateway).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

61

Stored Routing Table contextual area
The contextual area shows the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present in the backup
memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Each row of the table corresponds to an item of the Routing Table.
Parameters

Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element.
Net Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element.
Hop. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway.
Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected
to:

Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.

Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.

Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.

Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.

Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb
EOC communication port.

The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI). The
current setting of the parameters relevant to each port can be verified selecting Main > Port
Configuration & ACL.
Protocol. Parameter not meaningful in this context.
Default Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Stored Default Gateway. The next
box indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds
to.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Read again the data from the memory of the equipment after a Retrieve command.
For instance, if the user wants updating the Stored Routing Table displaying the elements manually added by the user into the Running Routing Table, he has to press Retrieve and later the
Refresh one.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Add. Not available in this context.
Remove. Not available in this context.
Retrieve. Not available in this context.
Save. Not available in this context
Apply. Not available in this context.
Delete. Not available in this context.
See also

Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)

62

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Performance Monitoring
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The Performance Monitoring command manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
Operations

Verify the status of the PM measures
Activate one or more PM measures
Deactivate one or more PM measures
Verify the results of the PM measures
Reset the values of the control parameters of a measure
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of a measure
Set the thresholds of the control parameters of a measure
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)
GUI

Performance Monitoring contextual area
See also

PM measures
PM measures (info)

Verify the status of the PM measures
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Open Performances Window.
In the right side of the View/Modify P.M. Status window (Termination Point area) for each measure is
pointed out in the column:

Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment.

TP Class. Name of the type of measure (group).

TP Instance. Name of the measure.

Status. Status of the measure: active (wording Running), inactive (wording Not running).

For the description of the View/Modify P.M. Status window refer to the user manual of the NMS supervision system.

Activate one or more PM measures
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Open Performances Window.
3. In the View/Modify P.M. Status window, to activate:

All the PM measures, select Action > Start > All.

The measures present in the Termination Point area, select Action > Start > Filtered.

The measures selected in the Termination Point area, select Action > Start > Selected.

Single measure, select Action > Attributes Manager.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

63

In the Attributes Manager window, select the group (P.M. <measure name>) and than the
wished measure.
The Start Stop box displays the status of the measure: Start (measure active), Stop (measure
not active).
In the Start Stop box, set the Start value and press Send Set.
For the description of the View/Modify P.M. Status and Attributes Manager window refer to the user
manual of the NMS supervision system.

Deactivate one or more PM measures
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Open Performances Window.
3. In the View/Modify P.M. Status window, to deactivate:

All the PM measures, select Action > Stop > All.

The measures present in the Termination Point area, select Action > Stop > Filtered.

The measures selected in the Termination Point area, select Action > Stop > Selected.

Single measure, select Action > Attributes Manager.
In the Attributes Manager window, select the group (P.M. <measure name>) and than the
wished measure.
The Start Stop box displays the status of the measure: Start (measure active), Stop (measure
not active).
In the Start Stop box, set the Stop value and press Send Set.

For the description of the View/Modify P.M. Status and Attributes Manager window refer to the user
manual of the NMS supervision system.

Verify the results of the PM measures

The results of the PM measures of equipment can be displayed selecting the relevant NE object in the map
window and then the Performance > Performance Monitoring command.
For the description and use of the Performance Monitoring command refer to the user manual of the
NMS supervision system.

Reset the values of the control parameters of a measure
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Open Performances Window.
3. In the View/Modify P.M. Status window, select Action > Attributes Manager.
4. In the Attributes Manager window, select the group (P.M. <measure name>) and than the wished
measure.
For the description of the View/Modify P.M. Status and Attributes Manager window refer to the user
manual of the NMS supervision system.
5. In the Counter Clear box, set the clear value.
6. Press Send Set.

64

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of a measure
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Open Performances Window.
3. In the View/Modify P.M. Status window, select Action > Attributes Manager.
4. In the Attributes Manager window, select the group (P.M. <measure name>) and than the wished
measure.
For the description of the View/Modify P.M. Status and Attributes Manager window refer to the user
manual of the NMS supervision system.
5. In the Alarm Clear box, set the clear value.
6. Press Send Set.

Set the thresholds of the control parameters of a measure
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Open Performances Window.
3. In the View/Modify P.M. Status window, select Action > Attributes Manager.
4. In the Attributes Manager window, select the group (P.M. <measure name>) and than the wished
measure.
For the description of the View/Modify P.M. Status and Attributes Manager window refer to the user
manual of the NMS supervision system.
If G828 Radio, G828 E1 Line Side, G828 E1 Internal Side or G829 RstB1 STM-1 measure is selected, the window displays the following parameters:

Num. SES to set UAS. Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with SES - beyond which UAS unavailability period starts.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10) and press Send Set.

Num. SES to reset UAS. Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without SES
- beyond which UAS unavailability period starts.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 10 sec. (default 10) and press Send Set.

Percent. BBE to set SES. Threshold - expressed as percentage of the errored blocks - beyond
which SES is declared.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 100% (default 30%) and press Send Set.

15 Min ES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Es.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min SES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Ses.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour ES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Es.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour SES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Ses.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set.

15 Min SEP Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute period
- over which it is activated the alarm 15M Sep.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

65

24 Hour SEP Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour period
- over which it is activated the alarm24H Sep.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

If G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 or G828 Vc12 STM-1 measure is selected, the window displays the following parameters:

66

Num. SES to set UAS. Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with SES - beyond which UAS unavailability period starts.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10) and press Send Set.

Num. SES to reset UAS. Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without SES
- beyond which UAS unavailability period starts.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 10 sec. (default 10) and press Send Set.

Percent. BBE to set SES. Threshold - expressed as percentage of the errored blocks - beyond
which SES is declared.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 100% (default 30%) and press Send Set.

15 Min ES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Es.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min SES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Ses.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour ES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Es.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour SES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Ses.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set.

15 Min SEP Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute period
- over which it is activated the alarm 15M Sep.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour SEP Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour period
- over which it is activated the alarm24H Sep.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min ES Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Es FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min SES Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Ses FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour ES Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Es FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour SES Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Ses FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min SEP Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP FE events within a 15
minute period - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Sep FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour SEP Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP FE events within a 24
hour period - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Sep FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

If RxPwr Radio measure is selected, the window displays the following parameters:

24 Hour Rlts1 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT1 threshold level - over which the system activates the 24H Rlts1 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm

24 Hour Rlts2 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT2 threshold level - over which the system activates the 24H Rlts2 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour Rlts3 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT3 threshold level - over which the system activates the 24H Rlts3 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm

24 Hour Rlts4 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT4 threshold level - over which the system activates the 24H Rlts4 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour Rlts5 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT5 threshold level - over which the system activates the 24H Rlts5 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min Rlts1 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT1 threshold level - over which the system activates the 15M Rlts1 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 9400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min Rlts2 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT2 threshold level - over which the system activates the 15M Rlts2 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 9400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min Rlts3 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT3 threshold level - over which the system activates the 15M Rlts3 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 9400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min Rlts4 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT4 threshold level - over which the system activates the 15M Rlts4 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 9400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min Rlts5 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT5 threshold level - over which the system activates the 15M Rlts5 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 9400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

Received Power Level Threshold 1. The first threshold level of the received power.
To change the parameter set a value between -100dBm and -20dBm and press Send Set.

Received Power Level Threshold 2. The second threshold level of the received power.
To change the parameter set a value between -100dBm and -20dBm and press Send Set.

Received Power Level Threshold 3. The third threshold level of the received power.
To change the parameter set a value between -100dBm and -20dBm and press Send Set.

Received Power Level Threshold 4. The fourth threshold level of the received power.
To change the parameter set a value between -100dBm and -20dBm and press Send Set.

Received Power Level Threshold 5. The fifth threshold level of the received power.
To change the parameter set a value between -100dBm and -20dBm and press Send Set.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

67

If TxPwr Radio measure is selected, the window displays the following parameters:

24 Hour Tlts1 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 24H Tlts1 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour Tlts2 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT2 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 24H Tlts2 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour Tlts3 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT3 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 24H Tlts3 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour Tlts4 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT4 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 24H Tlts4 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min Tlts1 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 15M Tlts1 alarms.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min Tlts2 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT2 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 15M Tlts2 alarms.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min Tlts3 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT3 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 15M Tlts3 alarms.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min Tlts4 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT4 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 15M Tlts4 alarms.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

Tx Power Level Threshold 1. The first threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change the parameter set a value between -40dBm and 35dBm and press Send Set.

Tx Power Level Threshold 2. The second threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change the parameter set a value between -40dBm and 35dBm and press Send Set.

Tx Power Level Threshold 3. The third threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change the parameter set a value between -40dBm and 35dBm and press Send Set.

Tx Power Level Threshold 4. The fourth threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change the parameter set a value between -40dBm and 35dBm and press Send Set.

If ACM Radio measure is selected, the window displays the following parameters:

68

15 Min 4QAM Str Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 4QAM
Strong alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 4QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 8PSK alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

15 Min 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 16QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min 32QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the counter 32QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 32QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min 64QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the counter 64QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 64QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min 128QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 128QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm 15M
128QAM.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

15 Min 256QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 256QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 256QAM
alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour 4QAM Str Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 4QAM
Strong alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 4QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 8PSK alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 16QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour 32QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 32QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 32QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour 64QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 64QAM has increased- over which it is activated the 24H 64QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour 128QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 128QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 128QAM
alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24 Hour 256QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 256QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 256QAM
alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

69

Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING This operation stops the measure ACM Radio, if active.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Open Performances Window.
3. In the View/Modify P.M. Status window, select Action > Attributes Manager.
4. In the Attributes Manager window, select Radio Equipment Global > Radio Equipment Global.
The PM ACM Policy parameter indicates the modality used to increase the counters.
5. To change the parameter, select the option:

Active Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is equal to the currently active
one, are increased.

Not Available Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation), are
increased.

6. Press Send Set.

70

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Performance Monitoring contextual area

The contextual area manages the PM measures.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Not meaningful in this context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Open Performances Window. Open the View/Modify P.M. Status window.
For the description of the window refer to the user manual of the NMS supervision system.
See also

Verify the status of the PM measures
Activate one or more PM measures
Deactivate one or more PM measures
Verify the results of the PM measures
Reset the values of the control parameters of a measure
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of a measure
Set the thresholds of the control parameters of a measure
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)
PM measures
PM measures (info)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

71

PM measures

G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>
G828 Radio <radio branch>
G828 E1 Line Side
G828 E1 Internal Side
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>
ACM Radio <radio branch>
RxPwr Radio <radio branch>
TxPwr Radio <radio branch>

G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>
WARNING Measure available only if the management of STM-1(s) is active (see Configurator).

The measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>
WARNING Measure available only if the management of STM-1(s) is active (see Configurator).

The measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parameters:
Byte B2
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of

72

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
Byte M1
BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting
of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into
the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
Byte B2 and M1
UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according
to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

G828 Radio <radio branch>
WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.

The G828 Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

G828 E1 Line Side
WARNING To execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.

The measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at
line side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

73

SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

G828 E1 Internal Side
WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.

To execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.
The measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at
internal side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>
WARNING Measure available only if the management of STM-1(s) is active (see Configurator).

Measure not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
The measure checks the quality of the received VC-12 into the STM-1.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of

74

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting
of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into
the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according
to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

ACM Radio <radio branch>
WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.

Measure meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is active.
The ACM Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles (transmitter) in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters (UpShift and DownShift):
4QAM Str. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM Str. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
4QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode*.
8PSK. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 8PSK. The rule used to increase the counter changes
according to the active increase mode*.
16QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 16QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
32QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 32QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
64QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 64QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
128QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 128QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
256QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 256QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
DownShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has
changed assuming an ACM profile lower than the previous one.
UpShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming an ACM profile higher than the previous one.
* The counters relevant to the ACM profiles can be increased according to the following modes:

Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to
the one currently active.

Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher
than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation).

Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

75

Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.

Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.

The mode used to increase the counters of the ACM profiles is common to all the counters and must be
selected by the user.

RxPwr Radio <radio branch>
WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.

The RxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15
min or 24 hours).
Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold
level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 5 threshold levels.
The parameters are implemented according to the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.

TxPwr Radio <radio branch>
WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.

The TxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period
(15 min or 24 hours)
Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the pre-defined
threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.
The parameters are implemented according to the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.

76

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

PM measures (info)
A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of
specific parameters.
Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can
be changed).
The exceeding of the threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition generates an alarm.
The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as
normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the threshold limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms.
The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure
type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommendations (for instance G.828, G.826, etc.).
The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed only after a command forwarded
by the user.
When it has been activated a PM measure, the main controller of the equipment starts the storing of the
values relevant to the control parameters. The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each
record contains the values recorded into a specific time range (observation period).
If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another
observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure.
The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary records) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated but such
records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the
daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time
11.4011.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.3011.45), while the first daily record will have as observation period 11.4000.00.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary
records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day).
The preceding records are overwritten.
When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record.
If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the
system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure.
For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly
activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.009.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.099.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.029.07 will not be
stored.
If equipment has some PM measures on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will successively restarted or turned on the measures activated before the turning off will be automatically re-started.
The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measure has been stopped, will result empty
and when it has been reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the preceding records.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

77

SNTP & Wake Up Config.
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The SNTP & Wake Up Config. command manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time
of the equipment from a network element (SNTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality).
Operations

Verify the SNTP functionality
Verify the Wake Up functionality status
GUI

SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area
See also

SNTP functionality (info)
Wake Up functionality (info)

Verify the SNTP functionality
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > SNTP & Wake Up Config.
The SNTP tab displays the activation status of SNTP functionality and the current setting of the relevant
execution parameters.

Verify the Wake Up functionality status
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

1. Select Main > SNTP & Wake Up Config.
2. Select the Wake Up tab.
The tab displays the sending status of the Wake Up trap and the current setting of the relevant sending
parameters.

78

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area
The contextual area displays the parameters to configure the automatic acquisition of the reference date/
time of the equipment from a network element (SNTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality).
Tabs

SNTP tab. SNTP functionality configuration.
Wake Up tab. Wake Up functionality configuration.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

SNTP tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the SNTP functionality.
Parameter

Main Server IP Address / Reserve Server IP Addr. Activation status and IP address of the
main NE (Main) and of the secondary NE (Reserve) present in the network which the equipment
automatically gets the reference date/time from. The automatic acquisition of the reference
date/time of the equipment is:

Active, when a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is present in the Main Server IP
Address and/or Reverse Server IP Address box.

Inactive, when the value 0.0.0.0 (IP address reset) is present in the boxes Main Server IP Address and Reverse Server IP Address.

Polling Interval (Sec.). Time interval (expressed in seconds) between a request of reference
date/time update and the next one.
Polling Timeout (Sec.). Time interval (expressed in seconds) that the equipment must wait
before re attempting the transmission of a request to the main or secondary element.
Polling Retries. Number of times that the equipment must re attempt the transmission of a
request to the main or secondary element.
NTP Server Lost Alarm. The activation of the NTP Server Lost Alarm indicates that none of the
set network elements is reachable, as consequence the reference date/time of the equipment is
not aligned. The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

See also

SNTP functionality (info)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

79

Wake Up tab
WARNING Tab meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Wake Up functionality.
Parameter

Status. Transmission status of Wake Up trap. The sending of the Wake Up trap is:

Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).

Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).

NMS IP Address. IP address of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to. With server
we mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a different management system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed.
Gosip Address. NSAP address (Gosip) of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to.
Parameter meaningful and available only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network.
Timeout (Minutes). Time interval for which the Wake Up trap, when enabled, is sent to the
server. The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually
disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
NE Location. Optional parameter. The user can insert the physical location (for example the
name of the site) of the equipment in this field. This information is communicated to the remote
manager together with the characteristics of the equipment. The supervision system NMS5UXB or NMS5LX does not use this information.
See also

Wake Up functionality (info)

80

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

SNTP functionality (info)
The ALCplus2e equipment, via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) protocol, can update its date/time
using an element within the network as reference (SNTP functionality).
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible to define a maximum of two elements, one main (set
in the Main Server IP Address box) and one secondary (set in the Reserve Server IP Addr box) from which
the equipment automatically gets the reference date/time each n seconds (set in the Polling Interval box).
Entering a valid value for the main and/or secondary element causes the activation of the functionality.
If the main element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/time, this
request is sent for n times (set in the Polling Retries box) each t seconds (set in the Polling Timeout box).
At the end of this requests, if the main element does not answer, the equipment requires the updating of
the date/time to the secondary element.
If the secondary element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/
time, this request is sent for n times each t seconds. At the end of this request, if the secondary element
does not answer the equipment, the system activates the NTP Server Lost Alarm and requires the update
of the date/time of the main element and so on.
If no network element set can be reached, the reference date/time of the equipment is not updated. This
condition is signalled by the activation of NTP Server Lost Alarm (SNTP tab).
To deactivate the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time, it is necessary to reset the IP address
of the main and secondary elements.
See also

Verify the SNTP functionality
SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

81

Wake Up functionality (info)
WARNING What reported here below is valid when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol (see SNMP

protocol (info).
The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a remote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).
This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the supervision
systems NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX.
The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not managed by
the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is reported in the relevant
documentation.
This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. The implementation of
the Wake Up functionality is the following.
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible:

Define the IP address and the NSAP address (meaningful only if equipment and server are inserted within an OSI network) of the server where the supervision system, which the trap must
be sent to (NMS IP Address option - Wake Up tab) is installed.

Define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the trap is
automatically disabled (Timeout option).
If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the user
manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.

Activate and deactivate the sending of the trap.
To activate the Wake Up functionality, it is necessary to set a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
as IP address of the server (NMS IP Address option) and select the Enable option.
To deactivate the functionality, it is necessary to select the Disable option or reset the NMS IP
Address option (value 0.0.0.0).

When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap every minute
for the time interval defined by the user (Timeout option). For example, if the value 60 has been set as
timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the sending of the trap is automatically
disabled.
If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up
notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables the sending of the
Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off).
See also

Verify the Wake Up functionality status
SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area

82

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

SD Memory Management
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The SD Memory Management command manages the SD memory card (Secure Digital Memory Card)
for the backup/restore of the equipment software and configuration.
Operations

Verify the status and the configuration of the SD
Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU
Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD
MANAGEMENT

AND MAINTENANCE OF THE

SD

Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to the controller
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
GUI

SD Memory Management contextual area
See also

SD memory card (info)

Verify the status and the configuration of the SD
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
The SD Memory Management contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the SD present in the IDU unit.

Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU
Access | Read & Write
WARNING In case of replacement of the IDU unit of equipment, it is possible to use the SD, where the
equipment configuration and software (Boot SD) have been previously saved, to restart the new controller
based on the data present in SD.

This operation is very important because it avoids the equipment re-configuration necessary after a change
of the IDU unit.
Here below the whole procedure is described, which must be applied so that the automatic equipment restart from SD is successful.
1. Save the equipment configuration and software to the SD:
a. Insert the SD in the equipment.
b. Open the WEB CT page relevant to the equipment.
c. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
d. Press Create BOOT SD and confirm.
The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD, the following operations are executed in this order:

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

83

Deletion of all the files present in the SD.

Creation of the file structure of type Boot SD.

Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).

Copy of the backup files (configuration parameters).

If the operation has been successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the
parameter Type assumes the value Boot SD.
e. Press:

Enable automatic restore (all) and confirm, to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD: at the restart, both the configuration data and the equipment software
will be pasted from the SD to the new controller.

Enable automatic restore (Data only) and confirm, to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD: at the restart, only the configuration data will be pasted from the
SD to the new controller.

If the operation has been successful and, in the previous step, the selected command was:

Enable automatic restore (all), the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Automatic SW download from SD assume the value Enabled.

Enable automatic restore (Data only), the parameter Automatic data restore from SD assumes the value Enabled.

At this point, if the SD is not removed from the equipment, the controller activates the automatic synchronisation of the data: this means that every configuration change is automatically saved even to the
SD.
If the equipment software is updated, this is not automatically saved into the SD. Moreover, the procedure for the automatic restart is aborted (the parameters Enable automatic restore (all) and/or Enable automatic restore (Data only) assume the value Disabled). In this case, it is suggested to execute
again this procedure in order to enable again the SD to the automatic restart.
2. As soon as the equipment becomes faulted and the IDU unit needs to be replaced, switch off the malfunctioning IDU, remove the SD card and insert it in the new IDU unit.
3. Install and switch the new IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment and sw configuration into the new controller, the following checks are
executed:

The status of the equipment controller must be Replaced Controller.

The data structure of the SD must be of type Boot SD.

The value of EC serial number (present in the descriptor file of SD) must be different from that
stored in the equipment controller.

In the descriptor file of the SD, the automatic restart from SD must be active (parameter Automatic SW download from SD and/or Automatic data restore from SD - value Enabled).

In case of automatic restart enabled only for the configuration data (selection of the Enable automatic restore (Data only) command - see step 1e), the configuration data stored in the SD
must be referred to equipment sw version older than or equal to that currently active in the controller.

If the above mentioned checks were successful:
a. The backup configuration files are copied from the SD to the controller.
b. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded). This operation is executed only if:

The Enable automatic restore (all) command has been selected at step 1e.

The running version of the equipment software (Running) is different from that present
in the SD.

c. The Serial Number of the controller present in the descriptor file of the SD is updated.
d. The Serial Number of the equipment controller is updated.
e. The controller with change of the memory bench in use (Bench Switch) is forced to restart if
even the sw update (selection of the Enable automatic restore (all) command - see step 1e) has
been required.
f. The controller restarts with the updated sw (if required) and applying the configuration data read
from the SD.

84

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the automatic restart is not executed
and the controller stays in status Replaced Controller waiting for an intervention of the user.

Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD
Access | Read & Write
WARNING If the equipment software must be updated on different equipment, the SD can be used to execute the operation automatically without the use of the management software (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or
NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).

Here below the whole procedure, which must be applied in order that the automatic update of the equipment sw from SD is successful, is described.
1. Save the equipment software master to the SD:
a. Insert the SD into the equipment where the new sw version is present.
b. Open the WEB CT page relevant to the equipment
c. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
d. Press Create Sw DWL SD and confirm.
The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD, the following operations are executed in this order:

Deletion of all the files present in the SD

Creation of the file structure of type Sw Dwl SD.

Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).

If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the parameter Type assumes the value Sw download SD.
e. Press Enable automatic restore and confirm, in order to enable the automatic update of the
equipment sw from SD on the equipment restart.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Automatic SW download from SD assumes the
value Enabled.
f. Press Enable “Not running” Sw delete and confirm, if you wish that, once the update and the
change of the memory bench of the controller are ended, the sw present in the bench StandBy
(bench where the old sw is present), is automatically deleted.
If the operation was successful, the parameter “Not running” Sw delete assumes the value Enabled.
2. Switch the equipment off, remove the SD card and insert it into another equipment whose software you
wish to update.
The removal of the SD card can be executed even with equipment on. In this case, the integrity of the
data present on the memory is not ensured, because when the equipment is on, the system performs
writing operations in background on SD card. The removal of the memory during one of these operations could damage the data present in the memory itself.
3. Switch the IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment sw into the new controller, the following checks are executed:

The data structure of the SD must be of type Sw Dwl SD.

The automatic update from SD must be active in the descriptor file of the SD (parameter Enable
automatic restore).

The sw version stored in the SD must be different from both the versions present in the memory
benches of the controller.

If the above mentioned checks were successful:
a. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded).
b. The restart of the controller with change of the memory bench in use is forced (Bench Switch)
and, then, if set (see step 1.f), the sw present in the StandBy bench is deleted.
c. The controller restarts with the updated software.
If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the operation is not executed.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

85

Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD
Access | Read & Write
WARNING This operation deletes ALL the files of the structure Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD. The deletion of a

single file os not foreseen.
1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
2. Press Delete SD files and confirm.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Not formatted.

Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
2. Press Disable automatic restore and confirm.
Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Automatic SW download from SD assume the value Disabled.

Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after
an automatic sw update from SD
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
2. Press Disable “Not running” Sw delete and confirm.
Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameter “Not running” Sw delete assumes the value
Disabled.

Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to
the controller
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Boot SD are present.

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
2. Press Force automatic restore and confirm.

Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
2. Press Copy Sw from SD and confirm.
The equipment sw is copied from the SD to the controller, overwriting the inactive memory bench
(Loaded status).

86

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

SD Memory Management contextual area
The contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the SD present in the equipment.
Parameters

Status. SD status:
SD status

Presence of SD in
the equipment

Compatibility SD data
structure - equipment

Compatibility SD data equipment type

Loaded

Yes

Yes

Yes

Equipment Type
Mismatch

Yes

Yes

No

Not formatted

Yes

No

No

Not Present

No

-

-

Type. Type of data present in SD:

Boot SD. The SD contains the equipment configuration parameters and the equipment software.

Sw download SD. The SD contains only the equipment software.

Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present or memory data structure not
recognized/compatible with the equipment, etc.).

Automatic data restore from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the configuration data from
SD:

Enabled. The automatic update of the data from SD is enabled.

Disabled. The automatic update of the data from SD is not enabled.

Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).

Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
Automatic SW download from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the equipment software
from SD:

Enabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD is enabled.

Disabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD is not enabled.

Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).

“Not running” Sw delete. Enabling of the automatic deletion of the equipment software present in the StandBy memory bench (status Loaded - see Software Info & Maint.) after an automatic sw update from SD:

Enabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is enabled.

Disabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is not enabled.

Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).

Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Sw Dwl SD.
EC serial number. Serial number of the controller which has generated the version of the data
and equipment software present in SD.
The empty field indicates that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
EC system version. File name and version of the equipment software currently used by the
controller which has generated the version of Boot SD present in the SD.
The empty field shows that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
SW system version. File name and version of the equipment sw present in the SD.
The empty field shows that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
In the left part of the contextual area, the commands for the management of SD are displayed. Tab.3 lists the commands. For every command, the use, depending on the data present
in the SD, and the mean times for the execution of the operation are pointed out.
The No actions available! wording shows that the SD is not present.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

87

Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU
Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to the controller
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
SD memory card (info)

88

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

SD memory card (info)

Storing the equipment data into SD
Use of the SD for the equipment management
Commands for the management/maintenance of SD
Warnings about the correct use of SD card

Storing the equipment data into SD
ALCplus2e equipment is provided with a reader, which allows storing the following equipment data on SD
(Secure Digital) memory cards:
Equipment configuration parameters and equipment software. Saving these data generates a
data structure named Boot SD into the SD.
Equipment software. Saving these data generates a data structure named Sw Dwl SD into the
SD.
WARNING Both the data structures cannot be saved at the same time in the same SD. The creation of the
structure Boot SD automatically deletes the data structure Sw Dwl SD and vice versa.

What just said is valid only for the information with data structure recognized by ALCplus2e equipment and
relevant management programs (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX). Any other type of data
stored in SD (user file) is not deleted or damaged by the commands described in this chapter.
When the user saves the configuration parameters and/or the equipment software on SD, the following file
data structure is automatically created:
Root
Descriptor.txt. Descriptor file of text type, where the characteristics of the data present in the
SD are present: type of equipment the data refer to, type of data in SD (Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD),
etc.
This information is used by the management software to execute the compatibility checks between the data of the SD and the equipment where the SD is inserted.
Backup. Backup file of the equipment configuration parameters
Software. Files of equipment software (equipment Sw/Fw + WEB LCT)
If SD is of type Sw Dwl SD, the directory Backup will be empty.
ALCplus2e equipment supports the following cards:

SD memory card (Secure Digital).

SDHC memory card (Secure Digital High Capacity).

Use of the SD for the equipment management
The SD can be used to make the following operations easy and fast:

Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU
This operation allows saving the whole equipment configuration, sw/fw included, on the SD and
keeping it constantly updated.
In fact, after the creation of the data structure of type Boot SD in the SD, the controller, after
any configuration change, updates the data present in the in the SD, keeping them constantly
updated.
When the equipment is faulted, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the faulted IDU unit
and insert it into the new IDU unit.
When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the data and the
sw present in the SD are copied into the controller returning the equipment configuration to the
condition before the fault.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

89

Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD
This operation allows saving, on the SD, the new equipment sw/fw which will result to be the
master sw to use for the updating of other equipment.
At this point, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the IDU and to insert into a different IDU.
When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the sw present
in the SD is copied into the controller.

As help for the management of SD, by means of the SD Memory Management contextual area, the following can be executed:
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to the controller
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
SD memory card (info)

Commands for the management/maintenance of SD
The commands available to the user for the management/maintenance of the SD are listed in Tab.3.
The table shows, for every command, the use depending on the type of data structure present in the SD
and the mean execution times of the operations.
Tab.3 Commands for the management of SD
Command
Create BOOT SD
Create Sw DWL SD

SD without data structure

SD with data structure Boot SD

SD with data structure Sw Dwl SD

Time

(1)

It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment configuration parameters and
equipment sw (Boot SD) from the controller to the SD

5 min.

It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment sw (Sw Dwl SD)
from the controller to the SD

5 min.

It deletes all the files of the structure Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD

1/2 min.

Delete SD files
Copy Sw from SD

-

-

It copies the equipment sw from SD
to controller overwriting the inactive
memory bench (status Loaded).

5 min.

Enable automatic
restore (all)

-

It enables the automatic equipment
restart from SD: when the equipment
restarts, both the configuration data
and the equipment sw will be copied
from the SD.

-

1/2 sec.

Enable automatic
restore (Data only)

-

It enables the automatic equipment
restart from SD: when the equipment
restarts, only the configuration data
will be copied from the SD to the new
controller

-

1/2 sec.

Enable automatic
restore

-

-

It enables the automatic equipment
restart from SD: when the equipment
restarts, the equipment sw will be
copied from the SD to the controller.

1/2 sec.

Disable automatic
restore

-

It disables the automatic update of
the equipment sw from SD

1/2 sec.

90

It disables the automatic restart of
the equipment from SD

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Command

SD with data structure Boot SD

SD with data structure Sw Dwl SD

Enable
“Not running”
Sw delete

-

-

It enables the automatic deletion of
the equipment sw present in the
StandBy memory bench (status
Loaded - see Software Info & Maint.)
after an automatic update of the sw
from SD

1/2 sec.

Disable
“Not running”
Sw delete

-

-

It disables the automatic deletion of
the equipment sw present in the
StandBy memory bench after an automatic update of the sw from SD

1/2 sec.

Force automatic
restore

-

It forces the restore, from SD to controller, of the configuration data and
of the equipment sw

-

5 min.

(1)

Time

(1)

SD without data structure

Mean execution time of the operation.

Warnings about the correct use of SD card

Deletion of data

The SD card supplied with the equipment is ready for use (formatting not needed).
Once used for the first time, the data stored in the SD card can be deleted using the commands
present in WEB LCT (see Commands for the management/maintenance of SD).
It is suggested never to format the card, because a wrong formatting (unknown format) will prevent the SD card to work correctly.
Removal of SD card

It is suggested to remove the SD card from the equipment only after it has been switched off.
Only in this way, we are sure not to damage the data stored in the card because, when the
equipment is on, writing operations are performed in background on SD card.
The removal of the memory during one of these activities could damage the data present in the
memory itself.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

91

Software Info & Maint.
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The Software Info & Maint. command manages the equipment firmware.
Operations

Verify the firmware version of the equipment
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller
GUI

Software Info & Maint contextual area
See also

Equipment firmware (info)

Verify the firmware version of the equipment
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
The Equipment Firmware tab shows version, status and composition of the equipment firmware.

Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Memory benches cannot be switched during the firmware update (Download Status parameter
- Downloading value) and when the firmware of the equipment is not present on a bench (Bench Status
parameter - Not Loaded value).

Usually, the switch of the memory benches of main controller does NOT interrupt the traffic. This operation
can temporarily interrupt the traffic if the new loaded version contains a new FPGA version.
1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
2. Press Bench Switch and confirm.
The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status
and vice versa.

92

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Software Info & Maint contextual area
The contextual area displays the equipment firmware.
Tabs

Equipment Firmware tab. Version and status of the equipment firmware.
Web LCT tab. Not available in this context.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Equipment Firmware tab
The tab shows the version, the status and the composition of the equipment firmware.
Parameters

FIRST

TABLE.

Version and status of the equipment firmware.

Software Version. File name and version of the equipment firmware respectively present on
the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column).
Bench Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2
column):

Running. It is on progress the firmware relevant to the subject memory bench.

Loaded. The firmware is present into the bench but actually it is not on progress
(StandBy).

Not Loaded. The firmware is not present into the memory bench.

Downloading Status. Status of the update operation of the firmware respectively present on
memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column):

---. Firmware update is not in progress.

Downloading. It is on progress the updating of the firmware relevant to the memory
bench.

Interrupted. The update of the firmware has been interrupted.

Complete. The update operation is ended.

SECOND TABLE. List of the codes and of the FPGA files that compose the equipment firmware. Every row
corresponds to a firmware element (code or FPGA) for which is pointed out in the column:
Unit. Name of the unit or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or the programmable device (FPGA file).
Software. Firmware name. Usually the name shows the component type:

FW_Boot. Boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not provided
with a version of the memory benches.

FW_appl. Application code.

Conf or FPGA Configuration file of the programmable devices.

Actual Release. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller.
For some elements, the system shows the version and also the relevant identification code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a different code type).
Release Bench 1. Firmware version present into the memory bench 1 of the controller.
Release Bench 2. Firmware version present into the memory bench 2 of the controller.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

93

Push-button

Upgrade. Not available in this context.
Bench Switch. Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller.
See also

Equipment firmware (info)

94

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Equipment firmware (info)
The firmware of the equipment is the assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management of the
entire equipment (firmware of the main controller and firmware of the peripheral units).
The firmware of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory benches (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status.
Each bench can contain one firmware version (also different from the other one) of the equipment.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

95

Security Config.
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the Security package functionality is enabled.

Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more
features can be enabled.
The Security Config. command manages the equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and
SNMPv3).
Operations

Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3)
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode)
SSH
Configure the SSH protocol
GUI

Security Config. contextual area
See also

Security (info)
SSH protocol (info)
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info)
FTP/SFTP protocol (info)
SNMP protocol (info)

Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3)
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Main > Security Config.
The Security Config. contextual area displays the active security functions of the equipment.

Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode
Access | Read & Write
WARNING In order to create a secure equipment network, it is necessary to execute this operation for all

the pieces of equipment in the network.
1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Exclusive in order to activate the management of SSH/
SFTP protocols.
3. Press Apply.
A message informs the operator that the operation involves the equipment restart and asks if apply the
change or not.
4. Press:

96

Yes and confirm if you wish not to apply the protocol change but to apply possible changes to
other configuration parameters.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

No and confirm if you wish to apply the protocol change. The operation restarts the equipment.

5. Configure the SSH protocol

Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Unavailable in order to activate the management of Telnet/
FTP protocols.
3. Press Apply.
A message informs the operator that the operation involves the equipment restart and asks if apply the
change or not.
4. Press:

Yes and confirm if you wish not to apply the protocol change but to apply possible changes to
other configuration parameters.

No and confirm if you wish to apply the protocol change. The operation restarts the equipment.

Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure
Mode)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING It is suggested to use the mixed mode only during the migration of the network equipment from
Secure Mode to Not Secure Mode or vice versa.

1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Available in order to activate the management of the security protocols (SSH/SFTP, etc.) and of the protocols which do not ensure security (Telnet, FTP).
3. Press Apply.
A message informs the operator that the operation involves the equipment restart and asks if apply the
change or not.
4. Press:

Yes and confirm if you wish not to apply the protocol change but to apply possible changes to
other configuration parameters.

No and confirm if you wish to apply the protocol change. The operation restarts the equipment.

5. Activate or deactivate the security protocols according to one’s security need.
The activation of a security protocol ensures the security only for the functionality relevant to the protocol.

Configure the SSH protocol
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security (info).

1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. To set the version of the SSH (Secure SHell) protocol managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select
the box (parameter SSH Version):

v1. Version 1 of SSH protocol.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

97

Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH server.
Option not available when the value None is selected for the Cipher Algorithm parameter.

v2. Version 2 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH client.

The active box ( ) indicates that the specific version 2 of the SSH protocol is managed by the equipment; the inactive box indicates that the version is not managed.
3. To set the public key asymmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select
the box (parameter SSH Host Key):

DSA (only v2). DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) key cypher algorithm.

RSA. RSA key cypher algorithm.

Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of SSH protocol.
The active box (
aged.

) indicates that the specific key is manage; the inactive box that the key is not man-

It is not possible to deactivate both the keys.
4. To set the algorithm for the authentication of the messages managed by the equipment in Secure Mode,
select the box (parameter Authentication):

None. No authentication algorithm.

HMAC - SHA-1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) based on hash code
(HMAC).

HMAC - SHA1 - 96. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 with 96 bit digest based on hash code
(HMAC).

HMAC - MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.

The active box ( ) indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the algorithm
is not managed.
If the None box is active, no algorithm is managed.
The activation of None box automatically deactivates all the other boxes. The activation of at least one
box HMAC... automatically deactivates the box None.
5. To set the symmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select the box
(parameter Cipher Algorithm):

None. No cypher algorithm.

3DES - CBC. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.

AES 128, 192, 256 (only v2) - CBC. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm
with 128 bit key (AES 128), 192 bit key (AES 192) or 256 bit key (AES 259).
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of the SSH protocol.

The active box ( ) indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the algorithm
is not managed.
If the None box is active, no algorithm is managed.
The activation of None box automatically deactivates all the other boxes. Moreover it deactivates the
option V1 (parameter SSH Version).
The activation of at least one 3DES.../AES...box automatically deactivates the box None.
6. Press Apply and confirm.

98

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Security Config. contextual area
The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to the security functions available on the equipment.

Parameters

PROTOCOLS

AREA

Secure Protocols. Management of the security protocols of the equipment:

Available. The equipment manages the FTP and Telnet protocols (Not Secure Mode)
and the SFTP and SSH protocols (Secure Mode).

Unavailable. The equipment manages only the FTP and Telnet protocols (Not Secure
Mode).

Exclusive. The equipment manages only the SFTP and SSH protocols (Secure Mode).

SSH Version. Version of the SSH (Secure SHell) protocol managed by the equipment in Secure
Mode:

v1. Version 1 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH server.

v2. Version 2 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH client.

The active box ( ) indicates that the specific version of the SSH protocol is managed by the
equipment; the inactive box indicates that the version is not managed.
SSH Public Key. Public key algorithm used for the authentication (equipment in Secure Mode):

Group 1 SHA 1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm).

Read only parameter.
SSH Host Key. Public key asymmetrical cypher algorithms managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:

DSA (only v2). DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) key cypher algorithm.
Option available only if the equipment manages the version 2 of SSH protocol.

RSA. RSA key cypher algorithm.

The active box (
managed.

) indicates that the specific key is managed; the inactive box that the it is not

Authentication. Authentication algorithm of the messages managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:

None. No authentication algorithm.

HMAC - SHA-1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) based on
hash code (HMAC).

HMAC - SHA1 - 96. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 with 96 bit digest based on hash
code (HMAC).

HMAC - MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on
hash code.

If the None box is active ( ), no algorithm is managed. The activation of the other boxes indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the it is not managed.
Cipher Algorithm. Symmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:

None. No cypher algorithm.

3DES - CBC. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based
on the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.

AES 128, 192, 256 (only v2) - CBC. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm with 128 bit key (AES 128), 192 bit key (AES 192) or 256 bit key (AES
259).
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of the SSH protocol.

If the None box is active ( ), no algorithm is managed. The activation of the other boxes indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the it is not managed.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

99

WEB LCT SECURITY

AREA

HTTP Secure Server (HTTPS), Certificate Status, etc. Not meaningful in this context, because the protocol for the management of the WEB pages to open WEB CT is defined at level of
NMS system.
FILE

TRANSFER AREA

Mode. Not meaningful in this context, because the protocol for the transfer of file between NMS
and equipment is defined at level of NMS system.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
WEB LCT SECURITY

AREA

Update to new Certificate. Not meaningful in this context.
Browse. Not meaningful in this context.
Send Certificate File. Not meaningful in this context.
FILE

TRANSFER AREA

Reset FTP Credentials. Not meaningful in this context because the credentials of FTP
user are defined at NMS system level.
Reset SFTP Credentials. Not meaningful in this context because the credentials of SFTP
user are defined at NMS system level.
Push-button present when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
Set SFTP Credentials. Not meaningful in this context because the credentials of SFTP
user are defined at NMS system level.
Push-button present when the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol.
Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V1/V2... SNMPv1/v2c protocol active.
Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V3... SNMPv3 protocol active.
See also

Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode)
Configure the SSH protocol
Security (info)
SSH protocol (info)
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info)
FTP/SFTP protocol (info)
SNMP protocol (info)

100

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Security (info)
ALCplus2e equipment can operate in Secure Mode, in Not Secure Mode and in mixed mode (Secure Mode/
Not Secure Mode).
First time the equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, the equipment is configured in Not Secure Mode (used protocols: SNMPv1/v2c, FTP and HTTP).
WARNING To create a secure equipment network, it is necessary to configure ALL the pieces of equipment
in the network in Secure Mode.

Secure Mode

Equipment in Secure Mode ensures management sessions protected by the use of the protocol:
SSH for the secure and encrypted access (see SSH protocol (info).
SFTP for the management of the secure data transfer (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).
SNMPv3 for the management of the authenticated and encrypted SNMP messages (see
SNMP protocol (info).
HTTPS for the protected access to WEB CT page (see HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).
To activate this mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Exclusive
and activate the management of the security protocol (see Activate the equipment management
in Secure Mode).
Not Secure Mode

Equipment in this mode does not ensure protected management sessions because it uses protocols which do not ensure the security of the information transmitted on the network: Telnet
and FTP protocols.
To activate this mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Unavailable
and deactivate the management of the security protocols (see Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode.
WARNING In Not Secure Mode, the security protocols SNMPv3 and HTTPS can be activates. Activating them ensures the security only for the functionality relevant to the protocol.

Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode

The equipment can operate in mixed mode, managing both the security protocols (SSH/SFTP,
etc.) and the protocols which do not ensure the security (Telnet, FTP).
To activate the mixed mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Available (see Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode))
and activate or deactivate the single security protocols according to one’s need.
WARNING It is suggested to use the mixed mode only during the migration of the network equipment from Not Secure Mode to Secure Mode or vice versa.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

101

SSH protocol (info)
SSH (Secure SHell) protocol allows implementing secure connections between two system, using a client/
server architecture.
SSH protocol is available in two versions: version 1 (SSH1) and version 2 (SSH2).
Documents defining the protocol can be found at http://www.ietf.org.
ALCplus2e

The equipment can operate with protocol SSH1 and/or SSH2.
Besides the choice of the protocol, you can define the authentication and encryption algorithms
managed by the equipment (see Configure the SSH protocol).
In order to ensure the file transfer is secure mode, SFTP protocol must be used together with
SSH protocol (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).

102

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info)
HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is used to transfer hypertext pages within WEB.
All HTTP traffic takes place via the TCP/IP protocol on port 80 of PC.
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL) is a variation of HTTP and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol,
SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which implements the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data. All HTTPS traffic takes place on port 443 of PC.
In web browsers, URI which refers to this technology is named https.
For more information about RFC 2818 specification (HTTP Over TLS).
ALCplus2e

Equipment can operate with HTTP protocol or HTTPS protocol.
Protocols are implemented in exclusive mode in such a way that, when a user connects via HTTPS, HTTP requests will be re-addressed to HTTPS and vice versa.
The protocol (HTTP or HTTPS) used to open the WEB CT page is defined at level of NMS system.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

103

FTP/SFTP protocol (info)
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) and SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) are two protocols for the file transfer
based on TCP.
Main difference between FTP and SFTP is the management of security.
The FTP protocol does not foresee the data encryption, while the SFTP protocol is based on SSH protocol
for the data encryption and the secure file transfer.
ALCplus2e

The equipment can be used for the file transfer (download/upload) the FTP protocol or the SFTP
protocol.
The management of the protocol for the file transfer (FTP or SFTP) between NMS and the equipment is defined at level of NMS system.

104

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

SNMP protocol (info)
The SNMP protocol is available in 3 versions: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c and SNMPv3.
The main differences between SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3 are the management of message security and the
control of the accesses.
SNMPv1/v2c

The versions 1 and 2 of SNMP have the security model based on the community: messages are
passed not-encrypted and can be copied or modified.
SNMPv3

The version 3 of SNMP, instead, foresees a security model based on the user for the protection
of the messages and the control of the access.
In SMNMPv3, every user has his own authentication password and encryption password for the
packets.
In order to authenticate the packets, SNMPv3 utilizes the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA1 algorithm.
The secret key used to calculate the HMAC code is the user password; in order to be authenticated, the packet must contain even the user name besides the HMAC code.
Moreover, the SNMPv3 protocol foresees the possibility to cipher the part of the packet containing the OID of the MIB objects and the relevant values using the cipher algorithm DES56; the
key used for the cipher procedure is different from the key used for HMAC authentication.
This allows defining if allowing the user an access:

Without authentication (noAuthNoPriv).

With authentication (AuthNoPriv).

With authentication and encryption (AuthPriv).

For more information, refer to RFC 3410, 3411, 3412, 3413, 3414, 3415, 3584 specifications.
ALCplus2e

The equipment can work with SNMPv1/v2c protocol or with SNMPv3 protocol.
When the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol, only SNMPv1/v2c packets are accepted and
processed.
When the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol, only SNMPv3 packets are accepted and processed. Possible received SNMPv1/v2c packets are discarded.
In order to ensure the security, it is necessary to use SNMPv3 protocol.
WARNING First time equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, equipment uses SNMPv1/v2c protocol.

It is possible to pass from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol and vice versa only via WEB
LCT (see relevant documentation).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

105

EQUIPMENT

Configurator. It manages the equipment configuration.
BW & Mod./Link ID. It manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation
and link identification number.
General Preset. It manages the modem and radio parameters.
Xpic. It manages the XPIC function.
STM1 Bulk Config.. It manages the STM-1 Bulk function (transparent transport of the STM-1).

106

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Configurator
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The Configurator command manages the equipment configuration.
The configurator parameters change depending on the type or on the expansion present in the equipment.
Operations

IDUBOARD ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD XPIC
Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality (East-West)
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
Verify/modify the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1s
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD

EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC

2XSTM-1 32E1
2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)
Verify/modify the management of STM-1 (STM-1 MST Mode)
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and
SDH ring (Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms)
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality (East-West)
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD

EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC

NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1
NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1
EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1

Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)
Verify/modify the management of STM-1 (STM-1 MST Mode)
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and
SDH ring (Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms)
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality (East-West)
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD

EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC

16E1 ONLY 1+0
16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3
16E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. 16E1 PWE3

Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

107

Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
GUI

Configurator contextual area
See also

Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info)

Verify/modify the radio configuration
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The change of the radio configuration can determine the deletion of the Ethernet Switch config-

uration (see Tab.4).
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Radio parameter indicates the equipment radio configuration:

Unequipped. Equipment without radio.

1+0. Equipment with radio unprotected configuration.

1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential type.

1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential type.

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected configuration and two Ethernet channels.

2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and two
Ethernet channels.

The availability of the values changes depending on the IduBoard type as depicted in Tab.5.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
WARNING The radio configuration 1+1 Freq. Div is not supported when the equipment has bandwidth

56MHz.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Xpic activation functionality is not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of the local program WEB LCT, one
or more features can be enabled.
Tab.4 Radio configuration change
From

Change

1+1 FD
1+1 HS

(2)

2x(1+0) SP (3) 2x(1+0) DP (4)

1+0

1+1 FD

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

-

No

Yes

Yes

1+0
To

1+1 HS (2)

Unequipped

Unequipped

(1)

(1)

Yes

No

No

-

Yes

Yes

2x(1+0) SP

(3)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2x(1+0) DP

(4)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes. The Switch configuration is restored to default. All the VLAN’s are deleted, except for those reserved
(management).
No. The Switch configuration is not changed.

108

(1)

1+1 Freq. Div.

(2)

1+1 Hot Standby.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

(3)

2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe / 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe.

(4)

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe / 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe.
Tab.5 Available of the general parameters
IDU Board type

(1)

Radio configuration

Management

1+0

1+1

2x(1+0)
(3)

2x(1+0)
Xpic (4)

STM-1

Nodal
Bus

Matrix

PWE3

IduBoard Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard

X

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Xpic

X

X

X

X

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1

X

X

X

-

X

-

X

-

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

X

-

X

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

X

-

X

-

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

X

X

X

-

X

-

X

X

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

X

-

X

X

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

X

-

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

X

-

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

X

IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1

X

X

X

-

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3

X

X

X

-

-

-

X (5)

X

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

-

-

X (5)

X

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 PWE3

X

X

X

X

-

-

X (5)

X

(1)

Verify the equipment units

(2)

1+1 Freq. Div / 1+1 Hot Standby.

(3)

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe.

(4)

2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe.

(5)

(2)

With the PWE3 function active, the matrix is not available (see Tab.12).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

109

Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Ethernet Enh. parameter indicates the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality:

Present. Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is active.

Absent (Remember Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active.
In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced Ethernet management, the controller keeps in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.

Absent (Reset Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active. In the
case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced Ethernet management, the controller have not kept in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Enhanced Eth processing functionality is
not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of the local program WEB LCT, one
or more features can be enabled.

Verify/modify the management of synchronisation
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The synchronisation cannot be disabled if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for, at least, one
STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Sync Enable parameter indicates the management of synchronisation:

Disabled. Synchronisation disable.

Enabled. Synchronisation enable.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the management of STM-1
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.5).

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The STM-1 MST Mode parameter indicates the management of the STM-1:

None. The management of STM-1 is deactive.

1+0. The management of one unprotected STM-1 is active (MST mode).

1+1 MSP. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP mode).

2 x (1+0) MST. The management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST mode).

1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP mode). For STM-1
with optical interface, the Automatic Laser Shutdown function is permanently disabled.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
If the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.) and the equipment is in radio configuration:

110

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

1+0 or 1+1, the parameter is automatically set to 1+0. The value cannot be modified.

2x(1+0), the values 1+0 and 2 x (1+0) MST are available.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH
and SDH ring
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.5) and if the management
of STM-1 is active.

Operation common to all the 2Mbit/s tributary.
Operation not available if the STM-1 Bulk function (see STM1 Bulk Config.) is active.
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms parameter indicates the monitoring status of the alarms of the
2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring in input to a SDH ring where the ALCplus2e equipment acts
as connection elements:

Disabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is not active.

Enabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is active.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
Activating the monitoring (selection of option Enabled) forbids the execution of protected TributaryRadio connections in TDM matrix (see Cross Connection).
Moreover, if no protected Tributary-Radio connection is present in the TDM matrix, the existing connections are not deleted. Otherwise, if at least one protected Tributary-Radio connection is present, all
the connections are deleted.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the SDH overhead and VC12 quality management functionality is not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of the local program WEB LCT, one
or more features can be enabled.

Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration (see

Tab.5).
When the East-West modality is enabled, the equipment takes the Ring Ethernet modality configuration.
In this modality, the Switch Ethernet must have the following configuration in order to ensure the correct
traffic management:

LAN in Fallback modality.

Radio port in Fallback modality.

All the VLAN of the Ring registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The East-West parameter indicates the management of the East-West modality:

No. The management of the East-West modality is not active.

Yes. The management of the East-West modality is active: the radio signal is routed in two different direction named, for accepted custom, East and West.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

111

Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Node Type parameter indicates if the equipment is element of a node:

No Nodal. The equipment does not belong to a node.

Nodal. The equipment belongs to a node.
With node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2 and/or
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or TDM nodal Bus.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1s
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment of IduBoard Only 1+0, IduBoard or IduBoard Xpic type.

For all other equipment see Cross Connection.
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
2. Select the Tributary A-B Mapping tab.
The parameter Tributary A Mapping indicates the mapping of first E1 of base board:

Unmapped. Tributary A is not connected to any Radio E1.

Radio A E1-1. Tributary A is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).

Radio A E1-2. Tributary A is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).

The parameter Tributary B Mapping indicates the mapping of second E1 of base board:

Unmapped. Tributary B is not connected to any Radio E1.

Radio A E1-1. Tributary B is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).

Radio A E1-2. Tributary B is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).

3. To change the parameters, select the wished option.
The same Radio channel cannot be set for the tributaries of base board. For instance, if the value Radio
A E1-1 is set for tributary A, the value Radio A E1-2 must be set for tributary B and vice versa.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

112

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Configurator contextual area
The contextual area displays the equipment configuration.
Tabs

Configurator tab. General configuration of the equipment.
Tributary A-B Mapping tab. Mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Configurator tab
The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the equipment.
The configuration parameters change depending on the type or on the equipped expansion.
Parameters

Radio. Equipment radio configuration:

Unequipped. Equipment without radio.

1+0. Equipment with radio in unprotected configuration.

1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential
type.

1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential
type.

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected configuration and two Ethernet channels.

2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and two Ethernet channels.

The availability of the values changes depending on the IduBoard type as depicted in Tab.5.
Ethernet Enh. Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality:

Present. Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is active.

Absent (Remember Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is
not active. In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced
Ethernet management, the controller keeps in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.

Absent (Reset Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active. In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible
with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced
Ethernet management, the controller have not kept in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.

Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms. Monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal
through PDH and SDH ring in input to a SDH ring where the ALCplus2e equipment acts as connection elements:

Disabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is not active.

Enabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is active.

Parameter not available if the value None is set for STM-1 MST Mode and/or the STM-1 Bulk
function (see STM1 Bulk Config.) is active.
Node Type. Belonging of the equipment to a node:

No Nodal. The equipment does not belong to a node.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

113

Nodal. The equipment belongs to a node.

With node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2 and/or
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or TDM nodal Bus.
PWE3. Management of PWE3 function:

Enabled. Function enable.

Disabled. Function disable.

Parameter available only for equipment that support the PWE3 function (see Tab.5).
Sync Enable. Management of synchronisation:

Disabled. Synchronisation disable.

Enabled. Synchronisation enable.

STM-1 MST Mode. Management of the STM-1:

None. The management of STM-1 is deactive.

1+0. The management of one unprotected STM-1 is active (MST modality).

1+1 MSP. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP modality).

2 x (1+0) MST. The management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST modality).

1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP modality).
For STM-1 with optical interface, the Automatic Laser Shutdown function is permanently disabled.

Parameter available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.5).
East-West. Management of the East-West modality:

No. The management of the East-West modality is not active.

Yes. The management of the East-West modality is active: the radio signal is routed
in two different direction named, for accepted custom, East and West.

Parameter available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration (see
Tab.5).
See also

Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)
Verify/modify the management of STM-1 (STM-1 MST Mode)
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH
ring (Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms)
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality (East-West)
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info)

Tributary A-B Mapping tab
WARNING Tab available only for equipment of IduBoard Only 1+0, IduBoard or IduBoard Xpic type.

The tab displays the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1.
Parameters

Tributary A Mapping. Mapping of first E1 of base board:

Unmapped. Tributary A is not connected to any Radio E1.

Radio A E1-1. Tributary A is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).

Radio A E1-2. Tributary A is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).

Tributary B Mapping. Mapping of second E1 of base board:

114

Unmapped. Tributary B is not connected to any Radio E1.

Radio A E1-1. Tributary B is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Radio A E1-2. Tributary B is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).

See also

Verify/modify the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1s

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

115

Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info)
The networks with traffic protection of end to end type foresee that the duplication of the path is made on
the whole network, both SDH and PDH.
In these networks, it is then necessary that the Switch in reception is made not only depending on the
quality of the SDH network, but also depending on the quality of the signal incoming in the network itself.
To execute this operation, it is foreseen, in the ALCplus2e equipment, to monitor the 2Mbit/s signal incoming in the SDH network and to report the alarm conditions as alarms of VC12 causing the switching of the
path also in presence of alarms or degradation of the PDH signal (see Verify/modify the monitoring status
of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring).

116

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

BW & Mod./Link ID
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio.

For the equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is present the BW & Mod./Link ID command. For the
equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration are present the BW & Mod./Link ID 1A (radio branch 1 parameters)
and BW & Mod./Link ID 2A (radio branch 2 parameters) commands.
The BW & Mod./Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive
modulation and link identification number.
Operations

Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation
Modify the reference band/modulation
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation. These parameters change depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation itself.
ADAPTIVE

MODULATION

ACTIVE

Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) (Tx Power Ramp)
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
(Upper Modulation/Lower Modulation)
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled) (Exclude 4QAM Strong)
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM
Traffic)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) (TDM Capacity)
ADAPTIVE

MODULATION INACTIVE

Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM
Traffic)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) (TDM Capacity)
Verify/modify the link identification number
Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1
GUI

BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area
See also

Adaptive modulation (info)

Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Modulation & Capacity tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the
configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

117

Modify the reference band/modulation
Access | Read & Write
WARNING In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the

other branch.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Bandwidth & Modulation parameter indicates the current reference band/modulation. For each one
of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Upgrade up to... functionality is not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or
more features can be enabled.

Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
Access | Read & Write
WARNING In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the

other branch.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The ACM Engine parameter indicates the operating status of the adaptive modulation.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Disabled. Adaptive modulation disabled.

Enabled. Adaptive modulation enabled.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

The profile is used only if a modulation equal to the minimum modulation has been selected as reference.
In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the other
branch.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Tx Power Ramp parameter indicates the power profile of the RF transmitter.
2. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disabled. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.

Ramp to Ref. Modulation. Mean power constant up to a reference modulation. For the next modulations: power increasing when the modulation decreases.

Ramp to Max. Power. Maximizes the power in every modulation depending on ODU type.
Parameter available only for equipment with ODU ASN version 2.1.0 and higher and ODU AS03 version 1.5.0 and higher.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

118

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the other
branch.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation parameters respectively indicates the upper threshold and
the lower threshold of the modulation.
2. To change the parameters Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation, select the value relevant to the
wished modulation.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Exclude 4AQM Strong parameter indicates the enabling status of the ACM profile 4QAM Strong.
2. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is available: the profile is present in the ACM Table.

Enabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is not available: the profile is not present in the ACM
Table.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment which manage static E1’s (see Tab.7).

When the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.), the number of permanently allocated E1
is 0. The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter cannot be modified.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter indicates the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority
streams).
2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The TDM Capacity parameter indicates the number of E1 which must be kept active for the specific ACM
profile.
2. To change the parameter, double click on the relevant box and type the wished value.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

119

Maximum number of low priority E1 you can assign to the specific profile is pointed out in brackets.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the link identification number
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
2. Select the Local Link ID tab.
The Local Link ID parameter indicates the link identification number.
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the new number (value between 1 and 255).
The setting of the 0 value corresponds to the non-selection of the identification number.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
The setting so executed does NOT automatically modify also the identification number of the remote
equipment.

Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING In order to modify the native priority of Extra E1 (e.g. from 1-18 to 3-16, 1-2) in a connection
between equipment IduBoard Xpic... and equipment without TDM matrix (see Tab.5), it is necessary to
disable the Local/remote synchronization protocol (info).

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
2. Select the Extra TDM Priority tab.
The tab displays the priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity).
3. To change the sequence, press a push-button present in the tab (see Tab.6).
4. Press Apply and confirm.

120

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area
WARNING For equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration, the BW & Mod./Link ID command is available
which opens the BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area.

For equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration, the commands BW & Mod./Link ID 1A, which opens the BW &
Mod./Link ID 1A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 1, and BW & Mod./Link ID
2A, which opens the BW & Mod./Link ID 2A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio
2, are available.
The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and link
identification number.
Tabs

Modulation & Capacity tab. Reference band/modulation, operating status and configuration of
the adaptive modulation.
Local Link ID tab. Link identification number.
Extra TDM Priority tab. Priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity).
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Modulation & Capacity tab
The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation.
Parameters

ACM Engine. Operating status of the adaptive modulation:

Enabled. The adaptive modulation is enabled.

Disabled. The adaptive modulation is disabled.

Bandwidth & Modulation. Channelling - Modulation. For each one of the radio channelling, the
modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
Lower Modulation / Upper Modulation. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the Tx
modulation.
Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
Exclude 4QAM Strong. Enabling status of the ACM profile 4QAM Strong:

Disabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is available: the profile is present in the ACM
Table.

Enabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is not available: the profile is not present in
the ACM Table.

Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
Tx Power Ramp. Power profile of the RF transmitter:

Disabled. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.

Ramp to Ref. Modulation. Mean power constant for modulations lower than or equal
to the reference modulation. For higher modulations, power increases when modulation decreases.

Ramp to Max. Power. Maximizes the power in every modulation depending on ODU
type.
Parameter available only for equipment with ODU ASN version 2.1.0 and higher and
ODU AS-03 version 1.5.0 and higher.

Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

121

Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 assigned permanently (high priority streams). These
streams cannot be never discarded by the adaptive modulation. The maximum number of E1
which can be assigned permanently is pointed out next to the box.
Parameter available only for equipment which manage static E1’s (see Tab.7).
When the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.) the number of permanently allocated E1 is 0. The parameter cannot be modified.
ACM Table. This table shows, for each ACM level, the number of E1 which can be used.
Depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will be available. If the adaptive modulation is:

Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference modulation
(Bandwidth & Modulation).

Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile included
between the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.

Profile (ACM Table). 8 profiles ACM are available from 4QAM to 256QAM. An additional profile
on 4QAM with low rate FEC (4QAM Strong) is present too.
Max TDM Cap (ACM Table). Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 which can be assigned to the TDM traffic for every ACM profile.
TDM Capacity (ACM Table). Number of (low priority) E1 assigned to each ACM profile. These
streams will be discarded by adaptive modulation according to the order configured by the user.
Maximum number of low priority E1 you can assign to the specific profile is pointed out in brackets.
Global Capacity (ACM Table). Global capacity associated to the ACM profile.
The value is given by: Ethernet Capacity (including the bandwidth used by PWE3) + TDM High
Priority + TDM Low Priority + Maintenance Channel.
Ethernet Capacity (ACM Table). Capacity dedicated to Ethernet traffic.
WARNING When the contextual area is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected
reference band/modulation.

If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled.
In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, it is necessary to confirm (pushbutton Apply) the new reference band/modulation.
See also

Modify the reference band/modulation
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled)
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled)
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)
Adaptive modulation (info)

Local Link ID tab
The tab displays the link identification number.
Parameters

Local Link ID. Link identification number.
The 0 value corresponds to the non-selection of the identification number.
See also

Verify/modify the link identification number

122

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Extra TDM Priority tab

The tab displays the priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity).
Parameters

E1

LIST

The sorting sequence of TDM Capacity, goes from highest priority (first position in the list) to
lowest one (last position in the list).
This means that the E1 at the bottom of the list will be the first stream to be discarded by the
adaptive modulation, the penultimate E1 in the list will be the second to be discarded and so on
until reaching the E1 at the top of the list which will be the last stream to be discarded by the
adaptive modulation.
When an E1 is grey, this means that this stream is available but is not included within the maximum number of TDM Capacity E1 carried by the configured radio frame.
Every Extra E1 Radio channel is represented by the relevant number (121).
For equipment IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1, IduBoard Xpic
Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 or IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1 the tab displays the following parameters:
Radio Extra E1. Radio Extra E1 channels.
Tributary. Labels of the E1 tributary. The mapping of the channels is hard-wired:
Radio Extra E1-1 -> Tributary A
Radio Extra E1-2 -> Tributary B
Radio Extra E1-3 -> E1-1 expansion
...
Radio Extra E1-18-> E1-16 expansion
E1 channels of expansion are available only for IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 and IduBoard Exp.
16E1 Only 1+0/1+1.
Push-button

The push-buttons change according to the equipment type as shown in Tab.6.
See also

Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

123

Tab.6 Push-buttons (Extra TDM Priority tab)
ALCplus2e equipment
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic

2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
16E1 PWE3

Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 Only 1+0
16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

124

Push-buttons
Up

Move a single E1 upwards by one place
(higher priority)

Down

Move a single E1 downwards by one
place (lower priority)

1-21

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 1, 2, 321

21-1

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 21, 20, 191

3-18 1-2

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 3, 4, 518, 1, 2, 19, 20,
21

Up

Move a single E1 upwards by one place
(higher priority)

Down

Move a single E1 downwards by one
place (lower priority)

Up

Move a single E1 upwards by one place
(higher priority)

Down

Move a single E1 downwards by one
place (lower priority)

1-18

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 1, 2, 318

18-1

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 18, 17, 161

3-18 1-2

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 3, 4, 518, 1, 2

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Adaptive modulation (info)

Ethernet transport
TDM transport
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (TDM Capacity)
Multiple ACM profiles per modulation
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter

Ethernet transport
ALCplus2e equipment assigns all the capacity not assigned to the TDM transport to the Ethernet interface.
Then, in absence of TDM traffic, the Ethernet capacity coincides with the total available capacity.

TDM transport

The distribution of TDM traffic depends on the equipment type/configuration, as pointed out in Tab.7.
Tab.7 Distribution of TDM traffic
ALCplus2e equipment

Static E1
(Permanent
TDM Traffic)

Dynamic E1
(TDM Capacity)

E1 by
direction

E1 by
polarization

IduBoard Only 1+0
IduBoard

0

2

2

-

IduBoard Xpic

0

2

4

2

80

21

82

-

2x80

2x21

82

-

2x80

2x18

82

-

80

2

82

-

2x80

2x2

164

82

0

18

18

-

0

2

2

-

IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0 (1)
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1
IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3

(2)

(1) (2)

(2)

IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic

Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic

Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
16E1 PWE3 (2)

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0

(1) (2)

(2)

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

(1)
For this equipment type, when the STM-1 Bulk function is active, the number of static E1 is 0. The parameter cannot be modified. The number of dynamic E1s is automatically limited to allow the transport of
the STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

125

(2)

With PWE3 function inactive (see Configurator). For this type of equipment, when the PWE3 function is
active, the number static and dynamic E1’s is 0.
In ALCplus2e equipment of type IduBoard Only 1+0, IduBoard, IduBoard Xpic, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only
1+0, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1, IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 or IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1
Only 1+0/1+1 the TDM traffic is assigned to every ACM profile selecting the number of E1 which must be
transported.
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. For each ACM profile, the value TDM Capacity must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap and
cannot be never greater than 2 or 18 (see Tab.7).
b. When the user sets a value TDM Capacity for an ACM profile, the application automatically
checks and possibly modifies the values TDM Capacity of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in
such a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value TDM Capacity set by the user.
In the remaining types of equipment (see Tab.7) the TDM band can be subdivided in two parts: one not
subjected to ACM, destined to the privileged traffic (high priority) (Permanent TDM Traffic), and one subjected to ACM and destined to the lower priority traffic, (TDM Capacity).
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. The number of high priority E1 traffic channels must be lower than or equal to value displayed
next to the Permanent TDM Traffic box.
b. The value of Permanent TDM Traffic fixes the minimum allowed modulation as it blocks all the
modulations for which Max TDM Cap is lower than Permanent TDM Traffic (the application highlights the minimum allowed modulation as consequence of the value Permanent TDM Traffic set
disabling all the not allowed modulations).
c. For each ACM profile, the value TDM Capacity must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap Permanent TDM Traffic and cannot be never greater than 21 or 2 (equipment with XPIC functionality).
d. When the user sets a value TDM Capacity for an ACM profile, the application automatically
checks and possibly modifies the values TDM Capacity of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in
such a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value TDM Capacity set by the user.
e. A change of Permanent TDM Traffic can cause a violation of rule c. In this case, the application
only highlights which are the out-of-range values of Max TDM Cap (the wordings of the row of
the ACM profile become red) and the restore of the correct values is at user’s charge.
Key:

Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 which can be assigned to the TDM
traffic for each ACM profile.

TDM Capacity Number of (low priority) E1 assigned to each ACM profile.

Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 permanently assigned (high priority streams).

Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (TDM Capacity)

The user, via the application, can define the priority of dynamic Radio E1s (TDM Capacity).
This priority determines the modality used to discard the dynamic Radio E1s when the ACM profile changes.

Multiple ACM profiles per modulation
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected reference modulation (i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically selected (i.e.:
4 QAM).
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected lower modulation
(i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the minimum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4
QAM strong).

126

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected upper modulation
(i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4
QAM).

Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter
The choice of the reference modulation and of the power profile depends on the license type owned by the
network operator.
The reference modulation determines the emission spectrum to be in compliance with the current laws.
The power profile increasing when the modulation decreases can be enabled according to the standard
ETSI EN 302 217-2-2: the power as function of the modulation can be only lower then or equal to the power
of the reference modulation.
More information is reported in the equipment manual ALCplus2e.
In case of mixed links (ALCplus2e - ALCplus2), the selection of the parameters relevant to modulation and
power profile must match the following requirements:

Reference modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation), upper and lower thresholds of Tx modulation
(Lower Modulation, Upper Modulation) must be set to the same values in both the equipment.

The power profile of RF transmitter of ALCplus2e equipment must be set depending on the profile currently in use (which can differ from that set) in equipment ALCplus2 according to what
pointed out here below.

ALCplus2
Tx Power Mode

ALCplus2e
Tx Power Ramp

Average

Disabled

Peak

Ramp to Ref. Modulation

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

127

General Preset
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio.

For the equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is present the General Preset command. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration are present the General Preset 1A (radio branch 1 parameters) and General Preset 2A (radio branch 2 parameters) commands.
The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters.
Operations

Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
Verify/modify the radio branch label
Verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol
Verify/modify the enabling status of the switch in transmission
Verify/modify the T and N parameters
Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm
Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function
Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM)
GUI

General Preset contextual area
See also

Local/remote synchronization protocol (info)
MCM functionality (info)

Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
The Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm parameter indicates the threshold level of
the signal at reception. Under this threshold level, it is activated the relevant alarm.
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished level.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the radio branch label
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
The Radio Branch Label parameter indicates the label that identifies the radio branch.
2. To change the parameter, type the new label (alphanumeric string with maximum 30 characters).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

128

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
The Synchronization Setup Protocol parameter indicates the state of the local/remote synchronization
protocol.

Enable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is active.

Disable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is inactive.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the other
branch.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the enabling status of the switch in transmission
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration.

For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1
and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.
1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
The Tx Switch on remote Alarms parameter indicates the enabling of the switch in transmission:

Enable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (…BER Alarm, …Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is enabled.

Disable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (…BER Alarm, …Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is not enabled.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the T and N parameters
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration.

For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1
and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.
1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
When the enabling status of the switch in transmission is active (Tx Switch on remote Alarms - Enable),
this switch is executed when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a time interval T. With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place contemporarily on
both the Rx of the remote equipment.
The box:

Check Period indicates the time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed
seconds must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place.

Alarm Thres indicates the number of alarmed seconds N.

2. To change the parameters, type the new values in the relevant boxes (Check Period box: value between
1 and 300; Alarm Thres: value between 1 and 60).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

129

Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration. For the 1+1
etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit
at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
2. Press Alarm Reset and confirm.
The alarm is reset.
The Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm notifies the switch in transmission as consequence of alarms
on the signal received from the remote equipment.

Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
2. Select the MCM tab.
The tab displays the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function.

Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
2. Select the MCM tab.
The MCM Enable area displays the enabling status of the MCM function for the each LAN.
The active box ( ) indicates that the BW-VSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box
indicates that the messages are not managed.
3. To change a parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM)
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
2. Select the MCM tab.
3. Set the Tag 802.1Q VLAN value in the TX VLan ID box (value between 2 and 4094). By default, the
BW-VSM message is sent untagged (value 0).
4. Set the Maintenance Level of the OAM domain in the TX OAM Maint. Level box (value between 0 and
7). Default 0.
This setting involves even the change of the destination MAC address of the BW-VSM message because
this address corresponds to the CCM multicast address for the associated OAM maintenance level.
5. In the Fading Hold Off (s) box, set the waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting
the transmission of BW-VSM messages (value between 10 and 60). Default 10 seconds.
6. In the TX Period box, set the transmission period (in seconds) between one BW-VSM message and the
next one (1, 10 or 60 seconds). Default 10 seconds.

130

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

7. In the BW Tx Type box, set the criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx Period):

Average. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the available
band within the observation period.

Min. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the minimum value of the available band
within the observation period.

Max. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the maximum value of the available band
within the observation period.

8. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

131

General Preset contextual area
WARNING For equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration, the General Preset command is available which
opens the General Preset contextual area.

For equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration, the commands General Preset 1A, which opens the General Preset 1A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 1, and General Preset 2A, which
opens the General Preset 2A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 2, are available.
The contextual area displays the modem and radio parameters.
Tabs

General tab. Modem and radio parameters.
MCM tab. MCM function configuration.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

General tab
The tab displays the modem and radio parameters.
Parameters

Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the signal at reception.
Radio Branch Label. Label that identifies the radio branch.
Synchronization Setup Protocol. Status of the local/remote synchronization protocol:

Enable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is active.

Disable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is inactive.

If the equipment is in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the context contains even the following
parameters.
Tx Switch on remote Alarms. Enabling status of the switch in transmission as consequences
of alarms (…BER Alarm, …Demodulator Fail Alarm) on the signal received from the equipment
located at the other side of the link (remote equipment):

Disable. The switch is not enabled.

Enable. The switch is enabled.

In this condition the switch is executed when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a
time interval T.
With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place
contemporarily on both the Rx of the remote equipment.
Check Period Time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed seconds
must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place.
Alarm Thres Number of alarmed seconds N.
Push-button

Alarm Reset. Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm.
The Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm notifies the switch in transmission as consequence
of alarms on the signal received from the remote equipment.
Push-button present only if for equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration.

132

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

See also

Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
Verify/modify the radio branch label
Verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol
Verify/modify the enabling status of the switch in transmission
Verify/modify the T and N parameters
Local/remote synchronization protocol (info)

MCM tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the MCM (MW Capacity Management) function.
Parameters

LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 (MCM Enable area). Respectively enabling status of the MCM function for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the BW-VSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive
box indicates that the messages are not managed.
TX VLan ID. Tag 802.1Q VLAN value. By default, the BW-VSM message is sent untagged (value
0).
TX OAM Maint. Level. Maintenance Level of the OAM domain. By default, the BW-VSM message is associated with Maintenance Level 0.
Fading Hold Off (s). Waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting the
transmission of BW-VSM messages Default 10 seconds.
TX Period (s). Transmission period (in seconds) between one BW-VSM message and the next
one. Default 10 seconds.
BW Tx Type. Criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx Period):

Average. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the
available band within the observation period.

Min. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the minimum value of the available band within the observation period.

Max. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the maximum value of the
available band within the observation period.

Default Average.
See also

Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM)
MCM functionality (info)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

133

Local/remote synchronization protocol (info)
The local/remote synchronization protocol (Synchronization Setup Protocol) is a functionality allowing the
management the change of radio configuration between two pieces of equipment connected by link, in such
a way to reduce the out-of-service time at each repartition of the available radio band and to keep the
supervision on the remote equipment active.
This management works in the following way.
When a parameter is changed is the local (or remote) equipment, the change is not immediately executed,
but it is freezed.
The system raises the alarm RADIO Local-Remote Terminal Setup Mismatch to signal to the user that a
mismatch is present between the radio configuration of the local equipment and that of the remote equipment.
The alarm remains active until the operator executes the same change in the equipment located at the
other side of the link.
When the change is executed in the remote equipment, the same change is automatically executed even
in the local equipment, becoming then effective on both the equipment of the link.
The radio parameters, whose change is managed by the local/remote synchronization protocol as described above, are the following (see BW & Mod./Link ID):

Reference modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation).

Profile mask (Lower Modulation - Upper Modulation).

ACM (ACM Engine).

Number high-priority channels (Permanent TDM Traffic).

Number of low-priority channels of every profile (TDM Capacity).

Priority of Extra TDM channels (Extra TDM Priority).

The local/remote synchronization protocol, when active, besides the management of the change of the radio parameters, allows managing the radio configuration of the equipment in the link when the alarm RADIO Link Telemetry Fail is present.
This alarm, if it is the only radio alarm active, indicates a mismatch on the band repartition between the
two pieces of equipment.
In this condition, the modality called Rescue setup is automatically activated, which forces both the equipment to the following condition:

Modulation: 4QAM (respecting ETSI spectral masks)

Radio traffic: all Ethernet

The activation of the Rescue setup modality is pointed out by the activation of the alarm RADIO Rescue
Setup Active.
The alarm is removed when the operator realigns the radio parameters in both the equipment of the link.
The synchronization protocol can be enabled and disabled by the user (see Verify/modify the status of the
local/remote synchronization protocol).
By default, the protocol is enabled.
If the user disables it, it remains disabled until the user re-enables it.
In equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration, enabling/disabling executed on a branch
is automatically reported even on the other branch.
The local/remote synchronization is implemented by a proprietary protocol. It is meaningful and available
for the radio equipment of type ALCplus2e, ALCplus2 or ALplus2.

134

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

MCM functionality (info)
The transmission capacity of a radio equipment depends on the propagation condition of the radio channels.
In case of Ethernet ring, the signal degradation can affect one side of the ring, while the other side continues working at rated capacity.
In case of network congestion, the radio will give priority to Ethernet traffic, reducing or eliminating the
low priority traffic.
Similar situation can be found even in other network typologies where the changes of the bandwidth must
be communicated to the upstream Ethernet Switches/Routers in order to adjust the relevant traffic.
By knowing the capacity of the radio link, external equipment can optimize the transport on ring networks
or select additional criteria for the quality management.
The Capacity Management MW (MCM) function allows achieving optimized performances even in the worst
conditions of radio propagation, because it allows forwarding traffic on the Ethernet ring according to the
bandwidth available for every ring branch.
The function is based on a protocol used by the equipment to notify the changes in the capacity to connect
the Ethernet Switch/Router which, on its time, applies the relevant forwarding rules.
The notifications take place by means of OAM (Ethernet-Operations, Administration and Maintenance) type
messages which signal the changes in the band availability (BW-VSM messages).
Through the management (transmission and reception) of these messages and the proper configuration of
the forwarding rules, the ring will be able to change the traffic profile to take the degraded path in consideration.
As regards the MCM function, through the WEB LCT page, it is possible to:

Enable/disable the management of the BW-VSM messages at level of single LAN.

Define the parameters for the forwarding of the BW-VSM messages:

Tag 802.1Q VLAN value (TX VLan ID parameter). By default, the BW-VSM message is
sent untagged (value 0).

Maintenance Level of the OAM domain (TX OAM Maint. Level parameter). By default, the
BW-VSM message is associated with Maintenance Level 0.
This setting involves the change of the destination MAC address of the BW-VSM message
because this address corresponds to the CCM multicast address for the associated OAM
maintenance level.

Waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting the transmission of the
BW-VSM messages (Fading Hold Off (s) parameter). The default waiting period is 10 seconds.

Transmission period between one BW-VSM message and the next one (TX Period (s) parameter). The default waiting period is 10 seconds.

Criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx
Period): average, minimum or maximum value (BW Tx Type parameter). By default, the
BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the band available during the observation period (Average).

See also

Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function
Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

135

Xpic
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration.

The Xpic command manages the XPIC function.
Operations

Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function
Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch
Restore the XPIC function of the single branch
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP)
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
GUI

Xpic contextual area
See also

XPIC function (info)

Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.
The Xpic contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function.

Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.
2. To disable temporarily the function XPIC of:

Branch 1, select the Disable value (Radio 1A parameter).

Branch 2, select the Disable value (Radio 2A parameter).

3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

136

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Restore the XPIC function of the single branch
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.
2. To restore the XPIC function of the:

Branch 1, select the Enable value (Radio 1A parameter).

Branch 2, select the Enable value (Radio 2A parameter).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP)
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.
2. To ENABLE the fault management procedure (FMP), select the value Enable (Fault Management Procedure parameter).
To DISABLE the fault management procedure (FMP), select the value Disable (Fault Management Procedure parameter).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.
2. Press Reset Procedure and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

137

Xpic contextual area
WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration.

The contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function.
Parameters

Radio 1A (area Xpic). Activation of XPIC function for branch 1:

Enable. Function active.

Disable. Function temporarily deactivated (manual operation).

Radio 2A (area Xpic). Activation of XPIC function for branch 2:

Enable. Function active.

Disable. Function temporarily deactivated (manual operation).

Fault Management Procedure. Status of XPIC fault management procedure (FMP):

Enable. FMP procedure is active.

Disable. FMP procedure is inactive.

When XPIC fault management procedure is active, the detection of a fault on a branch and the consequent action automatically executed by FMP procedure to save the other branch are pointed out
by the faults present in the Fault Management Procedure area.
If a box becomes red, orange, yellow, light blue or green (depending on the severity of the relevant
to the relevant alarm), the box:
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 1A Tx Off, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault
on receiver of branch 1 of remote terminal, FMP procedure has switched off the transmitter of
branch 1 of local terminal.
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 1A, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault on
receiver of branch 2 of remote terminal or on receiver of branch 2 of local terminal, FMP procedure has forced the disabling of XPIC function of branch 1 of local terminal.
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 2A Tx Off, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault
on receiver of branch 2 of remote terminal, FMP procedure has switched off the transmitter of
branch 2 of local terminal.
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 2A, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault on
receiver of branch 1 of remote terminal or on receiver of branch 1 of local terminal, FMP procedure has forced the disabling of XPIC function of branch 2 of local terminal.
When the box is grey, this means that the specific fault has not been detected.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Reset Procedure. Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
See also

Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch
Restore the XPIC function of the single branch
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP)
XPIC function (info)

138

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

XPIC function (info)
The function XPIC (Crosspolar Interference Canceller) is a modem functionality which allows using the double polarization (vertical and horizontal) in the transmission system.
In this way, exploiting two polarizations, the transmission capacity of the radio link can be double using a
single frequency.
In relation to XPIC function, through WEB CT page it is possible:

To disable temporarily the function XPIC for every single branch (Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch) and then to re-enable it (Restore the XPIC function of the single
branch).
Disabling the function XPIC is a manual operation (MAN. OP). Remember that, if the timeout of
the manual operations is inactive, the function XPIC remains disabled until when it is restored
by the user.

To enable and disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) (see Enable/disable XPIC fault
management procedure (FMP).
In case of detection and signalling of a fault, the function XPIC can be restored (see Restore the
function XPIC after a fault detection).
Purpose of the FMP (Fault Management Procedure) procedure is to identify a malfunction caused
by equipment faults and by equipment faults and to preserve the horizontal or vertical branch
where there are not problems
The procedure differentiates the alarms due to external causes (e.g., fading) from those due to
equipment faults.
The activation of the FMP procedure involves the switch-off of a transmitter and the disabling of
the Xpic inputs.
The condition is permanent and only an operator by means of WEB LCT or NMS5UX-B/
NMS5LX can restore the condition.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

139

STM1 Bulk Config.
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment with a specific type of IDU/configuration (see STM-1

Bulk function (info)) and if STM-1 transport function is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more
features can be enabled.
The STM1 Bulk Config. command manages the STM-1 Bulk function which allows transporting the equipment STM-1 transparently.
Operations

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 Bulk function
GUI

STM1 Bulk Config. contextual area
See also

STM-1 Bulk function (info)

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 Bulk function
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING This function can be enabled only for equipment with a specific configuration (see

STM-1 Bulk

function (info).
1. Select Equipment > STM1 Bulk Config.
The Radio 1A and Radio 2A parameters respectively point out the status of the STM-1 Bulk function of
the radio branch 1 and radio branch 2:

Disable. Function disable.

STM-1 1. Function enable for the first STM-1.

STM-1 2. Function enable for the second STM-1.
Value available only if the management of the two STM-1 in MST mode is enabled.

The Radio 2A parameter is available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
2. To change a parameter, select the relevant box and then the wished option.
If a value is set for the Radio 1A parameter this value will not be available for the Radio 2A parameter
and vice versa.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

140

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

STM1 Bulk Config. contextual area
The contextual area displays the configuration of the STM-1 Bulk function.
Parameters

Radio 1A. Enabling status of the STM-1 Bulk function for radio branch 1:

Disable. Function disable.

STM-1 1. Function enable for the first STM-1.

STM-1 2. Function enable for the second STM-1.
Value available only if the management of the two STM-1 in MST mode is enabled.

Radio 2A. Enabling status of the STM-1 Bulk function for radio branch 2:

Disable. Function disable.

STM-1 1. Function enable for the first STM-1.

STM-1 2. Function enable for the second STM-1.
Value available only if the management of the two STM-1 in MST mode is enabled.

Parameter available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 Bulk function
STM-1 Bulk function (info)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

141

STM-1 Bulk function (info)
The STM-1 Bulk function allows the transparent transport of a STM-1 in Radio.
With transparent transport we mean the transport of the whole STM-1. The user cannot execute changes
or configurations on the single virtual containers of the stream.
For equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0), the transport of the STM-1 can be enabled on radio branch
1 or on radio branch 2. Moreover, if two STM-1 streams are managed, it is possible to enable the transport
of the first STM-1 on one branch and the transport of the second STM-1 on the other branch.
The STM-1 Bulk function is available only with equipment type (see Equipment Units tab):

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

The STM-1 Bulk function can be activated only if the equipment has the following configuration:

Radio equipped in 1+0 or 1+1 configuration (see Configurator tab)

Band/modulation which allows the transport of the STM-1 (see Modulation & Capacity tab).
ACM disable:
28MHz - 256 QAM
ACM enable:
40MHz - 64 QAM
40MHz - 128 QAM
40MHz - 256 QAM
56MHz - 16 QAM
56MHz - 32 QAM
56MHz - 64 QAM
56MHz - 128 QAM
56MHz - 256 QAM

STM-1 in MST modality (see Configurator tab, STM-1 MST Mode: 1+0).

Synchronisation management enabled (see Configurator tab).

Local/remote synchronization protocol disabled (see General tab).

The activation of the STM-1 Bulk function determines that:

For the STM-1 for which the function has been activated, the following items will be not available
any more:

The relevant PM measure (G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2TUG12>).

The command for the management of the relevant VC-4 (see VC-4).

The command for the management of the relevant VC-12 (see VC-12).

The management of the stream in the Cross-Connection matrix (see Cross Connection).

Moreover, it will not be possible to:

142

Force the quality level in input and/or output of the specific synchronism source (see Synchronisation).

For the radio which the transport of the STM-1 is assigned to:

The static Radio E1 channels (Permanent TDM Traffic) are automatically reset.

The dynamic Radio E1 channels are limited to allow the transport of the STM-1.

If the equipment is in radio configuration 2x(1+0), for the parameter STM-1 MST Mode only the
values 1+0 and 2 x (1+0) MST are available (see Configurator).

The monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring, if active, is automatically deactivated (see Configurator).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

SYNCHRONISATION
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the synchronisation management is enabled (see Configurator).

The Synchronisation command manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism
Operations

T0

AND

T4

SYNCHRONISM

Verify the status and configuration of the T0 and T4 synchronism
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted
Enable/disable the T4 Squelch
Set the Hold Off Time parameter
Set the WTR Time parameter
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism
SYNCHRONISM

SOURCES

Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
Force the use of a synchronism source
Set a synchronism source as preferential
Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input
Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input
Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of
tributary A/B
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism
sources
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN
GUI

Synchronisation contextual area
See also

Synchronisation (info)

Verify the status and configuration of the T0 and T4 synchronism
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
The General tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

143

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Synchronisation.
The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism:

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the forcing (selection of the Free Running or Hold Over option) a message
warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
The T0-T4 parameter indicates the modality which the T4 synchronism is taken from:

T4-NE-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from one of the synchronism sources because two independent locking devices are used to generate T0 and T4.

T4-EQ-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from synchronism T0 because only one locking device is
used to generate T0 and T4.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the T4 Squelch
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
The T4 Squelch parameter indicates the status of the T4 squelch:

Disabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is disabled

Enabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is enabled. This function becomes active when
source T2/T3 1 has been selected for T0/T4 management.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the Hold Off Time parameter
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.

144

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

The Hold Off Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the
evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded).
At the end of the Hold Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input
source having a valid signal.
2. To change the parameter, set into the box a value between 300 and 1800 msec.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the WTR Time parameter
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
The WTR Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to
allow to the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 min.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
The LTI Set Time and LTI Reset Time parameters point out the threshold level of LTI alarm (Timing
Synk Loss Alarm):

LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the presence
of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.

LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.

2. To change the parameter, set the new values in the specific boxes (allowed interval between 0 and 60
seconds).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the
synchronism
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
The parameter Enabled indicates the status of use of the source quality level as synchronism selection
criterion.
Active box (

) means the use is enabled; inactive box means the use is disabled.

Parameter available only if the Sync quality management functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or
more features can be enabled.
2. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

145

Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.

1. Select Synchronisation.
The T4 Minimum Quality indicates the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism so that the Squelch does not occur.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

PRC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
Depending on the used locking devices, the tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 are available.
Tab T0/T4 is available when only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4
(T4-EQ-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the tab is valid for
both synchronisms T0 and T4.
Tab T0 and tab T4 are available when two locking devices are used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-NE-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the tab T0
is valid only for synchronism T0; while those present in tab T4 are valid only for synchronism T4.
The content of T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab, described here below, is the same.

Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The Priority column shows the usage status of each source.
3. To enable the use of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1 and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum
priority).

146

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

To disable the use of the source, select the specific Priority box and then the Dis. value.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The Priority column shows the priority level of each source.
3. To change the priority level of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1
and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Force the use of a synchronism source
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The Forced Switch column shows the forcing status of each source.
3. To change the forcing status of a source, select the specific Forced Switch box and then the option:

Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.

On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes.
Only if you are activating the forcing a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays
the current setting of timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

147

The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Set a synchronism source as preferential
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The Preferential Switch column shows if the source is used as preferential.
3. To change the preferential status of a source, select the specific Preferential Switch box and then the
option:

Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism
sources.

On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation
of the synchronism.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 e T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. Even in this case the operation
is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and synchronism T4 because the selection of the
source type is made upstream with respect to locking devices. This means that the setting made,
for example, in tab T0 is automatically reported in tab T4 and vice versa.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The box Source of source T2/T3-2 indicates the type of source currently in use:

Trib. B. Second E1 of the base board (tributary B) (T3 or T2).

Trib. <number>. E1 of the expansion (T2).

3. To change the parameter, select the Source box and then the wished option.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

148

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 e T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. Even in this case the operation
is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and synchronism T4 because the selection of the
source type is made upstream with respect to locking devices. This means that the setting made,
for example, in tab T0 is automatically reported in tab T4 and vice versa.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The box Source of the source TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B indicates the currently used LAN of Ethernet
Switch for every specific source: LAN-1, LAN-2, LAN-3, LAN-4.
Sources available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or
more features can be enabled.
3. To change the parameter, select the Source box and then the wished option.
If a value is set for the source TE LAN-A this value will not be available for the source TE LAN-B and
vice versa.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B
input
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with the management of the STM-1 and/or the management of the nodal configuration is active (see Configurator).

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 e T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. Even in this case the operation
is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and synchronism T4 because the selection of the
source type is made upstream with respect to locking devices. This means that the setting made,
for example, in tab T0 is automatically reported in tab T4 and vice versa.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The box Source of source STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B indicates the type of source currently in
use:

STM-1 [1] or STM-1. First STM-1.

STM-1 [2]. Second STM-1.

Nodal 1. First Nodal Bus.

Nodal 2. Second Nodal Bus.

3. To change the parameter, select the Source box and then the wished option.
The availability of the values changes depending on the type and on the configuration of the equipment
as depicted in Tab.8.
If a value is set for the source STM-1/NODAL A, this value will not be available for the source STM-1/
NODAL B and vice versa.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

149

4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.

Operation not available for the STM-1 source if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for the specific stream
(see STM1 Bulk Config.).
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
For every synchronism source, the parameter Ovw Rx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality
level in reception; while the parameter Ovw Tx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality level in
transmission.
3. To change the parameters, select the Ovw Rx Qlty or Ovw Tx Qlty box and than the option:

none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the
SSM protocol or, for the sources that do not use the SSM protocol (T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 sources), the default one (SEC).

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism
without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.

150

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

3. Select the source, with valid signal, whose availability you wish to restore for the generation of T0 synchronism.
4. Press Wtr Clear and confirm.
The source is immediately used for the generation of T0 synchronism. The period Wtr Time is considered elapsed.

Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of the

tributary (A or B) as traffic tributary.
1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the E1 Source Type tab.
The Trib. A and Trib. B boxes respectively point out the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A and B.
3. To change the parameters select, in the box relevant to the wished tributary, the option:

T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC). The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic only or for
the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see Re-timing the E1s set
for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

T3 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2Mbit/s.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2MHz.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2MHz as interface for the
tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Here below only the operation of re-timing of the E1s of equipment is described. For the correct

configuration of the functionality for a radio link see Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation.
1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the E1 Retiming tab.
The table present in the tab displays the activation status of the function E1 re-timing for every E1
equipment tributary.
Every row of the table corresponds to a tributary for which is displayed in the column:

Name. Tributary label:

E1 A. First E1 of base board (tributary A).

E1 B. Second E1 of base board (tributary B).

E1 <number>. E1 of expansion.

E1 Retiming. Status of E1 re-timing function of the tributary:

Off. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.

On. The E1 re-timing function is active.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

151

Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical,
Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

3. To change status of E1 re-timing function of a tributary, select the specific E1 Retiming box and then
the wished option.
Pressing Revert changes cancels the change executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only:

If the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.

For framed E1 (2Mbit/s).

1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the T2/T3 E1 SA Bit/1000Base-T Role tab.
In the E1 Time Slot 0 Spare Bits area, the T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 boxes respectively point out the spare
bit of timeslot 0 of the E1 frame used for the coding of the quality level of the sources T2/T3 1 and T2/
T3 2: Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8.
3. To change the parameters, select the T2/T3 1 or T2/T3 2 box and then the Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8
option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used
as synchronism sources
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only:

If the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.

For LANs with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active and the active configuration is 1000Base-T.

1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the T2/T3 E1 SA Bit/1000Base-T Role tab.
In the 1000Base-T Role area, the boxes TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B respectively point out the modality
used to assign the role (Master or Slave) of the LANs set for the synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE
LAN-B:

According to synch direction. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is
automatically managed by SSM protocol independently from the port parameter.

As set up for source LAN. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is defined at level of LAN (see Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for
the LAN).

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

152

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Sync eth support functionality is not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or
more features can be enabled.

Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchro-

nism, is enabled.
1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the LAN SSM Enabling tab.
The parameters LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4 respectively point out the enabling status of the management of the SSM messages for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the SSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box indicates that the messages are not managed.
3. To change a parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

153

Synchronisation contextual area
The contextual area displays status and configuration of the sources and the outputs of synchronism.
Tabs

General tab. Configuration and alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.
T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab. Configuration and status of the synchronism sources.
E1 Source Type tab. Parameters to manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and
set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B.
E1 Retiming tab. Parameters to re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic
and synchronisation.
T2/T3 E1 SA Bit / 1000Base-T Role tab. Parameters for the management of the sources T2/T3
1, T2/T3 2, TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B when the use of the source quality level as criterion for the
selection of the synchronism is active.
LAN SSM Enabling tab. Enabling status of the SSM messages for the LANs.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Synchronisation (info)

General tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.
Parameters

Alarms area. Alarms status of the T0 synchronism (Free Running, Hold Over and T0 boxes) and
T4 synchronism (T4 box). The colour of each box displays the status of the specific alarm:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Status Control (Settings area). Status of T0 synchronism:

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by
the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

T4 Squelch (Settings area). Status of the T4 squelch:

Disabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is disabled.

Enabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is enabled. This function becomes active
when source T2/T3 1 has been selected for T0/T4 management.

T4-T0 (Settings area). Modality which the T4 synchronism is taken from:

T4-NE-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from one of the synchronism sources because two
independent locking devices are used to generate T0 and T4.

T4-EQ-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from synchronism T0 because only one locking
device is used to generate T0 and T4.

Hold Off Time (area Time). Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded). At the end of the Hold
Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input source having a
valid signal.

154

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

WTR Time (area Time). Time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to allow to
the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
LTI Set Time / LTI Reset Time (area Time). Threshold level of LTI alarm (TimingSynkLossAlarm):

LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.

LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.

T0 Current (Quality area). Current quality level of the T0 synchronism:

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.

PRC. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

Generally, the quality of the T0 synchronism corresponds to the quality of the synchronism
which T0 is derived from.
T4 Current (area Quality). Current quality level of the T4 synchronism.

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.

PRC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization (equivalent to condition
of T4 squelch).

Enabled (Quality area). Status of use of source quality level as synchronism selection criterion.
Active box ( ) means the source quality level is used as synchronism selection criterion; inactive box means the quality level is used as selection criterion.
T4 Minimum Quality (area Quality). Minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4
synchronism so that the Squelch does not occur:

PRC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

WARNING The T0 Current, T4 Current and T4 Minimum Quality parameters are meaningful only if the use
of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.

Quality area is available only if the Sync quality management functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more
features can be enabled.
See also

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

155

Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted
Enable/disable the T4 Squelch
Set the Hold Off Time parameter
Set the WTR Time parameter
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism

T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab
The tabs display the configuration parameters and the status of the synchronism sources.
Depending on the used locking devices, the tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 are available.
Tabs

T0/T4. Tab available when only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-EQ-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the
tab is valid for both synchronisms T0 and T4.
T0 and T4. Tabs available when two locking devices are used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-NE-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the
tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0; while those present in tab T4 are valid only for synchronism T4.
The content of tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 is the same.
The table present in the specific tab displays the sources for the synchronism T0 and/or T4. Every
row corresponds to one source.
Parameters

Name. Synchronism source name:

T2/T3 1 [Interface]. Source extracted from the tributary A. The interface is pointed
out between square brackets. It can be T3 or T2.

T2/T3-2 [Interface]. Source extracted from tributary B or from one of the E1 of the
expansion. The interface is pointed out between square brackets. It can be T3 (tributary B only) or T2.

TE LAN-A. First source extracted from one of LANs of Ethernet Switch.

TE LAN-B. Second source extracted from one of LANs of Ethernet Switch.

STM-1/NODAL A. First source extracted from the STM-1 (1 or 2) or from the Nodal
Bus (1 or 2).

STM-1/NODAL B. Second source extracted from the STM-1 (1 or 2) or from the Nodal
Bus (1 or 2).

STM-1 [1] or STM-1. Source extracted from the first STM-1 tributary.

STM-1 [2]. Source extracted from the second STM-1 tributary.

Nodal 1. Source extracted from the Nodal Bus 1.

Nodal 2. Source extracted from the Nodal Bus 2.

RADIO 1A. Source extracted from the Radio 1A.

RADIO 2A. Source extracted from the Radio 2A.

Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (12,8MHz STRATUM 3).
This source is valid only for synchronism T0, so it will be present only in tabs T0/T4
or T0. The Internal source has not configuration parameters.

The detail of the signal/configuration relevant to every single s source and the availability of the
source depending on the type/configuration of the equipment is pointed out in Tab.8.
TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B sources are available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one
or more features can be enabled.

156

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Source. Source type used as synchronism:

Trib. A. First E1 of the base board (tributary A) (2MHz or 2Mb/s).

Trib. B. Second E1 of the base board (tributary B) (2MHz or 2Mb/s).

Trib. <number>. E1 of the expansion (2Mb/s interface).

LAN-1, LAN-2, LAN-3, LAN-4. Respectively first, second, third and fourth LAN of the
Ethernet Switch. LAN 3 and LAN 4 are available when configured both with electrical
and optical interface.

STM-1 [1] or STM-1. First STM-1.

STM-1 [2]. Second STM-1.

Nodal 1. First Nodal Bus.

Nodal 2. Second Nodal Bus.

Priority. Status and priority use of the source:

Dis. The synchronism source is not used.

<1 ÷ 9>. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed out by
the number (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).

Forced Switch. Forced use of the source:

Off. The source has not been manually forced for the generation of the T0 and/or T4
synchronism.

On <light blue box>. The source has been manually forced for the generation of the
T0 and/or T4 synchronism (Manual Operation).

Preferential Switch. Status of preferential usage of the source:

Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources.

On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used
for the generation of the synchronism.

Sync Loss / Sync Drift. Respectively status of the alarm Timing Synk Loss Alarm and Timing
Synk Drift Alarm relevant to the source. The colour of each box displays the status of the specific
alarm:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Rx Quality. Quality level in reception of the source:

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.

The quality level in reception for STM-1 is in compliance with the SSM protocol, while for E1
(2Mbit/s and 2MHz) it is SEC.
Tx Quality. Quality level in transmission of the source.
The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the protocol
calculation.
The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality parameter.
The transmission quality level for STM-1 when the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk
Config.) is UNK.
Ovw Rx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in reception of the source:

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

157

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown

none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken
from the SSM protocol or, for the sources that do not use the SSM protocol (T2/T3 1
and T2/T3 2 sources), the default one (SEC).

Ovw Tx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in transmission of the source.
The displayed values are the same described for the Ovw Rx Qlty parameter.
The Rx Quality, Tx Quality, Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Qlty parameters are present only if the use of
the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
The source of synchronism whose row has red border indicates the source which the equipment extracts the synchronization T0 and/or T4 from.
When the source, which the synchronization is extracted from, changes, the row relevant to the new
source will become yellow and will blink before becoming of color sky-blue with red border.
Push-button

Refresh. Update the context.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
Wtr clear. Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without
waiting for the expiry of Wait Time.
See also

Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
Force the use of a synchronism source
Set a synchronism source as preferential
Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input
Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input
Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source

E1 Source Type tab
The tab displays the parameters to manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the
interface (output/input) of tributary A/B.
Parameters

Trib. A / Trib. B. Output of synchronism T12, respectively on tributary A and B:

T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC). The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic
only or for the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see
pag.213To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

158

T3 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface
2Mbit/s.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface
2MHz.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2MHz as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

WARNING The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of the

tributary (A or B) as traffic tributary.
See also

Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of
tributary A/B

E1 Retiming tab

The tab displays the parameters to re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation.
Parameters

Name. Tributary label:

E1 A. First E1 of base board (tributary A).

E1 B. Second E1 of base board (tributary B).

E1 <number>. E1 of expansion.

E1 Retiming. Status of E1 re-timing function of the tributary:

Off. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.

On. The E1 re-timing function is active.

Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Push-button

Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
See also

Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation

T2/T3 E1 SA Bit / 1000Base-T Role tab
The tab displays the parameters for the management of the sources T2/T3 1, T2/T3 2, TE LAN-A and TE
LAN-B when the use of the source quality level as criterion for the selection of the synchronism is active.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

159

Parameters

T2/T3 1, T2/T3 2 (E1 Time Slot 0 Spare Bits area). Respectively spare bit of timeslot 0 of E1
frame used for the coding of the quality level of the source T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2: Sa4, Sa5, Sa6,
Sa7 or Sa8.
TE LAN-A, TE LAN-B (1000Base-T Role area). Respectively modality to assign the role (Master
or Slave) of the LANs (1000Base-T) set for the synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B:

According to synch direction. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is automatically managed by SSM protocol independently from the setting
of the port parameters.

As set up for source LAN. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is defined at level of LAN (see Verify/modify the operating modality of the line
synchronism (role) for the LAN).

See also

Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism
sources

LAN SSM Enabling tab
The tab displays the enabling status of the SSM messages.
Parameters

LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4. Respectively enabling status of the management of the SSM
messages for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the SSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box
indicates that the messages are not managed.
See also

Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN

160

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Synchronisation (info)

Management of synchronisation
Synchronism sources
Enabling of the synchronism sources
Configuration of the synchronism sources
Priority of the synchronism source
Quality of synchronism source
Forcing of a synchronism source
Function of preferential synchronism source
Internal synchronism T0
Synchronism in output T4
Synchronism in output T12
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation

Management of synchronisation
ALCplus2e equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled.
When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the
local internal reference.
When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source, enabled with the highest priority, is used
to synchronise the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential is not active).
If the quality is active as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, the enabled source with highest
quality is used to synchronize the equipment (if no forcing is active).
The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see Configurator) and
enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism.
The equipment makes a synchronization signal available to other equipment (synchronism T4), common
or independent from the synchronism used by the equipment (synchronism T0).
Access to T4 synchronism is possible through a special setting of the outputs of tributaries A and/or B (T12
synchronism).

Synchronism sources
The equipment has more synchronism sources.
The number/type of synchronism sources depends on the type/expansion/configuration of equipment as
depicted in Tab.8.
Tab.8 Synchronism sources
IDUBOARD ONLY 1+0
Name

Type

Configuration

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

(1)

T2/T3 2

E1

Tributary B with interface T2 or T3

(1)

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 1A

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

161

IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD XPIC
Name

Type

Configuration

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

(1)

T2/T3 2

E1

Tributary B with interface T2 or T3

(1)

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

RADIO 1A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 2A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 2A) (3)
Source available only in 2x(1+0) radio configurator

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Name

Type

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷32) with interface T2

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

STM-1 (4)

STM-1

STM-1.
Source available only if the management of STM-1 is enabled

RADIO 1A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Name

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷32) with interface T2E1

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

STM-1

STM-1.
Source available only if the management of STM-1 is enabled

RADIO 1A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 2A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 2A) (3)
Source available only in 2x(1+0) radio configurator

STM-1

162

Type

(4)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Name

Type

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷16) with interface T2

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 1A

The name and the configuration of the sources in input for the STM-1 and for the Nodal Bus change depending on the configuration of the equipment and are pointed out in Tab.9

IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD. 2XSTM-1 16E1
Name

Type

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷16) with interface T2

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

RADIO 1A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 2A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 2A) (3)
Source available only in 2x(1+0) radio configurator

The name and the configuration of the sources in input for the STM-1 and for the Nodal Bus change depending on the configuration of the equipment and are pointed out in Tab.9

IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Name

Type

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷16) with interface T2

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 1A

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

163

IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 PWE3
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 PWE3
Name

Type

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷16) with interface T2

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

RADIO 1A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 2A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 2A) (3)
Source available only in 2x(1+0) radio configurator

(1)

The type of interface depends on the setting made by the user for the management of the synchronism
in output T12 (see Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/
input) of tributary A/B).
(2)

Source configurable as:

LAN 1

LAN 2

LAN 3 (electrical or optical interface)

LAN 4 (electrical or optical interface)

If a value is set for the source TE LAN-A this value will not be available for the source TE LAN-B and
vice versa.
Source available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or
more features can be enabled.
(3)

Source not available for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with East-West option
disable.

(4) If the management of two STM-1 is active, the values STM-1 [1] and STM-1 [2] will be available, which
respectively point out the source relative to the first STM-1 and second STM-1.

164

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Tab.9 Availability synchronism sources (STM-1/Nodal Bus)
Equipment Configuration
STM-1 management

Synchronism sources for STM-1/Nodal Bus

Nodal Bus management

Name

Type

Configuration

-

-

Disable

Enable
1 STM-1

Enable
2 STM-1

Disable

Enable

X

-

-

X

-

-

X

-

-

-

X

Nodal 1

Nodal Bus

Nodal Bus 1

Nodal 2

Nodal Bus

Nodal Bus 2

-

X

-

X

-

STM-1

STM-1

First STM-1

-

X

-

-

X

STM-1/
NODAL A

STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

Source configurable as (1):
• STM-1 (STM-1)
• Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
• Nodal Bus 2 (Nodal 2)

STM-1/
NODAL B

STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

Source configurable as (1):
• STM-1 (STM-1)
• Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
• Nodal Bus 2 (Nodal 2)

STM-1 [1]

STM-1

First STM-1

STM-1 [2]

STM-1

Second STM-1

STM-1/
NODAL A

STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

Source configurable as (1):
• First STM-1 (STM-1 [1])
• Second STM-1 (STM-1 [2])
• Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
• Nodal Bus 2 (Nodal 2)

STM-1/
NODAL B

STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

Source configurable as (1):
• First STM-1 (STM-1 [1])
• Second STM-1 (STM-1 [2])
• Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
• Nodal Bus 2 (Nodal 2)

-

-

-

-

X

X

X

-

-

X

(1)
If a value is set for the source STM-1/NODAL A this value will not be available for the source STM-1/
NODAL B and vice versa.

Enabling of the synchronism sources
A synchronism source, in order to be used, must be enabled by the user (see Enable/disable the use of a
synchronism source).

Configuration of the synchronism sources
For some synchronism sources, the type of signal to use can be set (see Tab.8).

Priority of the synchronism source
A priority level can be associated to every synchronism source (see Modify the use priority of a synchronism
source).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

165

When the quality is not active as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, the source with the highest
priority level and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential
source is not active).
The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 indicates
the highest priority and 9 the lowest one.
Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this
source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately
lower.
When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment after the WTR time will automatically start to use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become
unavailable, the equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference.
The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions:

The source is not physically present.

The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3) is
greater than ± 7 ppm.

If two or more sources with the same priority are activated, these sources will be inserted into a circular
and not Revertive list.

Quality of synchronism source
Every synchronism source is characterized by a quality level.
Through WEB CT page, it is possible Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion
of the synchronism.
When the use of quality is enabled, it concurs in the selection of the source to use for the synchronisation
in the following way: the source with higher quality level, and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize
the equipment (if a forcing is not active).
The source quality level is given by the synchronisation status messages (SSM - Synchronisation Status
Message).
The availability quality levels, from higher to lower level, are listed here below:

PRC (Primary Reference Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the primary reference
clock.

SSUT (Synchronisation Supply Unit Transit). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITUT G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the
transit synchronism units.

SSUL (Synchronisation Supply Unit Local). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T
G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the synchronism local units.

SEC (SDH Equipment Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

Depending on the type of synchronism source, the modality used to insert and extract the SSM messages
changes as pointed out here below.

Synchronism sources T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 (E1)
For the synchronism sources T2/T3, the management of the quality depends on the tributary used as synchronism source, on the configuration of the synchronism in output T12 and on the E1 re-timing function
as displayed here below.

166

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Synchronism
sources
T2/T3 1

Configuration
Tributary A

T2/T3 2

Tributary B

Output of
synchronism T12

E1 re-timing
function

Quality management in output Quality management in input
(Tx)
(Rx)

T2
(NORMAL TRAFFIC)

Enable

Quality value of T0 is inserted
in the spare bits (1)

Disable

Quality not managed

(2)

T3 (2Mb/s)

-

Quality value of T0 is inserted
in the spare bits (1)

T3 (2MHz)

-

Quality not managed

T2
(NORMAL TRAFFIC)

(2)

Enable

Quality value of T0 is inserted
in the spare bits (1)

Disable

Quality not managed

-

Quality value of T0 is inserted
in the spare bits (1)

T3 (2MHz)

-

Quality not managed

(2)

-

Enable

Quality value of T0 is inserted
in the spare bits (1)

-

Disable

Quality not managed

(1)

Value equivalent to DNU if T0 is derived from the considered tributary.

(2)

Value UNK.

Quality value (SSM) is extracted from the spare bits

(2)

T3 (2Mb/s)

Tributary E1
expansion

Quality value (SSM) is extracted from the spare bits

(2)

Synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B (Ethernet)
The management of the SSM messages can be enabled for every single LAN.
This setting affects the transmission and the reception of the SSM messages as displayed here below.
LAN configuration
LAN used as
synchronism source

(1)

LAN not used
as synchronism source

SSM messages
management

Quality management in input
(Rx)

Quality management in output
(Tx)

Enable

Quality value (SSM) is extracted from Quality value of T0 is inserted in the
the received packet
transmitted packet (value equivalent to
DNU if T0 is derived from the considered
tributary)

Disable

Quality value is DNU

SSM messages are not transmitted

Enable

SSM messages are not managed

Quality value of T0 is inserted in the
transmitted packet

Disable

SSM messages are not managed

SSM messages are not transmitted

(1)

LAN connected to the TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input (see Set the signal used as synchronism source for
TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input).
As regards the quality management via the WEB CT page, it is possible:
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism.
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism sources
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN
WARNING The quality of the synchronism sources is a feature subjected to enabling (Sync quality management equipment feature).

If this feature is not enabled, all the parameters relevant to the quality management will not be available.
By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more features can be enabled.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

167

Forcing of a synchronism source
This function foresees the user can force the selection of one synchronism source (see Force the use of a
synchronism source).
This forcing is made without considering the status, the quality level and the priority of the source.
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the synchronism. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operations expires (if set).

Function of preferential synchronism source
This function foresees the choice of a source to use as preferential among those enabled (see Set a synchronism source as preferential).
When the function of preferential source is not active, the internal synchronism is taken from the enabled
source with highest quality level or highest priority (if the quality is not active).
When the function of preferential source is activated for a source, this source will be used (in absence of
alarms causing its degradation or forced sources) to take the internal synchronism independently from its
priority level.
This condition is maintained until when the user disables the function of preferential source or the source
signal becomes degraded.
This applies only if the quality is not enabled as criterion for the selection of the synchronism.

Internal synchronism T0
The synchronism source, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by the SETS
of the equipment according to the following order of criteria:

Status of the source (enabled/disabled)

Forcing of the source

Status of the signal (valid/degraded)

Quality level of the source (if the quality management is enabled)

Preferential source

Source priority

The internal synchronism T0 can assume one of the following statuses:

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see Force the status of the T0 synchronisation).
The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0.
These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them
or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).

Synchronism in output T4
The equipment makes a synchronization signal available to other equipment (synchronism T4), common
or independent from the synchronism used by the equipment (synchronism T0) (see Set the modality from
which the T4 synchronism is extracted).
This because the synchronization unit is composed by two independent locking devices (Phase Locked
Loop):

168

A device for the generation of equipment circuit (T0)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

A device for the generation of synchronism output (T4)

The selection of the references which the devices are locked to can be independent (T4T0) or associated
(T4=T0) to the use of a single device.
For every device, as told before, a set of sources can be set which, depending on their priority, are selected
to generate the equipment synchronisation.

Synchronism in output T12
The user can set that the synchronism in output is provided to tributaries A and/or B (see par. Manage the
output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B). In this
case the use of the tributary (A and/or B) as traffic tributary is compromised.
The use of the tributary A and/or B as output of synchronism T12 determinates the type of the interface
of the tributary (A and/or B) used as synchronism source (see Tab.10).
Tab.10 Synchronism in output (T12)
Value set as output of
synchronism T12
(parameter Trib. A)
T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC)

Output of Synchronism
T12 on tributary A
Yes

(1)

Interface of tributary A
(output/input)

Use of tributary A
as traffic tributary

2Mbit/s

Yes

T3 (2Mb/s)

Yes

2Mbit/s

No

T3 (2MHz)

Yes

2MHz

No

Output of Synchronism
T12 on tributary B

Interface of tributary B
(output/input)

Use of tributary B
as traffic tributary

2Mbit/s

Yes

Value set as output of
synchronism T12
(parameter Trib. B)
T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC)

Yes

(1)

T3 (2Mb/s)

Yes

2Mbit/s

No

T3 (2MHz)

Yes

2MHz

No

(1)

For the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic (see Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).

Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
The function called Re-timing of E1s allows re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic
and synchronisation, to increase the requirements of jitter and wander even in case of operation with adaptive modulation (ACM).

Implementation of the function for the E1s of the base board (tributary A and B)
The tributaries of the base board can be set for the transport only of the traffic or as output of T12 synchronism.
If the user wishes to use the tributary A or B for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation,
in any condition of operation of the radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations
described in the following example.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary A used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.3).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

169

Fig.3 Example of re-timing of tributary A (synchronisation)
LOCAL equipment

REMOTE equipment

SETS
management

SETS
management

Tributary A

Tributary A

Operations to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB CT page:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Configurator).
b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see E1).
c. Set the source T2/T3 1 (tributary A) as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
d. Set the value T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC) as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A
(see Synchronisation).
Operations to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB CT page:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Configurator).
b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see E1).
c. Set the source RADIO 1A as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
For equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0), set the source RADIO 1A or RADIO 2A depending
on the Radio E1 which the tributary A is cross-connected.
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary A (see Synchronisation).
e. Set the value T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC) as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A
(see Synchronisation).

Implementation of the function for the E1s of the expansion (tributary 1...n)
Generally the tributaries of the expansion transport traffic.
If the user wants to use their frequency for synchronisation purposes in any condition of operation of the
radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations described in the following example.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary 1 used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.4).
Fig.4 Example of re-timing of tributary 1 (synchronisation)
LOCAL equipment

REMOTE equipment

SETS
management

SETS
management

Tributary 1

170

Tributary 1

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Settings to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB CT page:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Configurator).
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see E1).
c. Set the tributary 1 as source T2/T3 2 (see Synchronisation).
d. Set the source T2/T3 2 as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
Settings to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB CT page:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Configurator).
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see E1).
c. Set the source RADIO 1A as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
For equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0), set the source RADIO 1A or RADIO 2A depending
on the Radio E1 which the tributary A is cross-connected.
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary 1 (see Synchronisation).
WARNING In case you want to use this function (contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation) on
more E1, all the tributaries must be synchronous, moreover the re-timing must be activated for all the
tributaries and not only for the tributary used as synchronous source.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

171

BASE BAND

Ethernet Switch. It manages the configuration of the Ethernet Switch.
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4. It manages the specific LAN of the Ethernet Switch.
Port A, Port B. It manages the specific Radio port of the Ethernet Switch.
Spanning Tree. It manages the spanning tree in the network.
Ring Protection. It manages the Ring Protection mode (G.8032).
TDM Tributaries. It manages the TDM tributaries.
Cross Connection. It manages the cross-connection matrix.
Radio E1 Framing. It manages the structure of the Radio E1s.

172

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Ethernet Switch
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The Ethernet Switch command manages the Ethernet Switch configuration.
Operations

GENERAL

SETTINGS OF THE

ETHERNET SWITCH

Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field
Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet
Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
Display the MAC Table
Reset the MAC Table
Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its Tag 802.1p (level 2)
Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality
PARAMETERS

OF

PTOS/DSCP

FIELD

Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)
VIRTUAL LAN
Verify the existing virtual LANs
Create a virtual Lan
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan
Delete a virtual Lan
GUI

Ethernet Switch contextual area
See also

Ethernet Switch (info)

Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
The QinQ ETH Type parameter indicates the Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field.
2. To change the parameter, type the new value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING When the Double Tag function is enabled (see LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4/Port A, Port B), for
the correct transit of the supervision packets it is suggested to set the value 2048 as maximum packet size.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
The Max Packet size (Byte) parameter indicates the maximum size of the accepted packet:

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

173

1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frame).

2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.

10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING If some VLANs have been already created, when the partition and the indexing on VID (VLAN
Identifier) basis of the addresses in MAC Table (selection of option Enable), IT IS NECESSARY to execute
a software reset.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
The parameter MAC Learning Vid basis indicates the address learning modality of MAC address in the
relevant table:

Disable. Learning of MAC Address in MAC Table is never partitioned in presence of VLAN 802.1Q
registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).

Enable. The partition and the indicization on VID basis of MAC Addresses in MAC Table are enabled. Their learning is registered in a segment of MAC Table whose index is the value of VID
contained in the VLANs entering the Switch and registered in VTU.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
The MAC Addr. Aging Time parameter indicates the validity period of the MAC addresses, dynamically
acquired and stored in the specific table.
2. To change the parameter, set the wished value (numeric value between 15 and 3825 seconds).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Display the MAC Table
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Press Show Mac Table.
The MAC Table window shows the content of the MAC Table at the moment when the window has been
opened. Press Refresh to update the list.
Every row of the table corresponds to one address with the indication of:

174

Mac Address. Registered source MAC address expressed in hexadecimal format.

FID. Number of the MAC Table partition which the address is associated to.

Port. Output port relevant to the respective registered address:

CPU. Internal port.

LAN-1. First LAN of Ethernet Switch.

LAN-2. Second LAN of Ethernet Switch.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

LAN-3. Third LAN of Ethernet Switch.

LAN-4. Fourth LAN of Ethernet Switch.

RADIO-1. First Radio port of the Ethernet Switch (Port A).

RADIO-2. Second Radio port of the Ethernet Switch (Port B).

The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.11).

TTL. Priority in the deletion of the packet from the MAC Table:

1. The address will be the first to be deleted.

2. The address will be the second to be deleted.

3. The address will be the third to be deleted.

4. The address will be the fourth to be deleted.

5. The address will be the fifth to be deleted.

6. The address will be the sixth to be deleted.

7. The address will be the last to be deleted.

Value meaningful only for Unicast aging packets.

Description. Type of address:

Unicast aging. Dynamic Unicast address (removed from MAC Table at the expiry of Aging
Time).

Unicast static. Static Unicast address (not removed from MAC Table at the expiry of Aging
Time).

Unicast Mng static. Static Unicast address for management.

Multicast static. Static Multicast address.

Multicast Mng static. Static Multicast address for management.

Protocol Type. Type of packets:

OAM. OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) packets.

RSTP. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol packets.

SLOW. service packets used for the equipment management.

---. Packets with protocol or use different from those listed above.

Reset the MAC Table
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
2. Press Mac Table clear and confirm.
The system reset the MAC Table.

Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch
Access | Read & Write
WARNING The operation is traffic affecting.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, this operation is not available.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
2. Press Switch default and confirm.
The system reset the MAC Table.
At the equipment restart, the default configuration (Factory Default) will be automatically applied only
for the Ethernet Switch.
All the settings executed until that moment by the user (for example the configuration of the Ethernet
ports, of the VLANs and OAM-FM) and the statistics (Lan Statistics) will be deleted.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

175

Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
The Egress Priority Policy parameter indicates the emptying algorithm of the output queues:

Strict Priority, the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.

8421 WRR, a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the
queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2
messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from
the queue with highest priority.

Strict 3, the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other
queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.

Strict 3 and 2, the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues
(1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its Tag 802.1p (level 2)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
The 802.1p Priority Management table indicates which output queue a packet, in input to any Ethernet
port, must be assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag (see General tab).
2. To change the parameter, select the option corresponding to the wished combination output queue Tag 802.1p.
For the same value of Tag 802.1p, it is possible to select only one queue at a time.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
2. Select the LLF tab.
The LLF Hysteresis parameter indicates the time interval (hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated and deactivated.
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the Ethernet ports of the equipment.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the level-3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/DSCP) is not
managed when the transit of the packets takes place through the nodal interconnection.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.

176

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

2. Select the PTOS/DSCP Config. tab.
The tab displays, for each PTOS/DSCP value, the relevant output queue.
3. To modify the output queue, which a PTOS/DSCP value is associated to, select, in the Filter box, the IP
format which the DSCP field refers to.
4. Select the box relevant to the output queue you wish to change (column Internal Priority (Queue) and
select the wished option.
5. Repeat the previous step to change the output queue of all the wished PTOS/DSCP value.
6. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the existing virtual LANs
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
2. Select the Virtual Lan Config. tab.
The tab displays the existing virtual LANs.

Create a virtual Lan
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
2. Select the Virtual Lan Config. tab.
3. Press Add.
4. Type, into the VLan ID box, the identifier (within 2 and 4094) you wish to assign to the virtual LAN.
The parameter cannot be modified later.
5. If you wish to create more VLANs at the same time, type in the End Block box the identifier of the last
VLAN of the group (between 2 and 4094).
The value of End Block must be greater than the value of VLan ID and no VLAN with identifier within
the range End Block - VLan ID must be present in the list.
The system creates a number of VLANs (and inserts the relevant rows in the table) equal to the difference between the values of the parameters End Block and VLan ID, with identifiers in progression from
the lowest to the higher value, and automatically assigns the relevant Label using the format <Label>
<identifier>.
All the VLANs created at the same time get the same policy regarding the transit of packets through
the ports of the Ethernet switch.
6. Type, into the Label box, the name (alphanumeric string up to 20 characters) you wish to assign to the
virtual LAN.
The system automatically suggest, as name of the virtual Lan, Vlan <identifier>. This name can be
changed as you wish.
7. In the box relevant to each port (Lan, Port), select the option:

Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan.

Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:

Of priority; the value is defined in the Default Priority box of the origin port of the packet
itself.

Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port
of the packet.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

177

The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the input
port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan Table
is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.

Untag., to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in
output from the port.

Unmodif., to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or added to the packets in
output from the port.

The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.11).
In order to create the VLAN, the transit of the packets must be enabled at least for one port (a value
different from Disable is set).
8. Press Apply and confirm.
The Virtual Lan Config. tab displays the row relevant to the new virtual Lan.
If the displayed message is:

Warning! VLAN ID already in the list. The set identifier corresponds to that of an already existing
VLAN. Change the value in the VLan ID box.

Warning! VLAN ID already reserved in port configuration “In Band Management”.The set identifier corresponds to that reserved for the in-band supervision for one or more elements. Change
the value in the VLan ID box.

Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
2. Select the Virtual Lan Config. tab.
3. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter of VLan you wish to change.
Except for the identifier (VLAN ID), all the parameters of a VLan can be (Label, Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3,
Lan 4, Port A).
The parameter setting modes are the same pointed out in par. Create a virtual Lan.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed and not communicated yet to the equipment.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.11).
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.
The changes are confirmed in Virtual Lan Config tab.
If the displayed message is:

An OAM MA and/or a MEP are bound on this VLAN. Please remove them before modifying it. To
the VLAN is associated at least a MA and/or a MEP of the OAM-FM Domain defined for the equipment. Before changing the VLAN is necessary to dismiss all the relevant MA/MEP (see OAM).

Delete a virtual Lan
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
2. Select the Virtual Lan Config. tab.
3. Select the virtual Lan you wish to delete.
The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
4. Press Remove and confirm.
The virtual Lan is removed from the list.

178

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Ethernet Switch contextual area
The contextual area displays the Ethernet Switch configuration.
Tabs

General tab. Ethernet Switch configuration.
LLF tab. Hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab. Correspondence PTOS/DSCP value - output queue.
Virtual Lan Config. tab. Existing virtual LANs.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Ethernet Switch (info)

General tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Ethernet Switch.
Parameters

QinQ ETH type 0x. Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field.
Max Packet size (Byte). Maximum size of the accepted packet:

1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frame).

2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.

10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).

MAC Learning Vid basis. Address learning modality of MAC address in the relevant table:

Disable. The learning of MAC Address in MAC Table is never partitioned in presence
of VLAN 802.1Q registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).

Enable. The partition and the indicization on VID (VLAN Identifier) basis of MAC Addresses in MAC Table are enabled. Their learning is registered in a segment of MAC
Table whose index is the value of VID contained in the VLANs entering the Switch and
registered in VTU.

MAC Addr. Aging Time. Validity period of the MAC addresses, stored in the MAC Table.
Egress Priority Policy. Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue:

8421 WRR, indicates that a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is
empties, then a part of the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the
queue with further lower priority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest
priority (1 message) and so on restarting from the queue with highest priority.

Strict Priority, indicates that the queue with highest priority is completely emptied
(sending of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.

Strict 3, indicates that the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all
the messages). The other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.

Strict 3 and 2, indicates that the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely
emptied. The other queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.

802.1p Priority Management. The table indicates which output queue a packet, in input to
any Ethernet port, must be assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag:

Queue... Output queue available in the equipment. Each Ethernet port of the equipment has four output queue, which the packets in input from other ports are sent to:

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

179

Queue 0. Queue with 0 priority (low priority).

Queue 1. Queue with 1 priority.

Queue 2. Queue with 2 priority.

Queue 3. Queue with 3 priority (high priority).

0 ÷ 7. Tag 802.1p value of the packet in input to a port of the equipment.

The active option indicates the combination output queue - Tag 802.1p.
The table is common to all the Ethernet port of the equipment.
Push-button

Show Mac Table. Display the MAC Table.
Mac Table clear. Reset the MAC Table.
Switch default. Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch.
See also

Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field
Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet
Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its Tag 802.1p (level 2)

LLF tab
The tab displays the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Parameters

LLF Hysteresis. Time interval (hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated and deactivated.
See also

Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality

PTOS/DSCP Config. tab
The table displays, for each PTOS/DSCP value, the relevant output queue.
Parameters

List Filter. Filter the values of the table:

View All. The table displays all the values.

View Queue 0. The table displays only the values associated to the 0 output queue.

View Queue 1. The table displays only the values associated to the 1 output queue.

View Queue 2. The table displays only the values associated to the 2 output queue.

View Queue 3. The table displays only the values associated to the 3 output queue.

Filter. Set the IP format which the DSCP field refers to:

IP v4 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the
IPv4 format.

IP v6 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the
IPv6 format.

Table. Every row of the table corresponds to a possible value for the relevant PTOS/DSCP field:

180

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Value. The value expressed in binary digits.

Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the options see RFC
2474, 2597 and 2598 specifications.

Internal Priority (Queue). Queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose
PTOS/DSCP has the value displayed in the row, is assigned to is displayed:

3. Queue with 3 priority (high priority).

2. Queue with 2 priority.

1. Queue with 1 priority.

0. Queue with 0 priority (low priority).

See also

Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)

Virtual Lan Config. tab
The tab displays the existing virtual LANs.
Every row of the table corresponds to a VLAN.
Parameters

VLan ID. Identifier assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation.
The VLans automatically created by the system (reserved VLans) are indicated as follows:

<identifier> Used. VLAN that use as ID, the default VLan ID of any Ethernet (see Default VLan ID area).

<identifier> res. (management). VLan reserved for the in-band supervision (see
Ethernet tab).

<identifier> res. (g8032). VLan associated to one ERP instance (see Ring Protection).

Label. Name assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation or modification.
Parameter not available for the reserved VLan (res...).
Lan1. Enabling of the LAN 1 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN:

Disable. The port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to
that of the virtual Lan.

Untag. The port allows the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed
to the packets in output from the port.

Tagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:

Of priority; the value is defined in the Default Priority box of the origin port of
the packet itself.

Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the
origin port of the packet.

The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID
of the input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not
satisfied, the Vlan Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.

Unmodif. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or
added to the packets in output from the port.

Lan2. Enabling of the LAN 2 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
Lan3. Enabling of the LAN 3 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
Lan4. Enabling of the LAN 4 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

181

PortA. Enabling of the Radio port A to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
PortB. Enabling of the Radio port B to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see
Tab.11).
Default VLan ID. Default VLan identifier of each Ethernet port of the equipment.
Push-button

Add. Create a virtual Lan.
Remove. Delete a virtual Lan.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to VLANs.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to VLANs and not confirmed yet.
See also

Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan

182

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Ethernet Switch (info)

Construction of C-TAG on non-802.1Q LAN
Replacement of C-TAG in a packet with original C-TAG
Construction of S-TAG (QinQ – Double Tag) in a packet with C-TAG
Analysing the priority
MAC Table

Construction of C-TAG on non-802.1Q LAN
This functionality allows adding a default TAG, locally constructed on the basis of the values of the port in
input, to an untagged packet.
Necessary condition is that:

The port in output in Frame Egress Mode is configured as Tagged

The TAG added in output to the switch will be composed by:

Default Vid of the port in input which the untagged packet comes from.

Default Pbit of the port in input which the untagged packet comes from.

Replacement of C-TAG in a packet with original C-TAG
This functionality allows replacing a default TAG, in output on the basis of the values of the port in input,
to an already tagged packet in input.
Necessary conditions are:

Ingress Filtering Check of the ports in input and in output is configured to Fallback or Secure.

Functionality Force Default Vid is enabled in the port in input

In VLAN Table, a VLAN is configured equal to the parameter Default Vid of the port in input (value of VID which will be written), defined as unmodified for the port in input and tagged for the
port in output

The TAG replaced in output to the switch will be composed by:

Default Vid of the input port which the packet comes from

Default Pbit of the input port which the packet comes from, if 802.1p is disabled

Origin Pbit (possibly re-mapped) of the packet in input if 802.1p is enabled (or remapping is
enable)

Construction of S-TAG (QinQ – Double Tag) in a packet with C-TAG
This functionality allows adding a second TAG (S-TAG) in output to an already tagged packet in input, on
the basis of the values of the port in input.
Necessary conditions are:

Ingress Filtering Check of input and output ports is configured to Fallback or Secure.

Field Frame Egress Mode in the output port is configured as Add Double Tag.

In VLAN Table, is configured a VLAN equal to the parameter Default Vid of the port in input,
defined as unmodified for the input port and unmodified for the port in output

The S-TAG replaced in output to the switch will be composed by:

Ethernet Type defined in Ethernet Switch QinQ Eth type (default 0x9100)

Default Vid of the input port which the packet comes from.

Default Pbit of the input port which the packet comes from, if 802.1p is disabled

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

183

Origin Pbit (possibly re-mapped) of the packet in input if 802.1p is enabled (or remapping is
enable)

A port configured as Add Double Tag removes, in input, all the S-Tag with Ethernet type corresponding to that configured in Ethernet Switch QinQ Eth type (default 0x9100)

When the switch works at S-TAG level, C-TAG is left unchanged.

Notes:

Analysing the priority
The equipment allows analysing the priority at level 2, according the standard 802.1p (values 0…7), or at
level 3 (PTOS/DSCP field).
If the analysis of the priority at level 2 is active and prioritary, a packet in input from any Ethernet port of
the equipment, with a valid Tag value of priority 802.1p, will be automatically assigned to one of the four
queues of the output port, according to what pointed out in the table 802.1p Priority Management.
If the analysis of the priority at level 3 is active and prioritary, the field PTOS/DSCP present in the heading
of the IP packets (values 0÷63) will be considered.
The priority standard can be modified by the user and is common to all the Ethernet ports.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the level-3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/DSCP) is not
managed when the transit of the packets takes place through the nodal interconnection (see Fig.5).
Fig.5 Management of the field PTOS/DSCP in a node

IDU1
A

3
4

2
1

Switch

Ethernet
nodal
bus

IDU2
A
3
4

2
1

Switch

Packets for which the priority
analysis at level 3 is managed
Packets for which the priority
analysis at level 3 is not managed

MAC Table
The MAC Table is a table created by the Ethernet Switch to keep trace of the reachability of the equipment
present in the network.
For the editing of the MAC Table, the Switch uses the MAC address (source) of the packets in input and the
number of the port through which a packet enters in the Switch as information source.
The source MAC of a packet in input to the Switch is subjected to Learning operation and possibly registered
in MAC Table.
The destination MAC of a packet in input to the Switch is subjected to search operation. If it is found in
MAC Table belonging as source MAC of another user, the port, which it is associated to, is used as destination of the considered traffic.
If the destination MAC Address is not present in the MAC Table, the Switch transmits the frame on all its
own interfaces, excluding only that where the frame itself has been received.
A MAC address, once stored in the table, is automatically deleted from the table itself if it is not used within
a given time period (Aging Time).

184

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

The address learning in MAC Table is usually automatic.
ALCplus2e equipment allow enabling/disabling the learning of Source MAC Addresses according to different
criteria select able by the user:
1. Automatic learning on a single MAC Table.
2. Automatic learning on different MAC Tables indicized by:
a. Native VID of a VLAN 802.1Q if the input port is in Fallback or Secure and the considered VLAN
is registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
b. Port Default Vid, if the incoming traffic is Untagged or, if tagged, the option 802.1Q is disabled
on the considered port or if the native VID of the incoming traffic is NOT registered in VTU. In
practice, in this condition the partition of MAC Table is made on port basis.
3. Learning disabled; in this condition MAC Table is not used.
The learning on VID basis is common to all the ports and the option is select able at global level.
The learning on port basis can be selected independently for every different LAN.
The automatic learning on a single MAC Table and the possible disabling of Learning can be selected on the
single port (LAN/Radio port).
If options a. and b. are selected at the same time, option a. has priority.
Via application, it is possible:

To display the content of the MAC Table on the equipment.

To delete the content of the MAC Table on the equipment.

To define the validity period of the addresses stored in the MAC Table of the equipment (parameter MAC Addr. Aging Time).

To define if the learning of the Source Addresses must be made on a common MAC Table or on
specific partitions for every single VID registered in VTU (parameter MAC Learning Vid basis).

To enable/disable the automatic learning of MAC Address within the MAC Table for every single
port of the Ethernet Switch and, if enabled, to define if this learning must be made on a single
MAC Table common to the whole Switch or on a partition specific for the port (parameter MAC
Learning).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

185

LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4 commands manage the LANs of the Ethernet Switch.
On the choice of one of the commands, the LAN <selected Lan number> contextual area opens, where it
is possible to manage the specific LAN.
Operations

STATUS

AND COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS

Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN
Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is
inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN
Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN
Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line
synchronism for the LAN
Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN
PORT INGRESS RATE LIMITER (PIRL)
Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN
Create a PIRL instance for the LAN
Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN
Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN
VIRTUAL LAN

PARAMETERS

Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the LAN
Verify/modify the behaviour of the LAN towards the packets in output
Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN
PRIORITY

PARAMETERS

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN
to the output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LAN
which, in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN
LLF

PARAMETERS

Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
LOOP
Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN
SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL

PARAMETERS

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP)
ETHERNET LINE PROTECTION (ELP)

PARAMETERS

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection

186

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP)
TRUNKING

MODE PARAMETERS

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN
LASER

PARAMETERS

Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN)
Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN)
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)
Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)
Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN)
GUI

LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 contextual area
See also

PIRL function (info)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)
Trunking mode (info)
Bidirectional LLF (info)

Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The Rate Control parameter indicates the enabling status of the port:).

Disable. The LAN is not enabled to the use.

Full Rate. The LAN is enabled to the use of the maximum bit rate relevant to the port.

Kb/Mb. The LAN is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of the LAN is enabled
(see Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The Cable Crossover parameter indicates the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:

MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).

MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).

Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option
3. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

187

Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation
is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The Speed/Duplex parameter indicates the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN.
For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are available:

Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and
the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Auto FD up to 10M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of 10Mbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.

Auto FD up to 100M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of 100Mbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.

Auto FD up to 1G. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of 1Gbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.

For LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:

Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 1GMbit/s.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the flow control must be DISABLED.

If it was enabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to disable the parameter. If already disabled, the setting cannot be changed.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure Half Dplx parameter indicates the activation status of the flow
control of the LAN:

Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.

Enable. The flow control is forced active.

Auto. The flow control is auto-negotiated and, if the remote equipment can manage the flow
control, it is automatically activated on the local equipment.

In Full-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the 802.3x normative. In Half-Duplex
modality, the flow control is regulated according to the Back Pressure technique.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

188

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this func-

tion.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses must be
ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable
the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option). If already enabled, the setting cannot be changed.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The MAC Learning parameter indicates the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):

Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.

Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table
takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Table.

Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table indicized
by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Parameter meaningful only if the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the MAC Table is
enabled (Mac Learning).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The Forwarding Rule parameter indicates the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN:

Dest. Addr. Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic on VLAN basis (Port Based VLAN) and with
destination MAC address present in MAC Table.

Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic only on VLAN basis without checking the presence of destination MAC in MAC Table.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The parameter Egress Shaping indicates the maximum Throughput of data in output from LAN port:

Disable. No maximum throughput is set for LAN port.

Full Rate. The value of maximum bit rate of the port is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.

...Kb/...Mb. The specific value is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.

The throughput is the real index of utilization of the link capacity, that is the amount of data transmitted
in the unit of time.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
Available values changes depending on the port transmission speed (see parameter Speed/Duplex).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

189

Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the auto negotiation is enabled (Speed/Duplex and/or Flow Control
box - Auto option).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Press Restart Autonegotiation and confirm.

Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(see Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the
operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The Master/Slave parameter indicates the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) of the LAN:

Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.

Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the
line synchronism for the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(see Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the
operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The M/S Autoneg. parameter indicates the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles
of the line synchronism of the LAN:

Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is automatic.

Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
forced. In this case, the role defined in the Master/Slave box is used.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The Interface Type parameter indicates the interface type of the LAN:

190

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Electrical. The LAN is configured with electrical interface.

Optical. The LAN is configured with optical interface.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
The tab displays the existing PIRL instance for the specific LAN.

Create a PIRL instance for the LAN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING For each LAN, it is possible to create a maximum of 3 PIRL instance.

In order to use a PIRL instance for the traffic limitation, after its creation, it must be enabled (see Enable/
disable a PIRL instance of the LAN).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
3. Press Add.
4. Set, in the Rate box, the band threshold over which the traffic is limited.
The type of traffic to limit will be set in the next steps.
5. In the Broadcast box, select the option:

Enable. The transit of the Broadcast packets in input from the port is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Broadcast packets is not limited.

6. In the Unknow Multicast box, select the option:

Enable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets (Multicast packets with destination MAC
addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets is not limited.

7. In the Unknow Unicast box, select the option:

Enable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets (Unicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets is not limited.

8. In the Unicast box, select the option:

Enable. The transit of the Unicast packets in input from the port is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Unicast packets is not limited.

9. In the ARP box, select the option:

Enable. The transit of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) packets in input from the port is
limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the ARP packets is not limited.

10.Press Apply and confirm.
The Rate Limiter tab displays the row relevant to the new PIRL instance.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

191

Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
3. To enable the use of an instance, select the specific Status box and then the Active option: the Switch
will use the instance as rule for the traffic limitation.
To disable the use of an instance, select the specific Status box and then the Not Active option: the
Switch will not use the instance as rule for the traffic limitation.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
3. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter of PIRL instance you wish to change.
All the parameters of an instance can be modified.
The parameter setting modes are the same pointed out in par. Create a PIRL instance for the LAN.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed and not communicated yet to the equipment.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.
The changes are confirmed in Rate Limiter tab.

Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
3. Select the PIRL instance you wish to delete.
The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
4. Press Remove and confirm.
The PIRL instance is removed from the list.

Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Default Vid parameter indicates the Default Vid value of the port.
The Default Vid of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject
without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value between 2 and 4094.

192

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

It is not possible to set, as ID, a value already used as Default Vid by another port or already used by
a reserved VLAN (see Virtual Lan Config. tab).
4. Press Apply and confirm.
If the message Default Vid already assigned to VLan in list. Continue anyway? is displayed, this means
that the entered value is used even as ID of a traffic VLAN. To continue the operation, press Yes and
confirm.

Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Ingress Filtering Check parameter indicates, if active, the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages
in input from the port:

Disable 802-1Q. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will
be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.

Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports belonging
to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports included in VLAN on port basis.

Secure. VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input pot must be member of
this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in
VLAN on port basis.

For each configuration (selection of the Disable 802-1Q, Fallback or Secure option) the table of Port
Based VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base
(see Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag 802.1Q
(Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the behaviour of the LAN towards the packets in output
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Frame Egress Mode parameter indicates the behaviour of the LAN towards the packets in output:

Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed to the packets in output from the port.

Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information
and VLAN identifier).

Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the
identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.

Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged by a Service Tag whose
identifier (EtherType) can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
The possible Service Tag is always removed, if present, to the packets incoming in this port.
Tag added in output is composed as follows:

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

193

If the source port of the packet was in Double Tag too, the original content is kept if the
packet had already a Service Tag (both as Service VID and as priority, unless 802.1p is
disabled on the input port, in which case the port default value is used as priority).

If the source port is NOT in Double Tag, added Service Tag is composed by the VLAN
identifier set in the box Default Vid of the input port and by the default priority of the port
itself if the priority 802.1p is disabled on it. If instead the option 802.1p is enabled on
the input port, the priority contained in Customer VID of the incoming packet (if present)
is kept.

When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag) on the packets
in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the packets in input to the
same port.
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
In a nodal system with the Trunking Radio modality enabled, when the option Add Double Tag (QinQ)
is active, for the traffic ports of the Switch (LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A) you must set the value Disable 8021Q for the parameter Ingress Filtering Check (the routing of the traffic is not managed according to the
VLAN Table).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Force Default Vid parameter indicates if the forcing of native CTag of the traffic in input to the LAN
with the corresponding default VID is active:

Disable. Forcing is not active.

Enable. Forcing is active.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Port Based VLAN parameter indicates the enabling status of the ports through which can transit
the messages in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to:

Disable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are not enabled
to transit from the specific LAN or Radio port.

Enable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are enabled to
transit from the specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
Enabling a port involves the automatic enabling of the corresponding port. For example, if you enable
the LAN 4 in the LAN 3 contextual area, the LAN 3 is automatically enabled in the LAN 4 contextual area.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

194

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
LAN to the output queue
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the level-3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/

DSCP) is not managed when the transit of the packets takes place through the nodal interconnection (see
Fig.5).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input
to the LAN, to the output:

Disable. The priority management is disabled.

802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output queue.

IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3) for the choice of the output
queue.

802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of
TOS for the choice of the output queue.

IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p priority
for the choice of the output queue.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the
LAN which, in output, the Tag is added to
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Default Priority parameter indicates the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input
from the LAN which, in output, the Tag is added to (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The tab, if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active, displays a table pointing out the mapping of
priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value).
3. To change a value, select in the table the option corresponding to the wished combination: values of
Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch (802-1p INPUT Priority) - value of Tag 802.1p in output from the
Switch (802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping).
4. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

195

Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING For the correct configuration of the bidirectional LLF functionality for a radio link se Bidirectional

LLF (info).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the LLF tab.
The LLF parameter indicates the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality:

Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.

Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms (IDU
BRANCH Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO Link Id. Alarm) or if the Radio port is disabled.

Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:

Bidirectional, indicates that the block of the local LAN port due to LLF is communicated even to
the remote equipment (activation of bidirectional LLF functionality).

Rem. LAN-1, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 1 port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-2, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 2 port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-3, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 3 port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-4, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 4 port associated to it.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option(s).
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Line Loop tab.
The Line Loop parameter displays the status of the loop on line side of the LAN:

Enable. Loop on line side active.

Disable. Loop on line side inactive.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the loop a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the
current setting of timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.

196

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.

Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING The Spanning Tree protocol cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality or Ring Protection
mode is enabled.

Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The STP/ELP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled

Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).

Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).

Enable-Prot1, Enable-Prot2. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. The Ethernet Line Protection of
the equipment is enabled.

Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3, Enable-node-Prot4. Spanning Tree
protocol disabled. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The Priority parameter indicates the priority of the LAN (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The Value parameter indicates the cost of the network part directly connected to the LAN.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

197

This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connections, the preference
of a port with respect to the others.
This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in
the Standard IEEE 802.1w.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.

Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING The Ethernet Line Protection cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality or Ring Protection
mode is enabled.

Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The STP/ELP parameter indicates the enabling status of Ethernet Line Protection for the port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disable. Ethernet Line Protection disabled.

Enable-Bridge1 - Enable-Bridge2. Ethernet Line Protection disabled. Spanning Tree protocol enabled.

Enable-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment) is enabled between the considered LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot1.

Enable-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot2.

Enable-node-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node) is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot1.

Enable-node-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot2.

Enable-node-Prot3. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot3.

Enable-node-Prot4. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot4.

The values Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3 and Enable-node-Prot4 are
available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

198

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.

Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line
Protection or Ring Protection mode is enabled.

If you wish to enable the Trunking modality, it is first necessary to disable the LAN.
Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The Trunk/LACP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Trunking mode for the selected port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disable. Trunking mode disabled.

Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.

Enable-Trunk2. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk2.

Enable-Trunk3. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk3.

Enable-Trunk4. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk4.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN)
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The tab displays the current status and the configuration parameters of the laser.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

199

Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
In the Transmitter Control area the enabling status of the laser is pointed out:

On. The laser is enabled for transmission.

Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message warns that you are executing
a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the
laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.

Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The Mode parameter indicates the transmission mode of the laser:

Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal.

Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. (default 120 sec.). Select the Apply and confirm.

Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.

Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message warns
that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the transmission mode of the laser is Auto.

200

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
3. Select the Manual option.
4. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout
5. Confirm the operation.
The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
6. Press Restart and confirm.
The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.

Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser
(value comprised between 1 and 100 sec. - default 90 sec.).
4. Select the Test option.
5. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
6. Confirm the operation.
The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
7. Press Restart and confirm.
The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

201

LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 contextual area
The contextual area displays the configuration of the specific LAN of the Ethernet Switch.
Tabs

Interface tab. General configuration of the LAN.
Rate Limiter tab. Existing PIRL instances for the LAN.
VLan(802.1Q) tab. Configuration of the LAN relevant to VLAN management.
Priority Management tab. Configuration of the LAN relevant to priority management.
LLF tab. Enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Line Loop tab. Status of the loop on line side of the LAN.
STP/ELP Trunking tab. Status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet
Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.
Laser Control tab. Configuration of the LAN with optical interface.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Interface tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN.
Parameters

Master/Slave. Operating modality of the line synchronism:

Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.

Slave. The line synchronism is generated starting from the clock retrieved from the
line (Loop Time).

Parameter available only for the ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is
active (box Speed/Duplex - value Auto).
M/S Autoneg. Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism:

Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is automatic.

Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is forced. In this case, the role defined in the Master/Slave box is used.

Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(box Speed/Duplex – value Auto).
Rate Control. Enabling status of the port:

Disable. The LAN is not enabled to the use.

Full Rate. The LAN is enabled to the use of the max bit rate relevant to the port.

Kb/Mb. The LAN is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.

Forwarding Rule. Rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN:

Dest. Addr. Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic on VLAN basis (Port Based VLAN)
and with destination MAC address present in MAC Table.

Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic only on VLAN basis without checking the presence of destination MAC in MAC Table.

Parameter meaningful only if the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the MAC Table is
enabled (Mac Learning).

202

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Flow Control Full Dplx / Back Pressure Half Dplx. Activation status of the flow control of
the port:

Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.

Enable. The flow control is forced active.

Auto. The flow control is auto-negotiated and, if the remote equipment can manage
the flow control, it is automatically activated on the local equipment.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the flow control must be DISABLED. If it was
enabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to disable the parameter. If already disabled, the setting cannot be changed.
Interface Type. Type of the interface:

Electrical. The LAN is configured with electrical interface.

Optical. The LAN is configured with optical interface.
Parameter available only for the LAN 3 and LAN 4.

Cable Crossover. Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:

MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card
modality).

MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).

Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.

Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of LAN is enabled
(box Rate Control – value Full Rate or Kb/Mb).
Mac Learning. Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):

Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.

Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses
in the table takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a
single MAC Table.

Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of
the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment
of MAC Table indicized by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic
is income from.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses
must be ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option). If already enabled, the setting cannot be changed.
Speed/Duplex. Activation status of the autonegotiation and, if the autonegotiation is deactivated, operating modalities and transmission speed of the port.
For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are
available:

Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is
Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is
Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is
Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is
Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Auto FD up to 10M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are negotiated with a maximum of 10Mbit/s and with modality
Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.

Auto FD up to 100M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are negotiated with a maximum of 100Mbit/s and with modality
Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.

Auto FD up to 1G. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are negotiated with a maximum of 1Gbit/s and with modality
Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.

For LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:

Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is
Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

203

Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is FullDuplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 1GMbit/s.

Egress Shaping. Maximum Throughput of data in output from LAN port:

Disable. No maximum throughput is set for LAN port.

Full Rate. The value of maximum bit rate of the port is set as maximum throughput
for LAN port.

Kb/Mb. The specific value is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.

The throughput is the real index of utilization of the link capacity, that is the amount of data
transmitted in the unit of time.
Available values changes depending on the port transmission speed (see parameter Speed/Duplex).
Speed. Data transmission speed.
Duplex. Transmission modality.
Port Role. Current status of the line synchronism.
Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(box Speed/Duplex – value Auto).
Alarms. Status of the alarms relevant to the port. The colour of each box displays the status of
the alarm:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Push-button

Restart Autonegotiation. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN.
See also

Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN
Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive,
the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN
Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN
Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism for the LAN
Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN

Rate Limiter tab
The tab displays the existing PIRL instances for the LAN.
Every row corresponds to an instance.
Parameters

Status. PIRL instance status:

Not Active. The instance is not used by the Switch as rule for the traffic limitation.

Active. The instance is used by the Switch as rule for the traffic limitation.

Status of the instance at creation or when it is disabled by the user.
Status of the instance after the enabling by the user.

204

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Rate. Band threshold over which the traffic is limited.
The type of traffic to limit is listed in the following columns (types of packets with value Enable
active).
Broadcast. Limitation of the Broadcast packets in input from the port:

Enable. The transit of the Broadcast packets is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Broadcast packets is not limited.

Unknown Multicast. Limitation of the Multicast Unknown packets (Multicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port:

Enable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets is not limited.

Unknown Unicast. Limitation of the Unicast Unknown packets (Unicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port:

Enable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets is not limited.

Unicast. Limitation of the Unicast packets in input from the port:

Enable. The transit of the Unicast packets is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Unicast packets is not limited.

ARP. Limitation of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) packets in input from the port:

Enable. The transit of the ARP packets is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the ARP packets is not limited.

Push-button

Add. Create a PIRL instance for the LAN.
Remove. Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to the PIRL instances.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to the PIRL instances and not confirmed yet.
See also

Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN
PIRL function (info)

VLan(802.1Q) tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to VLAN management.
Parameters

Ingress Filtering Check. Control status of Tag Vlan ID on the messages in input from the port:

Disable 802-1Q. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input.
They will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.

Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit
(VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports
belonging to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the
ports included in VLAN on port basis.

Secure. VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input pot must be
member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in VLAN on port basis.

Force Default Vid. Forces the over-writing of the native CTag of the traffic in input to the LAN
with the corresponding default VID:

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

205

Disable. Forcing is not active.

Enable. Forcing is active.

Frame Egress Mode. Behaviour of the port towards the packets in output:

Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed
to the packets in output from the port.

Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority
information and VLAN identifier).

Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from
the port: the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.

Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged by a Service
Tag whose identifier (EtherType) can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
The possible Service Tag is always removed, if present, to the packets incoming in
this port.
Tag added in output is composed as follows:

If the source port of the packet was in Double Tag too, the original content is
kept if the packet had already a Service Tag (both as Service VID and as priority, unless 802.1p is disabled on the input port, in which case the port default value is used as priority).

If the source port is NOT in Double Tag, added Service Tag is composed by the
VLAN identifier set in the box Default Vid of the input port and by the default
priority of the port itself if the priority 802.1p is disabled on it. If instead the
option 802.1p is enabled on the input port, the priority contained in Customer
VID of the incoming packet (if present) is kept.

Default Vid. Default Vid value of the port.
The Default Vid of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port
in subject without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
Port Based VLAN. Ports through which can transit the messages in input from the LAN which
the contextual area refers to:

Disable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are
not enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port.

Enable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are
enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).

See also

Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the LAN
Verify/modify the behaviour of the LAN towards the packets in output
Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN

Priority Management tab
The tab displays configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to the priority management.
Parameters

Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the port, to the
output:

206

Disable. The priority is disabled.

802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the
output queue.

IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3).

802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the
value of TOS for the choice of the output queue.

IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p
priority for the choice of the output queue.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Default Priority. Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the port which,
in output, the Tag is added to:

0. Lowest priority

7. Highest priority.

Table. Mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input
to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value):

802-1p INPUT Priority. Each row correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in output from the Switch: 7 ÷ 0.

802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping. Each column correspond to Tag 802.1p value of
the packet in output from the Switch.

The active option indicates the combination: Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch - Tag 802.1p in
output from the Switch.
Table available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active (see parameter Priority Selection).
See also

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the
output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LAN which,
in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN

LLF tab
The tab displays the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Parameters

LLF. Enabling status of the LLF modality:

Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.

Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms
(IDU BRANCH Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO Link Id. Alarm) or if the Radio port
is disabled.

Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:

Bidirectional, indicates that the block of the local LAN port due to LLF is communicated
even to the remote equipment (activation of bidirectional LLF functionality).

Rem. LAN-1, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 1 port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-2, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 2 port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-3, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 3 port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-4, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 4 port associated to it.

See also

Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
Bidirectional LLF (info)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

207

Line Loop tab
The tab displays the status of the loop on line side of the LAN.
Parameters

Line Loop. Status of the loop on line side of the LAN:

Enable. Loop on line side active.

Disable. Loop on line side inactive.

See also

Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN

STP/ELP Trunking tab
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.
Parameters

STP/ELP. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol or of the of the Ethernet Line Protection
for the port:

Disable. Spanning Tree protocol and Ethernet Line Protection disabled.

Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).

Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).

Enable-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot1.

Enable-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot2.

Enable-node-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot1.

Enable-node-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot2.

Enable-node-Prot3. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot3.

Enable-node-Prot4. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot4.

The values Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3 and Enable-node-Prot4
are available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
If the Trunking modality or Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically
forced for the parameter.
Role (STP/ELP area). This parameter has a different meaning depending on the enabled protocol/modality:
STP ENABLED. Role assigned by the STP to each port of a Bridge/Switch. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:

208

Disable. Port disabled.

root-port. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as
root. Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.

alternate-port. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

ELP

designated-port. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used
to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.

backup-port. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.

ENABLED.

Role assigned by the ELP to each port. The role defines the behaviour of the port:

Disable. Port disabled.

alternate-port. Port in stand-by status, as it offers an alternative path with higher cost
as opposed to the Designated port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.

designated-port. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status.

Status (area STP/ELP). Current status of the port:
Port status

Receive
traffic

Forward
traffic

No

No

port-blocking

No

port-learning

Yes

port-forwarding

Yes

Yes

Update the
Address Table Unit

Receive/process BPDU

Re-transmit
BPDU

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

STP
port-disable

ELP

ENABLED

ENABLED

port-blocking

No

No

No

-

-

port-forwarding

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

Version (STP/ELP area). Version of the Spanning Tree protocol or protection group of the port:

rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol
characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

ELP-1. Protection 1 group (ELP equipment).

ELP-2. Protection 2 group (ELP equipment).

Parameter not meaningful when Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-node-Prot... value).
Priority. Port priority:

0. Highest priority

15. Lowest priority

Parameter not meaningful when Trunking modality is enabled.
Value (Path Cost area). Cost of the network part directly connected to the port.
Parameter not meaningful when Trunking modality is enabled.
Recommended Max / Recommended Min (Path Cost area). Cost interval recommended according to what pointed out in Standard IEEE 802.1w.
Parameter not meaningful when Trunking modality is enabled.
Trunk/LACP. Enabling status of the Trunking mode for the port:

Disable. Trunking mode disabled.

Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the
equipment LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.

Enable-Trunk2. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the
equipment LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk2.

Enable-Trunk3. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the
equipment LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk3.

Enable-Trunk4. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the
equipment LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk4.

It is possible to aggregate up to 4 LANs for each group (Trunk).
If the STP, the Ethernet Line Protection or the Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable
is automatically forced for the parameter.
Status (Trunk/LACP area). Status of the port as regards the LACP (Link Aggregation Control
Protocol):

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

209

Up. Protocol active.

Down. Protocol inactive.

Partner Id (Trunk/LACP area). MAC Address of the remote equipment located at the other end
of the Ethernet connection (remote Switch).
Tx Pck Cnt (Trunk/LACP area). LACP packets transmitted to the remote Switch.
Rx Pck Cnt (Trunk/LACP area). LACP packets received from the remote Switch.
Push-button

Refresh (area STP/ELP). Update the values present in the specific area.
Refresh (area Trunk/LACP). Update the values present in the specific area.
See also

Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN
Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)
Trunking mode (info)

Laser Control tab
WARNING Tab available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

The tab displays the configuration of the LAN with optical interface.
Parameters

Transmitter Control. Enabling status of the laser:

On. The laser is enabled for transmission.

Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.

<Box>. Current status of the laser:

Status On / green box. The laser is on transmission.

Status Off / gray box. The laser is not on transmission.

Module Type. Laser module type:

optical-100baseFX. Laser module of type 100 Base FX (Fiber).

optical-1000baseSX. Laser module of type 1000 Base SX (Short WaveLength).

optical-1000baseLX. Laser module of type 1000 Base LX (Long WaveLength).

optical-cwdm. Laser module of type CWDM (Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing).

optical-cwdm-ge. Laser module of type CWDM Gbit/s Ethernet (Coarse Wavelength
Division Multiplexing).

Unknown. The laser module is not among those listed above (possible anomaly of the
laser module).

For more information relevant to laser module refer to IEEE standard 802.3.
Wave Length. Wave length (in nanometres) of the SFP optical module (Small Form-factor Pluggable).
Link Length. Maximum distance (in meters) of the optical fiber supported by the SFP optical
module.
Mode. Transmission mode of the laser. If active, the option:

210

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the
real presence of the optical signal.

Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal:
when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the
laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds
every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote
transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit,
while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.

Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.

Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of test laser operation status).

Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller
before trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the
laser during the testing operation.
Push-button

Restart. Restart the laser.
See also

Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN)
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)
Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)
Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

211

PIRL function (info)
The PIRL (Port Ingress Rate Limiter) function available in the ALCplus2e equipment is a mechanism used
to control and filter the traffic in input from every single LAN of the Ethernet Switch.
This mechanism is composed by a list of rules (PIRL instances) which determine:

The threshold over which the traffic is limited (traffic bit rate available with respect to the total
band).

Type of traffic to limit, choosing between:

Broadcast traffic.

Multicast Unknown traffic (Multicast packets with destination MAC address not present in
the MAC Table).

Unicast Unknown traffic (Unicast packets with destination MAC address not present in the
MAC Table).

Unicast traffic.

ARP traffic.

One or more traffic types can be associated to the threshold creating the wished criterion.
A maximum of 2 PIRL instances can be created for every single LAN.
Every instance must be created by the user.
After the creation, a PIRL instance must be enabled by the user in order to be used as rule for the traffic
limitation.
In any moment, the instance can be disabled, changed in its setting or deleted.
See also

Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN
Create a PIRL instance for the LAN
Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN
Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN

212

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Spanning Tree is a protocol for the management of the connections, which supports the redundancy of the
path avoiding the creation of unwished loops in the network. In order that an Ethernet network operates
correctly, only an active path must exist between two stations. Multiple active paths cause loops in the
network and, as consequence, the possible replication of the messages to infinity.
The Spanning Tree protocol constitutes a tree logic network which pass through all the bridges into a complex physical network forcing the possible duplicated paths (possible loops) into a stand-by status
(Blocked).
If a network segment becomes unreachable or if the cost of a path changes, the algorithm of Spanning
Tree reconfigures the topology of the network activating an alternative path.
For more information, refer to the standard IEEE:

802.1d (Spanning Tree Protocol).

802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).

WARNING The use of the Spanning Tree protocol must be enabled at level of single port.

The use of the Spanning Tree protocol for the LANs is alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection,
Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the Spanning Tree protocol can be enabled/
disabled for the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A and Port B).
The management of the Ethernet nodal interconnection ports (LAN 1 and LAN 2) is responsibility of the
system which ensures that no data loop is created.
Even in this case, the use of the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A and Port B is alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection (only LANs), Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

213

Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)
The Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) is a function which allows implementing a protection at physical level
(Level 2) between two or more LANs.
When the user enables the Ethernet Line Protection, even the management of the ELP switch is enabled.
The switch operates in automatic mode: the equipment executes the switch when the LOS alarm is present
on the LAN in service. When the alarm clears, the controller does not execute the switch again.
The Ethernet Line Protection is implemented by means of proprietary protocol. As consequence, the ELP
switch is managed without considering alarms or settings executed on the equipment on the other side of
the LAN connection.
In ALCplus2e equipment, the Ethernet Line Protection can be enabled at equipment level (ELP equipment)
or at node level (ELP node).
This last chance is available only for the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment)
Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)

Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment)
The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment allows setting in mutual protection more LANs of the same
equipment.
The functionality manages up to two different protection groups: Protection 1 and Protection 2.
In this way, it is possible to setting in mutual protection two, three or four LANs or setting in protection
the LANs in pairs of two.
The same protection group (Protection1) will be enable for the two, three or four LANs. In the second case,
a protection group (Protection1) will be enable for two LANs and the other protection group (Protection2)
for the remnant two.
The parameters, which determine which LAN among those in protection must be set as operating, are the
port parameters foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol:
1. Cost. A connection cost can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP equipment function is enabled for two or more LANs, the port currently active for the
transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest cost.
Example. For the LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP equipment function is enabled. The LAN 1 is enabled,
has a valid signal and cost 200.000, the LAN 2 is enabled, has a valid signal and cost 250.000, the LAN
3 is enabled, has a valid signal and cost 300.000. The LAN 1 is used for the transport.
2. Priority. A priority value between 1 and 9 can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP equipment function is enabled for two or more LANs and the ports have the same cost,
the port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest priority
value.
Example. For the LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP equipment function is enabled. The ports are all
enabled, have a valid signal and cost 200.000. The LAN 1 has priority 1, the LAN 2 has priority 2, the
LAN 3 has priority 3. The LAN 1 is used for the transport.
WARNING Only if the ELP function is enabled for one port when more ports are operating (status Desig-

nated), cost and priority being equal, the port with the lower physical position is keep active.
The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have
been used to represent in WEB CT page the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch:

214

LAN

Role

Port status

Operating

Designated

Forwarding

Reserve

Alternate

Blocking

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following operations:

To enable/disable the use of the LANs (Rate Control parameter)

To enable/disable the ELP equipment functionality on the LANs you wish to protect (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-Prot1 or Enable-Prot2 value).

To set the port priority (Priority - parameter)

To set the port cost (Path Cost - parameter)

WARNING The use of the equipment ELP functionality for each LAN is alternative to the use of Spanning
Tree, Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the equipment ELP functionality can be enabled/disabled only for the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3 and LAN 4).
In this case, the use of the equipment ELP functionality (besides the use of the Spanning Tree protocol,
Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality) is alternative to the use of the node ELP functionality.

Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)
Only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, it is possible to enable the Ethernet Line Protection
at node level (node ELP).
This functionality, in fact, allows setting in mutual protection the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3 and LAN 4)
of the equipment belonging to the node and interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus.
Up to 4 different protection groups can be created: Node Protection1, Node Protection2, Node Protection3
and Node Protection4.
For example, with reference to Fig.6, if you wish to set in mutual protection the LAN 3 of A.1, A.2 and A.3,
you must enable the node ELP functionality (Node Protection1) for all the three ports.
At the same time, if you wish to set in mutual protection the LAN 4 of A.1, A.2 and A.3, you must enable
the node ELP functionality for all the above mentioned ports but not using the protection group Node
Protection1, which would insert the LAN 4 ports in the same protection group of the LAN 3 ports, but using
instead the group Node Protection2. In this way, a second node protection group is created, independent
from the first one.
The parameters, which determine which LAN among those in protection must be set as operating, are the
port parameters foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol:
1. Cost. A connection cost can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP node function is enabled for two or more LANs, the port currently active for the transport
will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest cost.
Example. With reference to Fig.6. For the LAN 3 port of the equipment A.1 and for the LAN 4 port of
the equipment A.2, the node ELP function is enabled. The LAN 3 port of A.1 is enabled to the use, has
valid signal and has cost 200.000, the LAN 4 port of A.2 is enabled to the use, has valid signal and cost
250.000. For the transport, the LAN 3 of A.1 is used.
2. Priority. A priority value between 1 and 9 can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP node function is enabled for two or more LANs and the ports have the same cost, the
port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest priority value.
Example. With reference to Fig.6. For the LAN 3 port of A.1 and the LAN 4 port of A.2 the node ELP
function is enabled. The ports are all enabled to use, have valid signal and cost 200.000. The LAN 3
port of A.1 has priority 1, the LAN 4 port of A.2 has priority 2. For the transport, the LAN 3 port of A.1
is used.
WARNING Only if the ELP function is enabled for one port when more ports have the node ELP function

enabled and are operating (status Designated), cost and priority being equal, the port with the lower physical position is keep active.
The physical position of the traffic LANs of a node is the following:

LAN 3 of the first element of the node (lowest logic position)

LAN 4 of the first element of the node

LAN 3 of the second element of the node

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

215

LAN 4 of the second element of the node
 and so on.

The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have
been used to represent in WEB CT page the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch:
LAN

Role

Port status

Operating

Designated

Forwarding

Reserve

Alternate

Blocking

The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following operations:

To enable/disable the use of the LANs (Rate Control parameter)

To enable/disable the ELP node functionality on the LANs you wish to protect (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-Node-Prot1, Enable-Node-Prot2, Enable-Node-Prot3 or Enable-Node-Prot4 value).

To set the port priority (Priority - parameter)

To set the port cost (Path Cost - parameter)

WARNING The use of the node ELP function for the LAN 3 and LAN 4 ports is alternative to the use of the
equipment ELP functionality, Spanning Tree protocol, Trunking mode or Ring Protection modality.

Fig.6 ELP of node (example)

Node A
Lan 3
Lan 4

Lan 3
Ethernet
traffic

Lan 4

Lan 3
Lan 4

Lan 3
Lan 4

(1)

216

(1)

A.1

(1)

A.2

Lan 1 and Lan 2
(Ethernet nodal
interconnection)
(1)

A.3

(1)

A.4

A.1, A.2, A.3 and A.4. Respectively first, second, third and fourth equipment of the node interconnected to the Ethernet nodal Bus.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Trunking mode (info)
The Trunking mode is a functionality which allows aggregating two or more Ethernet ports.
In this way, the ports belonging to the same group (Trunk) will be considered as a single entity.
The subdivision of the traffic is made on MAC Address (Source and Destination) basis.
In ALCplus2e equipment, it is possible to enable the Trunking mode for the LANs (Trunking Ethernet) and
for the Radio port (Trunking radio).
This possibility is available only for the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

Ethernet Trunking mode (LANs)
The Ethernet Trunking mode allows aggregating two or more physical ports (LAN) of the same equipment
to achieve a single logic channel.
The functionality manages up to 4 different aggregation groups (Trunk/LACP): Enable-Trunk1, EnableTrunk2, Enable-Trunk3 and Enable-Trunk4.
In this way, it is possible to aggregate two, three or four LANs or to aggregate the LANs at pair of two.
In the first case, the same aggregation group (Enable-Trunk1) will enable for the two, three or four LANs
of the Switch. In the second case, an aggregation group (Enable-Trunk1) will enable for the two LANs and
the other aggregation group (Enable-Trunk2) for the remnant two.
Up to 4 LANs for each Trunk can be aggregated.
The enabling of the Ethernet Trunking mode is in compliance with the standard LAG (Link Aggregation
Group) and the relevant LACP protocol (Link Aggregation Control Protocol).
It is suggested, when this modality is active, to configure the ports in transmission modality Full Duplex
and to the same data transmission rate.
For more information, refer to the standard IEEE 802.3ad (Link Aggregation).
WARNING The use of the Trunking Ethernet mode must be enabled at level of single LAN and is in alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection, Spanning Tree protocol or Ring Protection modality.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the Trunking mode can be enabled/disabled
only for the LAN 3, LAN 4 (Ethernet traffic ports).
Even in this case, the use of the Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection,
Spanning Tree protocol or Ring Protection modality.
If the Trunking modality is active for an LAN and you wish to disable it, before executing the operation it
is necessary to disable the port itself.

Radio Trunking mode (Radio port - Port A)
WARNING Mode available only for equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The modality is furthermore available when the equipment is in 1+0, 1+1 Freq. Div, 1+1 Hot Standby or
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with active East-West modality. In this last configuration, the
radio Trunking modality is not available for the Radio port B (Port B).
The radio Trunking mode allows aggregating more radio of a nodal system.
The functionality manages an aggregation group (Trunk): Enable-Trunk1.
To insert a radio port of a Switch in the Trunk, it is necessary to enable the radio Trunking mode for this
port (Enable-Trunk1).
In this mode, up to 4 radio ports can be aggregated.
WARNING The use of the radio Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the Spanning Tree protocol or

Ring Protection modality.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

217

Bidirectional LLF (info)
The bidirectional LLF functionality allows interrupting the connection with the remote equipment (in both
directions) after a block of the LAN ports of the local equipment due to Link Loss Forwarding.
For the correct configuration of the bidirectional LLF functionality in a radio link, execute the operations
described in the following example.
Suppose to wish blocking the LAN-1 ports (on local and remote equipment) after the detection of LLF on
local LAN-1 port.
Operations to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB CT page:
a. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.)
b. Select LLF tab.
c. Select the Local option.
d. Active the Bidirectional option.
e. Press Apply and confirm.
Operations to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB CT page:
a. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.)
b. Select LLF tab.
c. Select the Local option.
d. Active the REM. LAN-1 option.
e. Press Apply and confirm.
In this configuration, a reception alarm on the local terminal causes the activation of LLF alarm and the
consequent switch-off of the associated LAN-1 port on both terminals.

218

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Port A, Port B
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment configuration as shown in Tab.11

The Port A and Port B commands manage the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.
On the choice of one of the commands, the <port name> contextual area opens, where it is possible to
manage the specific Radio port:
Operations

STATUS

AND COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS

Verify/modify the enabling status of the Radio port
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the Radio port
VIRTUAL LAN

PARAMETERS

Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the Radio port
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port
Verify/modify the behaviour of the Radio port towards the packets in output
Force the value of VID of the Radio port to the default value
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port
PRIORITY

PARAMETERS

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio
port to the output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the Radio
port which, in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port
SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL (STP)

PARAMETERS

Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the Radio port
Verify/modify the priority of the Radio port (STP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the Radio port (STP)
TRUNKING

MODE PARAMETERS

Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the Radio port
GUI

Port A, Port B contextual area
See also

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Trunking mode (info)
Tab.11 Availability Radio ports
Equipment configuration
Radio

Ethernet Enh

Ethernet Radio
ports

Unequipped

Absent

Port A

1+0

Absent

Port A

1+1 Hot Standby, 1+1 Freq. Div.

Absent

Port A

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe

Absent

Port A - Port B

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

219

Verify/modify the enabling status of the Radio port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
The Port parameter indicates the enabling status of the Radio port:

Disable. The Radio port is not enabled to the use.

Enable. The Radio port is enabled to the use.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the Radio
port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this func-

tion.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses must be
ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable
the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option). If already enabled, the setting cannot be changed.
1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
The MAC Learning parameter indicates the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):

Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.

Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table
takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Table.

Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table indicized
by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the Radio port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Default Vid parameter indicates the Default Vid value of the port.
The Default Vid of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject
without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value between 2 and 4094.
It is not possible to set, as ID, a value already used as Default Vid by another port or already used by
a reserved VLAN (see Virtual Lan Config. tab).
4. Press Apply and confirm.
If the message Default Vid already assigned to VLan in list. Continue anyway? is displayed, this means
that the entered value is used even as ID of a traffic VLAN. To continue the operation, press Yes and
confirm.

220

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Ingress Filtering Check parameter indicates, if active, the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages
in input from the port:

Disable 802-1Q. The Radio port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They
will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.

Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports belonging
to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports included in VLAN on port basis.

Secure. VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input pot must be member of
this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in
VLAN on port basis.

For each configuration (selection of the value Disable 802-1Q, Fallback and Secure) the table of Port
Based VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base
(see Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag 802.1Q
(Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the behaviour of the Radio port towards the packets in output
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Frame Egress Mode parameter indicates the behaviour of the Radio port towards the packets in
output:

Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed to the packets in output from the port.

Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information
and VLAN identifier).

Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the
identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.

Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged by a Service Tag whose
identifier (EtherType) can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
The possible Service Tag is always removed, if present, to the packets incoming in this port.
Tag added in output is composed as follows:

If the source port of the packet was in Double Tag too, the original content is kept if the
packet had already a Service Tag (both as Service VID and as priority, unless 802.1p is
disabled on the input port, in which case the port default value is used as priority).

If the source port is NOT in Double Tag, added Service Tag is composed by the VLAN
identifier set in the box Default Vid of the input port and by the default priority of the port
itself if the priority 802.1p is disabled on it. If instead the option 802.1p is enabled on
the input port, the priority contained in Customer VID of the incoming packet (if present)
is kept.

In a nodal system with the Trunking Radio modality enabled, when the option Add Double Tag (QinQ)
is active, for the traffic ports of the Switch (LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A) you must set the value Disable 802-

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

221

1Q for the parameter Ingress Filtering Check (the routing of the traffic is not managed according to the
VLAN Table).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Force the value of VID of the Radio port to the default value
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Force Default Vid parameter indicates if the forcing of the VID value of the Radio port to the default
value is active:

Disable. Forcing is not active.

Enable. Forcing is active.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
Parameter Port Based VLAN indicates the enabling status of the ports through which can transit the
messages in input from the Radio port which the contextual area refers to:

Disable. The packets, in input from the Radio port, are not enabled to transit from the specific
LAN or Radio port.

Enable. The packets, in input from the Radio port, are enabled to transit from the specific LAN
or Radio port (bidirectional connection).

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
Enabling a port involves the automatic enabling of the corresponding port. For example, if you enable
the LAN 4 in the LAN 3 contextual area, the LAN 3 is automatically enabled in the LAN 4 contextual area.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
Radio port to the output queue
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the level-3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/

DSCP) is not managed when the transit of the packets takes place through the nodal interconnection (see
Fig.5).
1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input
to the Radio port, to the output:

222

Disable. The priority management is disabled.

802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output queue.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3) for the choice of the output
queue.

802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of
TOS for the choice of the output queue.

IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p priority
for the choice of the output queue.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the
Radio port which, in output, the Tag is added to
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Default Priority parameter indicates the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input
from the Radio port which, in output, the Tag is added to (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active.

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The tab, if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active, displays a table pointing out the mapping of
priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value).
3. To change a value, select in the table the option corresponding to the wished combination: values of
Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch (802-1p INPUT Priority) - value of Tag 802.1p in output from the
Switch (802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping).
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the STP or STP/Trunking tab.
If the equipment is not a node element or is a TDM element, the STP tab is present. The tab indicates
the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the STP/Trunking tab is present. The tab indicates
the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol or to the Trunking modality.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

223

Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the Radio port
Access | Read & Write
WARNING The Spanning Tree protocol cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality or Ring Protection
mode is enabled.

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the STP or STP/Trunking tab.
The STP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port.

Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled

Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).

Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the priority of the Radio port (STP)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the STP or STP/Trunking tab.
The Priority parameter indicates the priority of the Radio port (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the connection cost of the Radio port (STP)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the STP or STP/Trunking tab.
The Value parameter indicates the cost of the network part directly connected to the Radio port.
This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connections, the preference
of a port with respect to the others.
This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in
the Standard IEEE 802.1w.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the STP/Trunking tab.
The tab indicates the status of the port in relation to the Trunking modality or to the Spanning Tree
protocol.

224

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the Radio port
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol or Ring Protection mode is enabled.
1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the STP/Trunking tab.
The Trunk/LACP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Trunking mode for the selected port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disable. Trunking mode disabled.

enable-trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

225

Port A, Port B contextual area
The contextual area displays the configuration of the specific Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.
Tabs

Interface tab. General configuration of the Radio ports.
VLan(802.1Q) tab. Configuration of the Radio port relevant to VLAN management.
Priority Management tab. Configuration of the Radio port relevant to priority management.
STP tab. Status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol. Tab available only if the
equipment is not a node element or is a TDM element.
STP/Trunking tab. Status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol r to the Trunking
modality. Tab available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Interface tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Radio ports.
Parameters

Port. Enabling status of the port:

Disable. The Radio port is not enabled to the use.

Enable. The Radio port is enabled.

Mac Learning. Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):

Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.

Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses
in the table takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a
single MAC Table.

Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of
the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment
of MAC Table indicized by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic
is income from.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses
must be ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option). If already enabled, the setting cannot be changed.
See also

Verify/modify the enabling status of the Radio port
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the Radio port

VLan(802.1Q) tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Radio port relevant to VLAN management
Parameters

Ingress Filtering Check. Control status of Tag Vlan ID on the messages in input from the port:

226

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Disable 802-1Q. The Radio port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in
input. They will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.

Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit
(VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports
belonging to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the
ports included in VLAN on port basis.

Secure. VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input pot must be
member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in VLAN on port basis.

Force Default Vid. Forcing of the VID value of the Radio port to the default value:

Disable. Forcing is not active.

Enable. Forcing is active.

Frame Egress Mode. Behaviour of the port towards the packets in output:

Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed
to the packets in output from the port.

Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority
information and VLAN identifier).

Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from
the port: the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.

Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged by a Service
Tag whose identifier (EtherType) can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
The possible Service Tag is always removed, if present, to the packets incoming in
this port.
Tag added in output is composed as follows:

If the source port of the packet was in Double Tag too, the original content is
kept if the packet had already a Service Tag (both as Service VID and as priority, unless 802.1p is disabled on the input port, in which case the port default value is used as priority).

If the source port is NOT in Double Tag, added Service Tag is composed by the
VLAN identifier set in the box Default Vid of the input port and by the default
priority of the port itself if the priority 802.1p is disabled on it. If instead the
option 802.1p is enabled on the input port, the priority contained in Customer
VID of the incoming packet (if present) is kept.

Default Vid. Default Vid value of the port.
The Default Vid of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port
in subject without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
Port Based VLAN. Ports through which can transit the messages in input from the Radio port
which the contextual area refers to:

Disable. The packets, in input from the Radio port which the contextual area refers
to, are not enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port.

Enable. The packets, in input from the Radio port, are enabled to transit through the
specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).

See also

Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the Radio port
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port
Verify/modify the behaviour of the Radio port towards the packets in output
Force the value of VID of the Radio port to the default value
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

227

Priority Management tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to priority management.
Parameters

Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the port, to the
output:

Disable. The priority is disabled.

802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the
output queue.

IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3).

802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the
value of TOS for the choice of the output queue.

IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p
priority for the choice of the output queue.

Default Priority. Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the port which,
in output, the Tag is added to:

0. Lowest priority

7. Highest priority.

Table. Mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input
to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value):

802-1p INPUT Priority. Each row correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in output from the Switch: 7 ÷ 0.

802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping. Each column correspond to Tag 802.1p value of
the packet in output from the Switch.

The active option indicates the combination: Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch - Tag 802.1p in
output from the Switch.
Table available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active (see parameter Priority Selection).
See also

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio port to
the output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the Radio port
which, in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port

STP tab
WARNING Tab available only if the equipment is not a node element or is a TDM element.

The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol.
Parameters

STP. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port:

Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled.

Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).

Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).

If the Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically forced for the parameter.
Role (STP area). Role assigned by the Spanning Tree protocol to each port of a Bridge/Switch.
The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:

228

Disable. Port disabled.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

root-port. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as
root. Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.

alternate-port. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.

designated-port. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used
to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.

backup-port. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.

Status (STP area). Current status of the port:
Port status
port-disable

Receive
traffic

Forward Update the Address
traffic
Table Unit

Receive/
process BPDU

Re-transmit BPDU

No

No

No

No

No

port-blocking

No

No

No

Yes

No

port-learning

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

port-forwarding

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Version (STP area). Version of Spanning Tree protocol:

rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol
characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

Priority. Port priority:

0. Highest priority

15. Lowest priority

Value (Path Cost area). Cost of the network part directly connected to the port.
Recommended Max / Recommended Min (Path Cost area). Cost interval recommended according to what pointed out in Standard IEEE 802.1w.
Push-button

Refresh (STP area). Update the value present in the specific area.
See also

Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the Radio port
Verify/modify the priority of the Radio port (STP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the Radio port (STP)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)

STP/Trunking tab
WARNING Tab available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol r to the Trunking modality.
Parameters

STP. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port:

Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled.

Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).

Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).

If the Trunking modality or Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically
forced for the parameter.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

229

Role (STP area). Role assigned by the Spanning Tree protocol to each port of a Bridge/Switch.
The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:

Disable. Port disabled.

root-port. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as
root. Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.

alternate-port. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.

designated-port. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used
to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.

backup-port. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.

Status (STP area). Current status of the port:
Port status
port-disable

Receive
traffic

Forward Update the Address
traffic
Table Unit

Receive/
process BPDU

Re-transmit BPDU

No

No

No

No

No

port-blocking

No

No

No

Yes

No

port-learning

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

port-forwarding

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Version (STP area). Version of Spanning Tree protocol:

rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol
characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

Priority. Port priority:

0. Highest priority

15. Lowest priority

Parameter not meaningful when Trunking modality is enabled.
Value (Path Cost area). Cost of the network part directly connected to the port.
Parameter not meaningful when Trunking modality is enabled.
Recommended Max / Recommended Min (Path Cost area). Cost interval recommended according to what pointed out in Standard IEEE 802.1w.
Parameter not meaningful when Trunking modality is enabled.
Trunk/LACP. Enabling status of the Trunking mode for the port:

Disable. Trunking mode disabled.

enable-trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.

If the STP or Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically forced for the
parameter.
Push-button

Refresh (STP area). Update the value present in the specific area.
See also

Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the Radio port
Verify/modify the priority of the Radio port (STP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the Radio port (STP)
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the Radio port
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Trunking mode (info)

230

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Spanning Tree
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING The change of the default values of the configuration (Hello Time, Forward Delay, Max Age) of
the Spanning Tree protocol could damage the correct operation of the Spanning Tree protocol itself.

The Spanning Tree command manages the spanning tree in the network.
Operations

Verify/modify the STP version
Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets (Hello Time)
Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets (Max Age)
Verify the status of the ports in relation to the STP or ELP
Verify the MAC Address of a Bridge
Verify/modify the priority of a Bridge
GUI

Spanning Tree contextual area
See also

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)

Verify/modify the STP version
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Spanning Tree.
The Force Version parameter indicates the version of the Spanning Tree protocol to use:

rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol characterized
by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Spanning Tree.
The Hello Time parameter indicates the time interval that passes between two consecutive transmissions of the BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet from the Ethernet ports with the Spanning Tree
function enabled.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option (default: 2 sec.).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

231

Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Spanning Tree.
The Forward Delay parameter indicates the time interval which passes between the passage between
the port-blocking status and the port-learning status and between the port-learning status and the
port-forwarding status of the port.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option (default: 15 sec.).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Spanning Tree.
The Max Age parameter indicates the maximum number of switches which the packet can pass through
before expiring. The passage from a Switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second per equipment.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option (default: 20 sec.).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status of the ports in relation to the STP or ELP
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Spanning Tree.
2. Select the Summary tab.
The tab for every Ethernet port displays the parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol or to
the Ethernet Line Protection (only LANs).

Verify the MAC Address of a Bridge
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Spanning Tree.
2. Select the Bridges tab.
The MAC Address parameter indicates the physical address of the Bridge 1 (Bridge 1 area) and Bridge
2 (Bridge 2 area).

Verify/modify the priority of a Bridge
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Spanning Tree.
2. Select the Bridges tab.
The Priority parameter indicates the priority of the Bridge 1 (Bridge 1 area) and of the Bridge 2 (Bridge
2 area) to use in the auto negotiation of the root: 0 (maximum priority), 15 (minimum priority).
If two bridges have the same priority, the Bridge with lower MAC Address is chosen as root.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

232

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Spanning Tree contextual area
The contextual area displays the spanning tree configuration and the Ethernet Line Protection configuration.
Tabs

Setting tab. General configuration of the Spanning Tree protocol.
Summary tab. Status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol or to the Ethernet
Line Protection (only LANs).
Bridges tab. MAC Address and priority of the Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)

Setting tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Spanning Tree protocol.
Parameters

Force Version. Version of the Spanning Tree protocol:

rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol
characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

Hello Time. Time interval that passes between two consecutive transmissions of the BPDU
(Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet from the Ethernet ports with the Spanning Tree function enabled.
Forward Delay. Time interval which passes between the passage between the port-blocking
status and the port-learning status and between the port-learning status and the port-forwarding status of the port.
Max Age. Maximum number of switches which the packet can pass through before expiring.
The passage from a Switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second per equipment.
See also

Verify/modify the STP version
Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets (Hello Time)
Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets (Max Age)

Summary tab
The tab displays the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol or to the Ethernet
Line Protection (only LANs).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

233

Parameters

LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol or of the Ethernet
Line Protection for the specific LAN:

Disable. Spanning Tree protocol and Ethernet Line Protection disabled.

Enable Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).

Enable Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).

Enable Pro1. Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment) enabled
(Protection1).

Enable Pro2. ELP equipment enabled (Protection2).

Enable Node Pro1. Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node) enabled (Node
Protection1).

Enable Node Pro2. ELP node enabled (Node Protection2).

Enable Node Pro3. ELP node enabled (Node Protection3).

Enable Node Pro4. ELP node enabled (Node Protection4).

Port A, Port B. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the specific Radio port:

Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled.

Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).

Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).

The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.11).
Role. This parameter has a different meaning depending on the enabled protocol/modality:
STP ENABLED. Role assigned by the STP to each port of a Bridge/Switch. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:

ELP

Disable. Port disabled.

Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as root.
Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is at
steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.

Alternate. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards
the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate
port is in port-blocking status.

Designated. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used to
propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.

Backup. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.

ENABLED.

Role assigned by the ELP to each port. The role defines the behaviour of the port:

Disable. Port disabled.

Alternate. Port in stand-by status, as it offers an alternative path with higher cost as
opposed to the Designated port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.

Designated. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status.

Status. Current status of the port:
Port status

Receive
traffic

Forward
traffic

Update the
Address Table Unit
STP

Receive/process BPDU

Re-transmit
BPDU

ENABLED

port-disable

No

No

No

No

No

port-blocking

No

No

No

Yes

No

port-learning

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

port-forwarding

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

port-blocking

No

No

No

-

-

port-forwarding

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

ELP

ENABLED

Version. Version of the Spanning Tree protocol or protection group of the port:

234

rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol
characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

ELP-1. Protection 1 group (ELP equipment).

ELP-2. Protection 2 group (ELP equipment).

Parameter not meaningful when Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-node-Prot... value).
Push-button

Refresh. Update the values present in the tab.

Bridges tab
The tab displays the MAC Address and the priority of the Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.
Parameters

MAC Address (Bridge 1 area). Physical address of the Bridge 1.
Priority (Bridge 1 area). Priority of the Bridge 1 to use in the auto negotiation of the root: 0
(maximum priority), 15 (minimum priority).
MAC Address (Bridge 2 area). Physical address of the Bridge 2.
Priority (Bridge 2 area). Priority of the Bridge 2 to use in the auto negotiation of the root: 0
(maximum priority), 15 (minimum priority).
See also

Verify/modify the priority of a Bridge

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

235

Ring Protection
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the Eth ring protection functionality is enabled.

Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more
features can be enabled.
The Ring Protection modality implements, for ALCplus2e equipment, the standard G.8032 defined in Recommendation ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (03/2010), which you are referred
to for a detailed description of the modality.
The command Ring Protection manages the Ring Protection modality which allows managing the protection in ring Ethernet networks (ERPS - Ethernet Ring Protection Switching) and avoids the creation of loops
through a RPL connection (Ring Protection Link).
ALCplus2e equipment allows implementing, on the same physical ring, a maximum of two ERP instances
(Ethernet Ring Protection) which protects a set of VLANs.
Operations

Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance
Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance
Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance
Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance
Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed
Associate a VLAN to an ERP instance
GUI

Ring Protection contextual area

Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
The Common tab displays the configuration parameters valid for both the ERP instances (OAM Domain
used for G.8032, protection recovery time after a failure detection, etc.).

Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
Access | Read & Write
WARNING When the Ring Protection modality is active for at least one ERP instance, the parameters cannot
be changed, except the fields WTR (min) and Guard (ms).

1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Set, in Name box, the name of the OAM Domain used for G.8032 (alphanumeric string of minimum 1
and maximum 20 characters).
3. Set, in Level box, the priority level you wish to assign to Domain (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).

236

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

4. Set, in WTR (min) box, the time which has to pass to restore the RPL link (block of Owner port) after
the clear of a failure (in absence of management commands executed by the operators and with ERP
Revertive operation enabled - see Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs).
Value between 1 and 12 minutes (default 5).
RPL (Ring Protection Link) connection is the link of the ERP instance which, in normal operating conditions (absence of failure), is blocked (at one or both ends) for the traffic channel in order to avoid the
loop generation.
5. Set, in Guard (ms) box, the time waited by every port of the instance before changing its own status.
Value between 10 and 2000 milliseconds (default 500ms).
6. Set, in CFM/CCM Interval box, the forwarding interval of CCM messages (reserved to G.8032) which
allow monitoring the ERP instance by detecting any possible interruption (Signal Failure):

3.33 ms. 3,33 milliseconds (default value).

10 ms. 10 milliseconds.

7. Set, in Not Assigned Traffic box, the ERP instance which the traffic without Tag or the traffic with Tag,
but not assigned to any instance, must be routed to (see VLan/Ring Binding tab):

To Ring 1. The considered traffic is routed to instance 1.

To Ring 2. The considered traffic is routed to instance 2.

8. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Select the tab Ring 1 or Ring 2 depending on the ERP instance for which you wish to execute the operation.
The Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs displays the enabling status of the Ring Protection modality and the configuration parameters of the specific instance.

Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Access | Read & Write
WARNING When the Ring Protection modality is active for a specific ERP instance, the parameters cannot
be changed, except for the fields Ring Name and Manual Command.

1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Select the tab Ring 1 or Ring 2 depending on the ERP instance for which you wish to execute the operation.
First time you set the parameters or after a restore of the factory default settings (see Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance), the tab is disabled.
To enable it, select the message Locked. To create the Ring...
3. Set, in the Ring Name box, the name of the instance (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum
40 characters).
Set the same name for all the pieces of equipment of the same ERP instance.
4. Set, in MA Name box, the name you wish to assign to the Maintenance Association associated to the
instance (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 15 characters).
Set the same name for all the pieces of equipment of the same ERP instance.
5. Set, in the Vlan ID box, the identifier of the VLAN you wish to reserve for the specific ERP instance
(value between 2 and 4094).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

237

WARNING Set a different VLAN identifier for tab Ring 1 and tab Ring 2. Moreover, the value must be

different from that set as default identifier of the Ethernet ports (Default Vid) and as identifier of the
management VLAN.
6. Set, in ERP Revertive box, the ERP Revertive modality for the specific ERP instance:

Disable. The modality is inactive.
After a failure and the consequent re-configuration of the ring links, once the failure signal is
cleared, the traffic channel continues using the RPL link. To restore the RPL link, it is necessary
to send a command of manual Revert (see Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance).

Enable. The modality is active.
After a failure and the consequent re-configuration of the ring links, once the failure signal is
cleared, after the WTR time is expired, the RPL link and the original traffic link are restored.

7. For each one of the two ports (areas Ethernet Port Binding) constituting the ends of the link belonging
to the specific ERP instance, set the following parameters:
a. Set, in Lan Port box, the Ethernet port where the links ends.
It is not possible to set the same Ethernet port in the two Lan Port fields.
If the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection (only LAN) or the Trunking modality
is enabled for the port, the Ring Protection modality cannot be set for the specific instance.
The selected port must have the option 802.1Q enabled in order to correctly manage the relevant VLAN.
b. Set, in RPL Role box, the port role:

None. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance, but it is not one of the ends of
the protection link RPL (Ring Protection Link). In normal operating conditions, the port
allows the transit of the traffic.
All the ports which end to the links of ERP instance where the traffic in routed must be
configured with this role.

Owner. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends of the
protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the transit of
the traffic. Moreover, the port with this role actuates the ERP Revertive modality (if active).

Neighbor. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends of
the protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the transit
of the traffic.

The value Owner or Neighbor cannot be set in both the RPL Role fields.
c. Set, in MEP ID field, the identifier of the MEP (for G.8032) associated to the port.
Value between 1 and 8191.
The MEP identifier must be assigned to all the ports which end to the links of ERP instance. The
value must be different for every port.
8. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance
Access | Read & Write
WARNING The Ring Protection modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet
Line Protection or the Trunking modality is enabled for at least one of the Ethernet ports configured for the
ERP instance.

1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Select the tab Ring 1 or Ring 2 depending on the ERP instance for which you wish to execute the operation.
The parameter Status indicates the enabling status of the Ring Protection modality.
3. To change the parameters, select:

238

Enable. The Ring Protection modality is active for the specific ERP instance: the transmission of
CCM messages is enabled for the detection of a possible break in the ring.

Disable. The Ring Protection modality is not active for the specific ERP instance.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

Operation meaningful only if the Ring Protection modality is active for the ERP instance.
It is possible to execute a single manual command at a time in the same ERP instance.
1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Select the tab Ring 1 or Ring 2 depending on the ERP instance for which you wish to execute the operation.
The Manual Command parameter indicates the enabling status of the maintenance manual commands
for the specific port.
3. To change the parameter select the option:

None. No forcing is active.

Forced Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated even if there is a
break in the ring.

Manual Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated only if there is not
a break in the ring.

4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating a forcing (selection of Forced Switch or Manual Switch option), a message
warns you are executing a forcing and indicates the current setting of the relevant timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the alarm MAN. OP. If the equipment is switched off and then
switched on, no forcing will be active on the port independently from the previous setting.

Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the ERP Revertive modality for the specific ERP instance is disabled
(parameter ERP Reverte - value Disable).

Operation to execute after a failure and consequent re-configuration of the ring links. When the failure signal is cleared, the Revert push-button will be available to restore the RPL link.
1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Select the tab Ring 1 or Ring 2 depending on the ERP instance for which you wish to execute the operation.
3. Press Revert.

Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Select the tab Ring 1 or Ring 2 depending on the ERP instance for which you wish to execute the operation.
3. Press Destroy and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

239

Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Select VLan/Ring Binding tab.
The tab displays, for each VLAN present in the VLAN Table, the ERP instance which the VLAN traffic is
routed to.

Associate a VLAN to an ERP instance
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Select VLan/Ring Binding tab.
3. Set, in the Ring Binding field of the VLAN, the value:

Not Assigned. The traffic of the specific VLAN is not associated to a specific instance. It is routed
to the ERP instance set for the traffic without Tag (see parameter Not Assigned Traffic - Common
tab).

Ring 1. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the first ERP instance.

Ring 2. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the second ERP instance.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

240

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Ring Protection contextual area
The contextual area displays the configuration of the Ring Protection modality.
Tabs

Common tab. General configuration of the Ring Protection modality (OAM domain used for
G.8032, times of protection recovery after a failure detection, etc.).
Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs. Enabling status of the Ring Protection modality and configuration parameters of the specific ERP instance.
VLan/Ring Binding tab. For every VLAN present in VLAN Table, the ERP instance to which the
VLAN traffic is routed is indicated.
Push-button

Apply. Confirms the changes.
Refresh. Updates the context.
Help. Opens the help on-line.

Common tab
The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the Ring Protection modality (OAM domain used
for G.8032, time of protection recovery after a failure detection, etc.)
Parameters

Name (area Domain). Name of the Domain used for G.8032.
Level (area Domain). Priority level of the Domain:

0. Lowest priority.

7. Highest priority.

WTR (min) (area Delay). Period which must pass so the RPL link is restored (block of the Owner
port) after the failure clear (in absence of management commands actuated by the operator and
with ERP Revertive operation enabled - see Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs).
Guard (ms) (area Delay). Period waited by every port of the instance before changing its own
status.
WTB (ms) (area Delay). Period which must pass before a manual command is really executed
(Forced Switch/Manual Switch).
Read-only parameter because the value is automatically set to 5000 ms more than the value set
in the Guard (ms) field.
CFM/CCM Interval. Interval for the transmission of the CCM messages (reserved to G.8032)
which allows monitoring the ERP instance detecting any possible interruption (Signal Failure):

3.33 ms. 3,33 milliseconds (default value).

10 ms. 10 milliseconds.

Not Assigned Traffic. ERP instance which the traffic without Tag, or the traffic with Tag but
not assigned to any instance, is routed to (see VLan/Ring Binding tab):

To Ring 1. The considered traffic is routed to the instance 1.

To Ring 2. The considered traffic is routed to the instance 2.

See also

Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

241

Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs

WARNING First time you set the parameters or after a restore operation of the factory settings, the tab is

disabled. To enable it, select the message Locked. To create the Ring...
Each tab displays the enabling status of the Ring Protection modality and the configuration parameters for
the specific ERP instance.
Parameters

Status. Enabling status of Ring Protection modality for the specific instance:

Enable. The Ring Protection modality is active for the specific ERP instance: the transmission of CCM messages is enabled for the detection of a possible break in the ring.

Disable. The Ring Protection modality is not active for the specific ERP instance.

UnAvailable. Unavailable modality because the parameters have never been configured or have been restored to the factory values.

Ring State. Functional status of the ERP instance.

---. Status not available because the Ring Protection modality is not active.

Idle. The ERP instance is in nominal conditions (no failure) and the traffic is transmitted according to the scheme defined for the ring.

Protection. The ERP instance is in protection: at least one failure has been detected
in the ring and the links have been reorganized to ensure the transit of the traffic in
the ring. All the ports are in status Forwarding.

Pending. The ERP instance is in transitory status between the status Protection and
the status Idle (for example, during WTR time).

Read only parameter.
Ring Name. Name of ERP instance.
MA Name. Name of the MA (Maintenance Association) associated to the instance.
VLan ID. Identifier of the VLAN reserved to the ERP instance.
ERP Revertive. Enabling status of the ERP Revertive modality for the ERP instance:

Disable. The modality is inactive.
After a failure and the consequent re-configuration of the ring links, once the failure
signal is cleared, the traffic channel continues using the RPL link. To restore the RPL
link, it is necessary to send a command of manual Revert (see push-button Revert).

Enable. The modality is active.
After a failure and the consequent re-configuration of the ring links, once the failure
signal is cleared, after the WTR time is expired, the RPL link and the original traffic
link are restored.

Lan Port. Port of the Ethernet Switch where the link ends.
RPL Role. Role of the specific port:

None. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance, but it is not one of the ends
of the protection link RPL (Ring Protection Link). In normal operating conditions, the
port allows the transit of the traffic.

Owner. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends of
the protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the
transit of the traffic. Moreover, the port with this role actuates the ERP Revertive modality (if active).

Neighbor. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends
of the protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the
transit of the traffic.

MEP ID. Identifier of the MEP (for G.8032) associated to the specific port.
Manual Command. Enabling status of the manual maintenance commands for the specific
port:

242

None. No forcing is active.

Forced Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated even if
there is a failure in the ring.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Manual Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated only if
there is not failure in the ring.

<box>. Operating status of the port:

Operative Status. Port for which the Ring Protection modality is not enabled.

Forwarding. Port which ends a link of the ERP instance where the traffic is routed. The
link is not alarmed (nominal condition).

Blocked. Port blocked because it ends to the RPL link or because a manual command
is active (Forced Switch/Manual Switch).

Blocked Alarmed. Port blocked because alarmed as consequence of a failure of the
link of the RPL instance where it ends.

Push-button

Revert. Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance.
Destroy. Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance
See also

Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance
Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance

VLan/Ring Binding tab
The tab displays, for each VLAN present in VLAN Table, the ERP instance which the VLAN traffic is routed to.
Every row of the table corresponds to one VLAN.
Parameters

VLan ID. VLan identifier.
Read only parameter.
Label. VLan name.
Read only parameter.
Ring Binding. ERP instance where the VLAN traffic is routed to.

Not Assigned. The traffic of the specific VLAN is not associated to any specific instance. It is routed to the ERP instance set for the traffic without Tag (see parameter
Not Assigned Traffic - Common tab).

Ring 1. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the first ERP instance.

Ring 2. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the second ERP instance.

See also

Associate a VLAN to an ERP instance

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

243

TDM Tributaries

E1. It manages the 2Mbit/s tributaries.
STM-1. It manages the STM-1 tributary.
VC-4. It manages the VC-4 virtual container.
VC-12. It manages the VC-12 virtual container.

244

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

E1
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The E1 command manages the 2Mbit/s tributary.
Operations

Verify the status and configuration of the E1s
Modify the label of an E1
Activate/deactivate the E1 use
Activate/deactivate the E1 loops
Modify the management status of LOS alarm
GUI

E1 contextual area

Verify the status and configuration of the E1s
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1.
The E1 contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the E1.

Modify the label of an E1
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1.
The Tributary Label column displays the label of each tributary.
2. To modify the label of a tributary, select the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string of maximum
40 characters.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Activate/deactivate the E1 use
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available for the tributaries A and/or B if already used for the synchronism in output (see Synchronisation).

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1.
The Enable column displays the tributary use status.
2. To modify the tributary use status, select the relevant box and then the option:

Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of the Los Inversion box.

Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit
the alarms.

Press Enable All to set the Enable value for all the tributaries.
Press Disable All to set the Disable value for all the tributaries.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

245

If the tributary is enabled and you are disabling it, the message Do you want Los Inversion enable? is
displayed. Pressing:

Yes, the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.

No, the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.

Activate/deactivate the E1 loops
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1.
The column:

Line Loop indicates the loop status on line side for every single tributary: Line Loop Enabled
(loop active), ---- (loop inactive).

Internal Loop indicates the loop status on internal side for every single tributary: Int. Loop Enabled (loop active), ---- (loop inactive).

2. To modify the loop status, select the relevant box and then the option:

Disable, to disable the loop.

Enable, to enable the loop.

The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is already enabled.
3. Press Apply.
If at least one loop is going to be activated, a message is displayed that warns that you are executing
a forcing and the current setting of the timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is
switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are deactivated.

Modify the management status of LOS alarm
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the tributary is disabled.

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1.
The Los Inversion column displays the management status of LOS alarm.
2. To modify the management status of LOS alarm, select the relevant box and then the option:

Los inversion. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled,
the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.

No Los Inversion. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary
disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

246

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

E1 contextual area
The context displays the status and the configuration of the 2Mbit/s tributaries.
Every table row corresponds to a tributary.
The number of available tributaries changes according to the equipment type.
The first row of the box refers to the first tributary of expansion (E1-1), the second row to the second tributary of expansion (E1-2) and so on up to 16th or 32nd row (according to the type of equipped expansion)
representing the last tributary of the expansion.
The last 2 rows of the table represent the E1s of the base board (Tributary A and Tributary B).
Parameters

Tributary Label. Tributary label.
Enable. Tributary use status:

Disable (white box). Tributary not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the
alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of
the Los Inversion box.

Enable (green box). Tributary active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller
does not inhibit the alarms.

If the tributary A and/or B is not available (Unavailable label - grey box), this means that the
tributary is not available for the traffic as already used as synchronism in output (see Synchronisation).
Line Loop. Line side loop status:

Line Loop Enabled (green box). Line loop active.

---- (white box). Loop not active.

Internal Loop. internal side loop status:

Int. Loop Enabled (green box). Internal loop active.

---- (white box). Loop not active.

Los Inversion. Management of LOS alarm when the tributary is not used:

Los inversion (green box). The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if,
with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.

--- (white box). The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.

The status of the Los Inversion box IS MEANINGFUL ONLY if the tributary is not used.
LOS Alarm / AIS Alarm. The colour of box indicates the status of the relevant alarm:

White (no wording). The alarm is not active.

Red, orange, yellow or light blue (LOS or AIS wording). The alarm is active and has
severity, respectively, Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Enable All. Set the Enable value (Enable column) for all E1s.
Disable All. Set the Disable value (Enable column) for all E1s.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Modify the label of an E1
Activate/deactivate the E1 use
Activate/deactivate the E1 loops
Modify the management status of LOS alarm

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

247

STM-1

Lim A STM-1 [x]. It manages the configuration of the specific STM-1.
The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).

248

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Lim A STM-1 [x]
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the management of STM-1 is active (see Configurator).

The (Lim A STM-1 [2]) command is available only if the protection of STM-1 (MSP mode) is active or if the
management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST mode).
The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).
The Lim A STM-1 [x] command manages the configuration of the specific STM-1.
Operations

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and internal side)
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier
Verify the STM-1 alarms
Verify/modify the B2 Signal Degrade alarm threshold
Verify/modify the B2 Excessive BER alarm threshold
Verify the status and configuration of the laser
Modify the enabling status of the laser
Modify the transmission mode of the laser
Enable manually the laser transmission
Execute the test laser functioning status
Verify/modify the transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1 Radio channel
GUI

Lim A STM-1 contextual area

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
The STM-1 Status parameter indicates the status of the STM-1:

Not Active. The STM-1 is not active (unused stream). In this condition, the alarms are inhibited
and the LOS alarm is raised, with disabled stream the STM-1 signal is however connected.

Active. The STM-1 is active (used stream). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit the
alarms.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and internal side)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
The Line Side Loop parameter indicates the status of the STM-1 loop on line side:

Open. The loop is inactive.

Closed. The STM-1 loop on line side is active.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

249

The Internal Side Loop parameter indicates the status of the STM-1 loop on internal side:

Open. The loop is inactive.

Closed. The STM-1 loop on internal side is active.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
The STM-1 loops on line side and on internal side cannot be activated at the same time.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating a loop a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the
current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Verify/modify the enabling status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
The Type parameter indicates the enabling status of the J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal:

Disable. The control of the J0 byte is disabled.

1 Byte Control. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 1 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace
Identifier Mismatch Alarm).

16 Bytes Control. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte.
The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
Into the J0 Path Trace area the sequences of the characters at transmission and/or at reception relevant
to J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal is pointed out.

Sent box. Transmitted sequence of the control characters.

Expected box. Character sequence to be controlled at reception.

Received box. Character sequence in reception.

2. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box:

Sent, to change the transmitted sequence of the control characters.

Expected, to change the sequence of the characters to be controlled at reception.

The number of characters that has to constitute the sequence depends on the selected option pushbutton into the Type area (1 or 16 bytes).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the STM-1 alarms
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].

250

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

In the Alarms area, for each STM-1 alarm, there is a box containing the alarm name. The colour of the
boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Verify/modify the B2 Signal Degrade alarm threshold
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Thresholds tab.
The B2 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm
according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal:

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated.

E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated.

E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated.

E-9, at the detection of a BER > 10E-9 the alarm is activated.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.

Verify/modify the B2 Excessive BER alarm threshold
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Thresholds tab.
The B2 Excessive BER Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal:

E-3, at the detection of a BER > 10E-3 the alarm is activated.

E-4, at the detection of a BER > 10E-4 the alarm is activated.

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.

Verify the status and configuration of the laser
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is equipped with STM-1 with electrical interface.

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The tab displays the current status and the configuration parameters of the laser.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

251

Modify the enabling status of the laser
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is equipped with STM-1 with electrical interface.
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The Laser Control parameter indicates the enabling status of the laser:

On. The laser is enabled for transmission.

Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message warns that you are executing
a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the
laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.

Modify the transmission mode of the laser
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is equipped with STM-1 with electrical interface.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The Automatic Shutdown parameter indicates the transmission mode of the laser:

Disabled. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal.

Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. Press Apply and confirm.

Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.

Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (test operation laser functioning status).

WARNING If the management of STM-1 is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality, Automatic Laser Shut-

down function is permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is forced to
Disable. In this case, the change operation here below is not available.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message warns
that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the transmission mode of the laser is Auto.

252

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Enable manually the laser transmission
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is equipped with STM-1 with electrical interface.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
If the management of STM-1 is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality, Automatic Laser Shutdown function is
permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is forced to Disable. In this case,
this operation is not available.
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
3. Select the Manual option.
4. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
6.

Press Restart Laser and confirm.
The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.

Execute the test laser functioning status
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is equipped with STM-1 with electrical interface.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
If the management of STM-1 is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality, Automatic Laser Shutdown function is
permanently disabled (laser transmission modality is forced to Disable). In this case, this operation is not
available.
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser
(value comprised between 1 and 100 sec.).
4. Select the Test option.
5. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
6. Confirm the operation.
The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
7. Press Restart Laser and confirm.
The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.

Verify/modify the transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1 Radio channel
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the management of STM-1 in MST mode is active.

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the SOH Transport tab.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

253

The Radio E1 Selection parameter indicates the high priority Radio E1 channel (Permanent) currently
used for the transport of the content of SOH frame in radio:

Permanent 1A <E1 Radio number>. The transport of the bytes of SOH frame on the specific Permanent E1 channel of Radio 1A is active.

Permanent 2A <E1 Radio number>. The transport of the bytes of SOH frame on the specific Permanent E1 channel of Radio 2A is active.

Not Selected. The transport in radio of the SOH frame is not active.

None available. Radio not available (radio unequipped or in failure) or the number of Permanent
channels is set to 0.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
Operation available only if at least one high-priority Radio E1 channel is set (see Modulation & Capacity
tab).
The available values change according to the number of high priority channels set for each Radio.
The selected Radio E1 channel will not be available for the traffic any longer.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the SDH overhead and VC12 quality management functionality is not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or
more features can be enabled.

254

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Lim A STM-1 contextual area
The contextual area displays the configuration of the specific STM-1.
Tabs

Settings tab. Status, loop, J0 Trace Identifier configuration and STM-1 alarms.
Thresholds tab. Threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm and B2 Excessive BER alarm.
Laser Control tab. Configuration of the STM-1 with optical interface.
SOH Transport tab. Status of the transport of the SOH bytes on a Radio e1 channel.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Restart Laser. Restart the laser. Push-button present only if the Laser Control tab is active.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Settings tab
The tab displays the configuration of the specific STM-1 (status, loop, J0 Trace Identifier configuration and
STM-1 alarms).
Parameters

Line Side Loop. Status of the STM-1 loop on line side:

Open. The loop is inactive.

Closed. The STM-1 loop on line side is active.

STM-1 Status. Status of the STM-1:

Not Active. The STM-1 is not active (unused stream). In this condition, the alarms are
inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised, with disabled stream the STM-1 signal is however connected.

Active. The STM-1 is active (used stream). In this condition, the controller does not
inhibit the alarms.

Internal Side Loop. Status of the STM-1 loop on internal side:

Open. The loop is inactive.

Closed. The STM-1 loop on internal side is active.

Type (J0 Path Trace). Enabling status of the J0 byte:

Disable. The control of the J0 byte is disabled.

1 Byte Control. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of
1 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an
alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).

16 Bytes Control. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence
of 16 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one
creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).

Sent (J0 Path Trace). Transmitted sequence of the control characters.
Expected (J0 Path Trace). Character sequence to be controlled at reception.
Received (J0 Path Trace). Character sequence in reception.
Alarms. Status of STM-1 alarms. For each alarm there is a box containing the alarm name. The
colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

255

See also

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and internal side)
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier

Thresholds tab
The tab displays the configuration of the specific STM-1 (threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm and B2
Excessive BER alarm).
Parameters

B2 Signal Degrade Threshold. Threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm:

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated.

E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated.

E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated.

E-9, at the detection of a BER > 10E-9 the alarm is activated.

B2 Excessive BER Threshold. Threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm:

E-3, at the detection of a BER > 10E-3 the alarm is activated.

E-4, at the detection of a BER > 10E-4 the alarm is activated.

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

See also

Verify/modify the B2 Signal Degrade alarm threshold
Verify/modify the B2 Excessive BER alarm threshold

Laser Control tab
WARNING Tab not available if the equipment is equipped with STM-1 with electrical interface

The tab displays the configuration of the specific STM-1 with optical interface.
Parameters

Laser Control. Enabling status of the laser:

On. The laser is enabled for transmission.

Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.

<Box>. Current status of the laser:

Status ON / green box. The laser is on transmission.

Status OFF / gray box. The laser is not on transmission.

Module Type. Laser module type:

256

optical-S11. S type laser module (application: Inter office-Short-haul), 1 (STM level:
Stm-1), 1 (fibber type: according to G.652 Spec.).

optical-L11. L type laser module (application: Inter office-Long-haul), 1 (STM level:
Stm-1), 1 (fibber type: according to G.652 Spec.).

optical-L12. L type laser module (application: Inter office-Long-haul), 1 (STM level:
Stm-1), 2 (fibber type: according to G.652, G.654 Specifications).

optical-I1. I type laser module (application: Intra office), 1 (STM level: Stm-1).

optical-cwdm. Laser module of type CWDM (Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Unknown. The laser module is not one of the above listed modules (possible anomaly
of the laser module).

Classification of the optical interface according to G.957 Specification.
Automatic Shutdown. Transmission mode of the laser:

Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the
real presence of the optical signal.

Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal:
when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the
laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds
every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote
transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit,
while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.

Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.

Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of test laser operation status).

If the management of STM-1 in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality is active, Automatic Laser Shutdown
function is permanently disabled. This means that, in the Automatic Shutdown area, the value
Disable (option not modifiable) is automatically set and the other items of the area are not available.
Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller
before trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the
laser during the testing operation.
See also

Modify the enabling status of the laser
Modify the transmission mode of the laser
Enable manually the laser transmission
Execute the test laser functioning status

SOH Transport tab
WARNING Tab available only if the management of STM-1 in MST mode is active.

The tab displays the status of the transport of the SOH bytes on a Radio E1 channel.
Parameters

Radio E1 Selection. High priority Radio E1 channel (Permanent) currently used for the transport of the SOH frame in radio:

Permanent 1A <Radio E1 number>. The transport of the bytes of the SOH frame on
the specific Permanent E1 channel of the Radio 1A.

Permanent 2A <Radio E1 number>. The transport of the bytes of the SOH frame on
the specific Permanent E1 channel of the Radio 2A.

Not Selected. The transport in radio of the SOH frame is not active.

None available. Radio not available (radio unequipped or in failure) or the number of
Permanent channels is set to 0.

See also

Verify/modify the transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1 Radio channel

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

257

VC-4
WARNING Command not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1

Bulk Config.).

Lim A VC-4 [x]. It manages the specific VC-4 virtual container configuration.
The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).

258

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Lim A VC-4 [x]
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the management of STM-1 is active (see Configurator) and the STM1 Bulk function is not active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).

The Lim A VC-4 [2] command is available only if the management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST
mode).
The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).
The Lim A VC-4 [x] command manages the specific VC-4 virtual container configuration.
Operations

Verify/modify the enabling status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J1 Trace Identifier
Verify the VC-4 alarms
Verify/modify the B3 Signal Degrade alarm threshold
Verify/modify the B3 Excessive BER alarm threshold
Verify/modify the Signal Label value
GUI

Lim A VC-4 contextual area

Verify/modify the enabling status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
The Type parameter indicates the enabling status of the overhead J1 byte used for the control of the
received signal:

Disable. The control of the J1 byte is disabled.

16 Bytes Control. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte.
The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal (J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J1 Trace Identifier
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
The tab displays the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant to the byte J1,
used for the control of the received signal:

Sent. Transmitted sequence of the control characters.

Expected. Character sequence to be controlled at reception.

Received. Character sequence in reception.

2. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box:

Sent, to change the transmitted sequence of the control characters.

Expected, to change the sequence of the characters to be controlled at reception.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

259

Verify the VC-4 alarms
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
The Alarms area displays, for each VC-4 alarm, a box containing the alarm name.
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Verify/modify the B3 Signal Degrade alarm threshold
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
2. Select the B3/Signal Label tab.
The B3 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm
according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal:

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated.

E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated.

E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated.

E-9, at the detection of a BER > 10E-9 the alarm is activated.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.

Verify/modify the B3 Excessive BER alarm threshold
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
2. Select the B3/Signal Label tab.
The B3 Excessive BER Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal:

E-3, at the detection of a BER > 10E-3 the alarm is activated.

E-4, at the detection of a BER > 10E-4 the alarm is activated.

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.

Verify/modify the Signal Label value
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
2. Select the B3/Signal Label tab.
The Signal Label area displays the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of
the received signal:

260

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Sent. Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label refers to.

Expected. Specification which the received value of Signal Label refers to.

Received. Specification which the received signal refers to.

The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC-4 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm).
3. To change the parameter, set in the box:

Sent Label. The specification which the value of the transmitted C2 byte refers to.

Expected Label. The specification which the value of the expected C2 byte refers to.

The specifications which can be set, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec., are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

261

Lim A VC-4 contextual area
The contextual area displays the configuration of the specific VC-4 virtual container.
Tabs

J1/Alarms tab. J1 Trace Identifier configuration and VC-4 alarms.
B3/Signal Label tab. Threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm and B3 Excessive BER alarm;
Signal Label value.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

J1/Alarms tab
The tab displays the configuration of the specific VC-4 virtual container (J1 Trace Identifier configuration
and VC-4 alarms).
Parameters

Type (J1 Path Trace). Enabling status of the J1 byte:

Disable. The control of the J1 byte is disabled.

16 Bytes Control. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence
of 16 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one
creates an alarm signal (J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).

Sent (J1 Path Trace). Transmitted sequence of the control characters.
Expected (J1 Path Trace). Character sequence to be controlled at reception.
Received (J1 Path Trace). Character sequence in reception.
Alarms. Status of VC-4 virtual container alarms. For each alarm there is a box containing the
alarm name. The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

See also

Verify/modify the enabling status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J1 Trace Identifier

B3/Signal Label tab
The tab displays the configuration of the specific VC-4 virtual container (threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade
alarm and B3 Excessive BER alarm; Signal Label value).
Parameters

B3 Signal Degrade Threshold. Threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm:

262

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated.

E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated.

E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

E-9, at the detection of a BER > 10E-9 the alarm is activated.

B3 Excessive BER Threshold. Threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm:

E-3, at the detection of a BER > 10E-3 the alarm is activated.

E-4, at the detection of a BER > 10E-4 the alarm is activated.

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

Sent (Signal Label). Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label refers to. The
specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
Expected (Signal Label). Specification which the received value of Signal Label refers to. The
specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
Received (Signal Label). Specification which the received signal refers to. The specifications,
according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
See also

Verify/modify the B3 Signal Degrade alarm threshold
Verify/modify the B3 Excessive BER alarm threshold
Verify/modify the Signal Label value

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

263

VC-12
WARNING Command not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1

Bulk Config.).

VC-12 Thresholds. It manages the thresholds of some VC-12 alarms.
Lim A VC-12 [x]. It manages the configuration parameters of each VC-12 channel.
The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).

264

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

VC-12 Thresholds
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the management of STM-1 is active (see Configurator) and the STM1 Bulk function is not active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).

The VC-12 Thresholds command manages the thresholds of some VC-12 alarms.
Operations

Verify/modify the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm threshold
Verify/modify the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm threshold
GUI

VC-12 Thresholds contextual area

Verify/modify the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm threshold
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds.
The Signal Degrade Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm:

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated.

E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated.

E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and then confirm.

Verify/modify the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm threshold
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds.
The Excessive BER Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm:

E-3, at the detection of a BER > 10E-3 the alarm is activated.

E-4, at the detection of a BER > 10E-4 the alarm is activated.

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and then confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

265

VC-12 Thresholds contextual area
The contextual area shows the setting of the thresholds of some VC-12 alarms.
Parameters

Signal Degrade Threshold. Threshold of the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm:

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated.

E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated.

E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated.

Excessive BER Threshold. Threshold of the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm:

E-3, at the detection of a BER > 10E-3 the alarm is activated.

E-4, at the detection of a BER > 10E-4 the alarm is activated.

E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

266

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Lim A VC-12 [x]
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the management of STM-1 is active (see Configurator) and the STM1 Bulk function is not active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).

The Lim A VC-12 [2] command is available only if the management of two unprotected STM-1 is active
(MST mode).
The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).
The Lim A VC-12 [x] command manages the configuration parameter of each VC-12 channel.
Operations

Verify the alarms status of the VC-12
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace Identifier of
a VC-12
Verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12
GUI

Lim A VC-12 contextual area

Verify the alarms status of the VC-12
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 [x].
The Lim A VC-12 contextual area displays the alarms status of the VC-12.

Verify/modify the enabling status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 [x].
2. Select the wished VC-12 channel.
The Status parameter indicates the enabling status of the byte J2 used for the control of the received
signal:

Disabled. The control of the byte J2 is disabled.

Enabled. The control of the byte J2 is enabled.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.

Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace Identifier of
a VC-12
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 [x].
2. Select the wished VC-12 channel.
The J2 Path Trace area displays the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant
to the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal:

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

267

Sent. Transmitted sequence of the control characters.

Expected. Character sequence to be controlled at reception.

Received. Character sequence in reception.

3. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box:

Sent, to change the transmitted sequence of the control characters.

Expected, to change the sequence of the characters to be controlled at reception.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 [x].
2. Select the wished VC-12 channel.
The Signal Label area displays the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of
the received signal:

Sent. Specification which the value of the transmitted byte C2 refers to.

Expected. Specification which the value of the expected byte C2 refers to.

The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC-12 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm).
3. To change the parameter, set in the Sent and Expected box the new specification.
The specifications which can be set, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.

268

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Lim A VC-12 contextual area
The contextual area shows the VC-12 channels.
VC-12 configuration

Each VC-12 is represented by a box and by the number of the channel reported into the box.
The position of the box identifies the TUG-3 and the TUG-2 which the VC-12 belongs to.
To verify the channel configuration (J2 Trace Identifier and Signal Label) select the wished VC12. The detail of the configuration is pointed out in Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window.
VC-12 alarms

The total status of the channel alarms is displayed by the colour of the box:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

If there are more alarms with different severity, the colour of the box will point out the most
serious alarm present in the VC-12 channel.
To verify the alarms of a single channel, select the wished VC-12 channel. The detail of the
alarms is pointed out in Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window
The window displays the configuration parameters (J2 Trace Identifier and Signal Label) and the status of
the alarms of a VC-12 channel.
Parameters

Status (J2 Path Trace). Enabling status of the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal:

Disabled. The control of the byte J2 is disabled.

Enabled. The control of the byte J2 is enabled.

Sent (J2 Path Trace). Transmitted sequence of the control characters (byte J2).
Expected (J2 Path Trace). Character sequence to be controlled at reception (byte J2).
Received (J2 Path Trace). Character sequence in reception (byte J2).
Sent (Signal Label). Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label (byte C2) refers
to. The specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.
Expected (Signal Label). Specification which the received value of Signal Label (byte C2) refers
to. The specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.
Alarms. Status of VC-12 channel alarms. For each alarm there is a box containing the alarm
name. The colour of the box indicates the alarm status:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Push-button

Refresh. Update the window.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

269

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Cancel. Close the window.
See also

Verify/modify the enabling status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace Identifier of
a VC-12
Verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12

270

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Cross Connection
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment that manage the matrix (see Tab.12).

The Cross Connection command it manages the cross-connection matrix.
The function of the matrix is, as rule, allowing the mapping of the E1 TDM channels to the Radio E1 channels.
For equipment provided with PWE3 function, when this is active, the matrix allows mapping the E1 channels to PWE3 channels.
This change of function involves that the operations available by means of the considered command change
according to the type of equipment and to the activation or not of the PWE3 function.
Depending on the equipment type, refer to the chapter:
Cross Connection (PWE3 function not available or inactive)
Cross Connection (PWE3 function enable)
Tab.12 Matrix availability
IDU Board type (1)

PWE3
function

Matrix

Notes

IduBoard Only 1+0
IduBoard
IduBoard Xpic

Not
available

Not
available

The mapping of the two E1 channels of base board
(tributaries A and B) with Radio E1s can be executed in the Tributary A-B Mapping tab

IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

Not
available

Available

Matrix for the mapping of E1 tributaries to Radio
E1’s (see Cross Connection)

Disable

Available

Matrix for the mapping of E1 tributaries to Radio
E1’s (see Cross Connection)

Enable

Available

Matrix for the mapping of E1 tributaries to PWE3
E1’s (see Cross Connection (PWE3 function enable)

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

Not
available

Not
available

The mapping of E1 tributaries is preset:
- Tributary A -> Radio Extra E1-1
- Tributary B -> Radio Extra E1-2
- E1-1 expansion -> Radio Extra E1-3
...
- E1-16 expansion -> Radio Extra E1-18

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

Not
available

Not
available

The mapping of E1 tributaries is preset:
- Tributary A -> Radio Extra E1-1
- Tributary B -> Radio Extra E1-2

Disable

Available

Matrix for the mapping of E1 tributaries to Radio
E1’s (see Cross Connection)

Enable

Not
available

The mapping of E1 tributaries is preset:
- E1-1 expansion -> PWE3 Link E1-1
...
- E1-16 expansion -> PWE3 Link E1-16

(2)

Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1
Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1
Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
Xpic Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
Xpic Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Xpic Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 PWE3

(1)

Verify the equipment units

(2)

See Configurator

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

271

Cross Connection
WARNING Chapter meaningful only for equipment managing the TDM matrix and with PWE3 function not

available or inactive (see Tab.12).
The Cross Connection command it manages the cross-connection matrix.
Operations

Display the connections of the equipment in graphic format
Display the connections of the equipment in table format
Execute an unprotected Tributary-Radio connection
Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection
Execute a Pass Through connection
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection
Delete one or more connections
Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop)
Disable an Auto-Loop
Modify the connection label
Save the list of the connections
UNPROTECTED TRIBUTARY-RADIO

CONNECTIONS

Verify the status and the configuration of a protected connection
Modify the modality used to manage the switch in the protected connection
Modify the modality used to manage the preferential connection
Modify the Wait Time parameter (protected connection)
Force the switch on preferential connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
Modify the structure of the Radio E1 involved by a connection
GUI

Cross Connection contextual area
See also

Cross connection matrix (info)

Display the connections of the equipment in graphic format
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
The Cross Connection Matrix window displays the existing connections in graphic format.

Display the connections of the equipment in table format
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Select List > List.
The Cross Connection List window displays the existing connections in table format (list of all the cross
connection).

272

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Every connection is assigned a row, where is pointed out in the column:

Channel, Linked Channel 1 and Linked Channel 2. Channels composing the connection:

E1 (Exp + Base) <E1 number>. E1 channel of the base (Trib. A and B) and expansion.

Expansion STM-1 <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of STM-1.
If the management of two STM-1 is active, the STM-1 which the channel refers to will be
specified:

Expansion STM-1 [1] <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of the first STM-1.

Expansion STM-1 [2] <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of the second STM-1.

NBUS <E1 number>. E1 channel of Nodal Bus.
The available NBUS values change according to the equipment nodal configuration (see
Tab.14).

Radio <radio branch> Perm. E1... <E1 number>. High priority Radio E1 channel of the
specific radio direction.

Radio <radio branch> Extra E1 <E1 number>. Low priority Radio E1 channel of the specific radio direction.

Remember that the connection is a bidirectional path. The table considers a possible direction
of the connection (Channel -> Linked Channel) only for clarity of explanation.
The column Linked Channel 2 is meaningful only for the protected Tributary- Radio connections.

Label. Name of the connection.
On the creation of the connection, DEFAULT name is assigned, which can be modified later by
the user.

Connection Type. Type of connection:

Single. Tributary-Tributary connection or unprotected Tributary-Radio connection.

Protected. Protected Tributary-Radio connection.

Pass-Through. Pass Through connection.

Auto-Loop. Connection of Auto-Loop type (loop of a VC-12 or E1 radio channel on itself).

The window contains the following commands:

File > Save. Save the data.

File > Refresh. Update the data.

File > Close. Close the window.

Actions > Delete. Delete the selected connections.

Actions > Delete All. Delete all the connections present in the list.

Execute an unprotected Tributary-Radio connection
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with the radio.

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Select the Tributary-Radio option.
4. Set, in the 2b box (see Fig.7) the tributary stream you wish to use for the connection.
5. Only for the equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration, set in the 2a and 2c box (see Fig.7), the radio
streams you wish to use for the connection.
The list contains all the available radio streams with the exception of the stream set in the other box.
6. Select the unused channel on tributary side and drag-and-drop it on the unused channel on radio side.
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type
and on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.13).
7. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

273

The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.

Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration and if the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring is active (see Configurator).

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Select the Tributary-Radio option.
4. Set, in the 2b box (see Fig.7), the tributary stream you wish to use for the connection.
5. Set, in the 2a and 2c box (see Fig.7), the radio streams you wish to use for the connection.
The list contains all the available radio streams with the exception of the stream set in the other box.
To realize the protected connection, IT IS NECESSARY to set, in box 2a, a stream relevant to a radio
direction and, in box 2c, a stream relevant to the other radio direction.
For instance, if the stream Radio 1A Permanent E1 has been set in box 2a, you must set the stream
Radio 2A (Radio 2A Permanent E1 or Radio 2A Extra E1) in box 2c.
6. Select the unused channel on tributary side and drag-and-drop it on the unused channel on radio side
you wish to use for the first branch of the connection.
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label
7. Select the same tributary channel selected in the previous step, and drag and drop it on the unused
radio channel you wish to use for the second branch of the connection.
The two channels are linked by a pink line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed.
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type
and on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.13).
8. Press Apply and confirm.
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.

Execute a Pass Through connection
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with the radio.

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Select the Tributary-Radio option.
4. Only for the equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration, set in the 2a and 2c box (see Fig.7), the radio
streams you wish to use for the connection.
The list contains all the available radio streams with the exception of the stream set in the other box.
5. Select the unused E1 radio channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused E1 radio channel.
It is possible to select two channels of two different radio streams or of the same radio stream.
The two channels are linked by an orange line and the name assigned by default to the connection is
displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label.
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type
(see Tab.13).
6. Press Apply and confirm.

274

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.

Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Select the Tributary-Tributary option.
4. Set, in the 2a and 2b box (see Fig.7), the tributaries streams you wish to use for the connection.
The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception of the tributary set in the other box.
5. Select the unused tributary channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused tributary channel.
It is possible to select two channels of two different tributaries or of the same tributary.
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label.
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type
and on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.13).
6. Press Apply and confirm.
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.

Delete one or more connections
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Execute one of the following operations:

In the Cross-Connection Matrix window, select a channel of the connection you wish to delete
and drag-and-drop it over the trash icon or select Options > Delete connections.
If the connection is of type:

Tributary-Tributary, unprotected Tributary-Radio or Pass Through, the connection is deleted.

Protected Tributary-Radio and one of the Radio E1 channel has been moved to the trash:
only the connection side, which the selected Radio E1 belongs to, is deleted.

Protected Tributary-Radio and the channel Tributary VC-12/E1 has been moved to the
trash: the whole connection is deleted.

Repeat the step to delete all the wished connections.
Press Apply and confirm.
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.

In the Cross-Connection Matrix window, select List > List.
To delete:

One or more connections, select its rows. Select Actions > Delete and confirm.

All the connections in the list, select Actions > Delete All and confirm.

Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop)
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

275

2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Select the unused tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or radio channel (E1 Permanent/E1 Extra) for which you wish to execute the auto-loop.
4. Select Options > Auto Loop > Add.
5. Press Apply and confirm.
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.

Disable an Auto-Loop
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Execute one of the following operations:

Select the tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or on the radio channel (E1
Permanent/E1 Extra) with auto-loop enabled (light blue box) for which you wish to disable the
auto-loop.
Select Options > Auto Loop > Delete.
Press Apply and confirm.
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.

In the Cross-Connection Matrix window, select List > List.
To delete:

One or more Auto-Loops, select its rows. Select the Actions > Delete command and
confirm.

All the list, select the Actions > Delete All command and confirm.

Modify the connection label
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Select one of the channels that form the connection.
The connection label is displayed.
4. Select the label.
5. Set the new name in the field (alphanumeric string of, at most, 45 characters) and press Apply.
6. Press Apply and confirm.

Save the list of the connections
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Select List > List.
4. Select File > Save.
5. Type the path and the filename where you wish to save the information into the Selection box.

276

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

6. Press OK.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

Verify the status and the configuration of a protected connection
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Double click on the tributary channels that form the protected Tributary-Radio connection.
The Path Protection Policy window displays the status and the configuration of the connection:

Protection Status. Operating status of the protected connection.
The active link is pointed out by the Active box, the StandBy link by the Stand-by box.
The structure of E1s in the active connection is pointed out next to the Active box, while the
structure of the stand-by connection is displayed next to Stand-by box:

Not Framed. The Radio E1s have not framed structure.

Framed. The Radio E1s have framed structure.

Active Link Alarms / Protection Alarms. Respectively status of the alarms of the active connection and of the StandBy connection.
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical,
Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm deactivated.

Manual Switch (Preferential). Modality used to manage the preferential connection function for
the service:

Auto. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) a connection is not used in preferential mode.

Radio 1A <E1 radio>.In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with
the E1 on radio side 1A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.

Radio 2A <E1 radio>. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with
the E1 on radio side 2A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.

Forced Switch. Modality used to manage the switch between active and stand-by connections:

Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal
operating modality of the equipment).

Radio 1A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection
with the E1 on radio side 1A pointed out by the option.

Radio 2A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection
with the E1 on radio side 2A pointed out by the option.

Wait to Restore Time. Time during which a no-alarm condition must persist on the preferential
connection so that the service is restored on it.

Modify the modality used to manage the switch in the protected connection
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Double click on the tributary channels that form the protected Tributary-Radio connection.
The Forced Switch parameter indicates the modality used to manage the switch between active and
stand-by connections.
4. To change the parameter, select the option:

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

277

Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operating modality of the equipment).

Radio 1A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection with the
E1 on radio side 1A pointed out by the option.

Radio 2A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection with the
E1 on radio side 2A pointed out by the option.

5. Press Set.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Radio 1A or Radio 2A option) a message warns
that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.

Modify the modality used to manage the preferential connection
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Double click on the tributary channels that form the protected Tributary-Radio connection.
The Manual Switch (Preferential) parameter indicates the modality used to manage the preferential
connection function for the service.
4. To change the parameter, select the option:

Auto. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) a connection is not used in preferential
mode.

Radio 1A <E1 radio>.In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with the E1
on radio side 1A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.

Radio 2A <E1 radio>. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with the E1
on radio side 2A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.

5. Press Set.

Modify the Wait Time parameter (protected connection)
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Double click on the tributary channels that form the protected Tributary-Radio connection.
The Wait to Restore Time parameter indicates the time during which a no-alarm condition must persist
on the preferential connection so that the service is restored on it.
4. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the value comprised between 0 and 100 minutes.
5. Press Set.

Force the switch on preferential connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Double click on the tributary channels that form the protected Tributary-Radio connection.

278

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

4. Press Clear WTR.
The main connection, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for
the service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.

Modify the structure of the Radio E1 involved by a connection
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.
2. Press Open cross connection Window.
3. Double click on the tributary channels that form the protected Tributary-Radio connection.
The structure of E1s in the active connection is pointed out next to the Active box, while the structure
of the stand-by connection is displayed next to Stand-by box.
4. To change the parameters, select the specific option:

Not Framed. The Radio E1s have not framed structure.

Framed. The Radio E1s have framed structure.

When a configuration value is selected for the Radio E1s of an area, the system automatically assigns
the same value even to the Radio E1s present on the other side of the connection and vice versa.
5. Press Set.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

279

Cross Connection contextual area
WARNING Chapter meaningful only for equipment managing the TDM matrix and with PWE3 function not

available or inactive (see Tab.12).
In the contextual area is present the Open cross connection Window push-button which allows to display and manage the connections of the equipment.
The its choise opens the Cross Connection Matrix window.
Push-button

Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Execute an unprotected Tributary-Radio connection
Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection
Execute a Pass Through connection
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection
Delete one or more connections
Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop)
Disable an Auto-Loop
Modify the connection label
Save the list of the connections
Verify the status and the configuration of a protected connection
Modify the modality used to manage the switch in the protected connection
Modify the modality used to manage the preferential connection
Modify the Wait Time parameter (protected connection)
Force the switch on preferential connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
Modify the structure of the Radio E1 involved by a connection
Cross connection matrix (info)

Cross Connection Matrix window
The Cross Connection Matrix window displays the existing connections in graphic format.
It is possible to display only one connection at a time moving the pointer on a channel used for the connection you wish to verify.
If are highlighted:

A tributary channel (E1/VC-12) and an E1 radio connected by a blue line, the connection is of
type unprotected Tributary-Radio.

A tributary channel (E1/VC-12) and an E1 radio connected by a blue line, the same tributary
channel and a different E1 radio connected by a pink line, the connection is of type protected
Tributary-Radio.
The colour of the lines indicates the status of the switch. The active connection is pointed out
by the blue line, while the stand-by one by the pink line.

Two different radio channel connected by an orange line, the connection is of type Pass
Through.

Two different tributary channel (E1/VC-12) connected by a blue line, the connection is of type
Tributary-Tributary.

The same tributary channel (E1/VC-12) with a blue line linking the channel itself, the connection
is of Auto-Loop type.

The same radio channel with a blue line linking the channel itself, the connection is of AutoLoop type.

Fig.7 shows the description of all the elements present in the Cross Connection Matrix window.

280

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Fig.7 Cross Connection Matrix window

1
2a

2

2b

2c

3

(1)

4

5

6

7

MENU bar.
File > Close. Close the window.
Options > Delete Connection. Delete one or more connections.
Options > Auto loop > Add. Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop).
Options > Auto Loop > Delete. Disable an Auto-Loop.
List > List. Display the connections of the equipment in table format.

(2)

CHANNELS area. This area displays the (tributary and radio) channels provided on the equipment
and grouped by membership streams.
Every channel is represented by a box.
For the E1 channels, the channel number is pointed out in the box.
For the VC-12 channels (Expansion STM-1) the TU12 number is pointed out in the box while the
position of the box identifies the TUG3 and the TUG2 of membership of VC-12.
The status of use of the channel is represented by the colour of the box (see note 5). The currently
selected channel is represented by the light grey.
When a yellow led is present into a box of a tributary channel (E1/VC-12), this means that this channel is used for a connection of Tributary-Radio type.
The streams displayed in this area change according to the settings made by the user in the Visualization Mode area (see note 3).
In the Visualization Mode area, if the selected option is:

Tributary-Radio. The Channels area contains two different radio stream ad one tributary
streams.
The top part displays the radio stream pointed out in the 2a box. The bottom part displays
the radio stream pointed out in the 2c box.
The middle part displays the tributary stream pointed out in the 2b box.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

281

To change a stream, select the specific box and select the new stream from the list.
The value set in the box 2a will not be available in the list of values of box 2c and vice versa.
In the Channels area, the order used to display the Extra E1 Radio depends on the priority
defined by the user (see BW & Mod./Link ID).

Tributary-Tributary. The Channels area contains two different tributary streams.
The top part displays the tributary stream pointed out in the 2a box. The middle part displays
the tributary stream pointed out in the 2b box. In this case, the box 2c will not be present.
To change the tributary, select the specific box and select the new stream from the list.
The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception of the tributary set in the other box.

In the boxes on the tributary the following values can be present:

Exp xE1+ Base. E1 channel of the base (Trib. A and B) and expansion.

Expansion STM-1. VC-12 channel of STM-1.
If the management of two STM-1 is active, the values Expansion STM-1 [1] and Expansion
STM-1 [2] will be available, which respectively point out VC-12 channels of the first and of
the second STM-1.

NBUS E1 channel of Nodal Bus.
The available NBUS values change according to the equipment nodal configuration (see
Tab.14).

The availability of the above mentioned values depends on the type of equipment and on the
equipped tributary streams (see Tab.13).
In the boxes on the radio stream the following values can be present:

Radio 1A Permanent... E1(<radio label>). High priority E1 channels of the Radio 1A.

Radio 1A Extra E1(<radio label>). Low priority E1 channels Radio 1A.

Radio 2A Permanent... E1(<radio label>). High priority E1 channels of the Radio 2A.

Radio 2A Extra E1(<radio label>) Low priority E1 channels Radio 2A.

The Radio 2A value are available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
When an used channel is selected, the connection is displayed represented by a blue line with a
yellow rectangle next where the connection name is reported.
If two lines, one blue (active connection) and one pink (stand-by connection) end to the same tributary channel, this means that the channel is used for a protected connection.
If the user moves the pointer over a channel used for an Auto Loop or for a connection and at least
one of the (radio/tributary) streams involved by the connection is not displayed in the channel area,
the Channel Legend and Link Legend areas are replaced by an area where the connections existing
among channels are dynamically displayed.
A connection is named, at its creation, with the name DEFAULT. The default name can be modified
by the user.
(3)

Visualization Mode area. The parameters present in the Visualization Mode area determine the
streams displayed in the channels area. If the selected option is:

Tributary-Radio. The Channels area contains two different radio stream ad one tributary
streams.

Tributary-Tributary. The Channels area contains two different tributary streams.

If the equipment is not equipped with the radio, the option Tributary-Radio will not be available in
Visualization Mode area, because there are not available E1 Radio channels to realize Tributary-Radio or Pass Through cross-connections.

282

(4)

Delete Connection area. This area displays the trash.

(5)

Channel Legend area. This area displays the colours that determines the status of the channels:

Light grey (Not Used). The channel is not used.

Light purple (Assigned). The channel is used for a Tributary-Tributary, Pass Through or Tributary-Radio connection executed on the equipment (real connection).

Light blue (Auto loop). The channel is used for an Auto-Loop executed on the equipment (real
Auto-Loop).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Dark grey (Delete Request). The connection that used the considered channel has been deleted. The apply command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted yet to
the equipment (connection deletion requested).

Blue (Assign Request).The channel has been selected for a Tributary-Tributary, Pass
Through or Tributary-Radio connection. The apply command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet (connection requested).

Dark green (Auto Loop-Req). The channel has been selected for an Auto-Loop. The apply
command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet
(Auto-Loop requested).

Very dark grey (Unavailable). The channel is used for the transport of the SOH bytes of the
STM-1. If the box contains:

[1]

. The channel is used for the transport of SOH bytes of the first STM-1.

[2]

. The channel is used for the transport of SOH bytes of the second STM-1.

In this condition, the channel cannot be used for the cross-connection.
(6)

(7)

Link Legend area. This area displays the connection colours:

Blue (Active Connection). The blue line indicates the connection currently used.

Pink (Stand-by Connection). The pink line indicates, for the protected connections, the unused connection.

Orange (Pass Through). The orange line indicates the Pass Through connection.

Push-buttons area:

Apply. Make the changes operating.

Refresh. Update the data present in the window: all the changes made to the connections
and not made effective yet are lost.

Close. Close the window.
If you have made at least one modification, to the choice of the push-button a confirmation
message is displayed. Pressing:

Ok. The window is closed and all the changes made to the connections and not confirmed yet (selection of Apply push-button) are lost.

Cancel. The operation is not executed.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

283

Cross connection matrix (info)
WARNING Chapter meaningful only for equipment managing the TDM matrix and with PWE3 function not

available or inactive (see Tab.12).
TDM matrix
Connection Type
E1 channels
Display of the cross-connections
Creation of a cross-connection
Manual deletion of the cross-connections
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections

TDM matrix
Tab.12 lists the ALCplus2e equipment provided with the TDM matrix for the cross connection of the E1
channels with the Radio E1 channels.

Connection Type
The TDM matrix manages the following types of connection:
Unprotected Tributary-Radio. Single connection between a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) and a Radio E1 (Radio Permanent E1/Radio Extra E1).
In case of equipment without radio the connection is not available.
Pass Through. Single connection between two different E1 Radio channels (Radio Permanent E1/
Radio Extra E1).
In case of equipment without radio the connection is not available.
Tributary-Tributary. Single connection between two different tributary channels (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS).
Auto-Loop. Loop of a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or a Radio E1
channel (Radio Permanent E1/Radio Extra E1) on itself.
If the equipment is in 2x(1+0) radio configuration the TDM matrix manages also the connection:
Protected Tributary-Radio. Connection between a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12
STM-1/E1 NBUS) and one E1 of a radio direction (for instance, Radio 1A Permanent E1 or Radio 1A
Extra E1) and a second connection (acting as protection) between the same tributary channel and
one E1 of the other radio direction (for instance, Radio 2A Permanent E1 or Radio 2A Extra E1).
WARNING If a protected NBUS channel is used for a connection (Tributary-Tributary or Tributary-Radio),
the protection connection for this connection is automatically realized by the matrix.

The protected Nodal Bus is available in ALCplus2e equipment in protected nodal configuration (see Configurator).

E1 channels
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the type of equipment and
on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.13).

284

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Tab.13 Ports of the cross-connection matrix

IDUBOARD

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0 (PWE3 FUNCTION
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1

Port

Stream

Exp 32xE1 + Base

Expansion STM-1

(1)

Configuration

Availability

E1

E1 of the base (tributary A
and B) + 32 E1 of the expansion

Always available

STM-1

63 VC-12 channels

Port/channels available when the
management of STM-1 is active

x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)

Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)

Port

Stream
E1

FUNCTION DISABLE)

Configuration
E1 of the base (tributary A
and B) + 16 E1 of the expansion

x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)

Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)

Port/channels available when the
equipment is provided with radio
and the value x is greater than 0

y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)

IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0 (PWE3

Exp 16xE1 + Base

DISABLE)

Availability
Always available

Port/channels available when the
equipment is provided with radio
and the value x is greater than 0

y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 (PWE3 FUNCTION DISABLE)
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 (PWE3 FUNCTION DISABLE)
Port

Stream

Exp 32xE1 + Base

Expansion STM-1

(1)

Configuration

Availability

E1

E1 of the base (tributary A
and B) + 32 E1 of the expansion

Always available

STM-1

63 VC-12 channels

Port/channels available when the
management of STM-1 is active

x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)

Port/channels available when the
equipment is provided with radio
and the value x is greater than 0

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

285

Port

Stream

Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)

Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)

Configuration

y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)

x E1
Radio 2A Permanent E1 Radio 2A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(4)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 2A)
Radio 2A Extra E1
(<radio label>)

Radio 2A
(low priority E1
channels)

Availability

Port/channels available in
2x(1+0) radio configuration and
the value x is greater than 0

y E1
Port/channels available in
y = Value of the parameter 2x(1+0) radio configuration and
TDM Capacity relevant to the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 2A) (3)

IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Port

Stream

Configuration

Availability

Exp. 16xE1 + Base

E1

E1 of the base (tributary A
and B) + 16 E1 of the expansion

Always available

Expansion STM-1 (1)

STM-1

63 VC-12 channels

Port/channels available when the
management of STM-1 is active

NBUS

Nodal Bus

The available NBUS ports change according to the equipment
nodal configuration (see Tab.14).

x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)

Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)

Port/channels available when the
equipment is provided with radio
and the value x is greater than 0

y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)

IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD. 2XSTM-1 16E1
Port

Stream

Configuration

Exp. 16xE1 + Base

E1

E1 of the base (tributary A
and B) + 16 E1 of the expansion

Always available

Expansion STM-1 (1)

STM-1

63 VC-12 channels

Port/channels available when the
management of STM-1 is active

NBUS

Nodal Bus

The available NBUS ports change according to the equipment
nodal configuration (see Tab.14).

x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)

286

Availability

Port/channels available when the
equipment is provided with radio
and the value x is greater than 0

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Port
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)

Stream
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)

Configuration

y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)

x E1
Radio 2A Permanent E1 Radio 2A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(4)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 2A)
Radio 2A Extra E1
(<radio label>)

Radio 2A
(low priority E1
channels)

Availability

Port/channels available in
2x(1+0) radio configuration and
the value x is greater than 0

y E1
Port/channels available in
y = Value of the parameter 2x(1+0) radio configuration and
TDM Capacity relevant to the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 2A) (3)

IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 PWE3 (PWE3 FUNCTION DISABLE)
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 PWE3 (PWE3 FUNCTION DISABLE)
Port
Exp. 16xE1 + Base

Stream
E1

Configuration
E1 of the base (tributary A
and B) + 16 E1 of the expansion

x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)

Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)

Radio 2A
(low priority E1
channels)

Always available

Port/channels available when the
equipment is provided with radio
and the value x is greater than 0

y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)

x E1
Radio 2A Permanent E1 Radio 2A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(4)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 2A)
Radio 2A Extra E1
(<radio label>)

Availability

Port/channels available in
2x(1+0) radio configuration and
the value x is greater than 0

y E1
Port/channels available in
y = Value of the parameter 2x(1+0) radio configuration and
TDM Capacity relevant to the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 2A) (3)

(1)

If the management of two STM-1 is active, the values Expansion STM-1 [1] and Expansion STM-1 [2]
will be available, which respectively point out VC-12 channels of the first and of the second STM-1.
WARNING The STM-1 is not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
(2)

If more than 63 high priority E1 channels are set, in addition to the value Radio 1A Permanent E1 1...63
(<radio label>) (E1 channels 1÷63) will be available the value Radio 1A Permanent E1 64...80 (<radio
label>) (E1 channels 64÷80).
(3)

The order used to display the Radio Extra E1 channels depends on the priority defined by the user
(see BW & Mod./Link ID).
(4)

If more than 63 high priority E1 channels are set, in addition to the value Radio 2A Permanent E1 1...63
(<radio label>) (E1 channels 1÷63) will be available the value Radio 2A Permanent E1 64...80 (<radio
label>) (E1 channels 64÷80).

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

287

Tab.14 NBUS ports of the cross-connection matrix
Nodal system
configuration

TDM nodal
bus
protection

No Nodal
Nodal

(1)

NBUS ports - Cross-connection matrix

-

NBUS port

Stream

Configuration

-

-

-

Not protected NBUS 1 [163]

Nodal Bus 1

NBUS 1 [64126]
NBUS 2 [163]

63 E1 channels (64÷126)
Nodal Bus 2

NBUS 2 [64126]
Protected

(1)

63 E1 channels (1÷63)

63 E1 channels (1÷63)
63 E1 channels (64÷126)

NBUS 1 [163]

Protected Nodal Bus 1

63 protected E1 channels

(2)

NBUS 2 [163]

Protected Nodal Bus 2

63 protected E1 channels

(3)

Node Type: Nodal - Nbr of TDM Elements: value different from No Element (see Configurator).

(2)

The first group of 63 E1 channels (1÷63) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the second group of 63 E1
channels (64÷126) of the Nodal Bus 2. The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group
(E1-1) is protected by the first channel of the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group
(E1-2) is protected by the second channel of the second group (E1-65) and so on.

(3)

The first group of 63 E1 channels (1÷63) of the Nodal Bus 2 is protected by the second group of 63 E1
channels (64÷126) of the Nodal Bus 1. The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group
(E1-1) is protected by the first channel of the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group
(E1-2) is protected by the second channel of the second group (E1-65) and so on.

Display of the cross-connections
The user can display the cross-connections existing in equipment as graphic and as table.
In the first case, the tributary and radio streams are graphically displayed (Cross Connection Matrix window
- see Fig.7).
When a channel involved by a connection is selected, a line is displayed representing the connection. The
edges of the line point out the channels composing the connection.
In the second case, a table is displayed with the list of the existing cross-connections (Cross Connection
List window - see Display the connections of the equipment in table format).
Each row of the table represents a connection where the name, the edge channels and the connection type
are pointed out.
Here below the operations which can be performed in the two displays:

288

GRAPHICAL display (Cross Connection Matrix window):

Verify the connections of the equipment (one at a time).

Execute a connection.

Delete one or more connections.

Enable the loop of a channel (Auto-Loop).

Disable an Auto-Loop.

Verify/modify the name of a connection.

TABLE display (Cross Connection List window):

Verify the list of the connections.

Delete one or more connections at the same time.

Disable one or more Auto-Loop.

Verify the name of the connections.

Save the list of the connections.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Creation of a cross-connection
All the connections in the TDM matrix must be created by the user (see Execute an unprotected TributaryRadio connection, Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection, Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection, Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop).
It is possible to create a connection only in the graphical display (Cross Connection Matrix window).

Manual deletion of the cross-connections
It is possible to delete one or more cross-connections from the graphical display of the connections or from
the table display (see Delete one or more connections).
In both cases, the connections removed in a type of display are automatically removed even from the other
type.

Automatic deletion of the cross-connections
The following operations automatically delete the connections where the (tributary or radio) stream, object
of the change, is terminated:

STM-1 configuration change (STM-1 MST Mode parameter - see Configurator). Passage from
the:

1+0, 1+1 MSP, 2 x (1+0) MST or 1+1 MSP No ALS option to the None.

2 x (1+0) MST option to the 1+0, 1+1 MSP or 1+1 MSP No ALS.

TDM nodal Bus configuration change (see Configurator):

Node Type parameter. Passage from the Nodal option to the No Nodal.

Nbr of TDM Elements parameter. Passage from 2÷8 option to the No Elements.

TDM Nodal Bus Protection parameter (node). Passage from the Not Protected option to
the Protected (only connection on NBUS 1 [64126] and NBUS 2 [64126] ports).

Radio configuration change (Radio parameter - see Configurator). Passage from the:

1+0, 1+1 or 2x(1+0) option to the Unequipped.
2x(1+0) option to the 1+0 or 1+1 (only connection on Radio 2).

Configuration change of the E1 Radio - Permanent channel.
All those operations, executed in the Modulation & Capacity tab, which decrease the number of
high priority E1 channels (Permanent TDM Traffic) (see BW & Mod./Link ID).

Configuration change of the E1 Radio - Extra channel.
All those operations, executed in the Modulation & Capacity tab, which decrease the maximum
number of low priority E1 channels (TDM Capacity) (see BW & Mod./Link ID).
All the operations, executed in the tab Extra TDM Priority, which change the order used to discard the dynamic E1 channels from the adaptive modulation (see BW & Mod./Link ID).

When the alarm monitoring for the 2Mbit/s signals is activated through PDH and SDH rings (see Configurator), if the TDM matrix does not contain any protected Tributary-Radio connections, the existing connections are not deleted.
Otherwise, if at least one protected Tributary-radio connection is present, all the connections are deleted.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

289

Cross Connection (PWE3 function enable)
WARNING Chapter not meaningful for equipment Ethernet Enhanced functionality inactive because this

configuration forbids the activation of the PWE3 function (see Configurator).

290

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Radio E1 Framing
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment in one of the following configurations:

Radio configuration 1+0, 1+1 Hot Standby or 1+1 Freq. Div., with the management of STM-1
active and with the transport of the PDH alarms in the SDH frame enabled (see Configurator).

Radio configuration 2x(1+0).

The Radio E1 Framing command manages the structure of the Radio E1s.
Operations

Verify/modify the structure of the Radio E1s
GUI

Radio E1 Framing contextual area

Verify/modify the structure of the Radio E1s
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Base Band > Radio E1 Framing.
The Radio E1 Framing contextual area displays the structure of the Radio E1s.
2. To change the structure of a E1 Radio group, in its area, press:

Set All E1 As Framed and confirm. The specific E1 Radio group is configured with the framed
structure.

Set All E1 As Unframed and confirm. The specific E1 Radio group is configured with the unframed structure.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

291

Radio E1 Framing contextual area
The contextual area displays the structure of E1 radio.
Parameters

Radio 1A - Permanent E1. Structure of E1 Radio assigned permanently (high priority streams)
to the Radio 1A.
Area available when the equipment is provided with radio and the Permanent TDM Traffic parameter is greater than 0 (see BW & Mod./Link ID).
Radio 1A - Extra E1. Structure of E1 Radio (low priority) to the Radio 1A.
Area available when the equipment is provided with radio and the parameter TDM Capacity relevant to the ACM profile with the highest number of E1, is greater than 0.
Radio 2A - Permanent E1. Structure of E1 Radio assigned permanently (high priority streams)
to the Radio 2A.
Area available when the equipment is in 2x(1+0) radio configuration and the Permanent TDM
Traffic parameter is greater than 0.
Radio 2A - Extra E1. Structure of E1 Radio (low priority) to the Radio 2A.
Area available when the equipment is in 2x(1+0) radio configuration and the parameter TDM
Capacity relevant to the ACM profile with the highest number of E1, is greater than 0.
Status. In every area, the parameter indicates the number of available specific Radio E1. For
every channel, the:

Inactive box (

Active box (

) indicates that the Radio E1 has not the structure framed.
) indicates that the Radio E1 has the structure framed.

Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Set All E1 As Framed. Configure with the framed structure, the specific E1 Radio group.
Set All E1 As Unframed. Configure with the unframed structure, the specific E1 Radio group.
See also

Verify/modify the structure of the Radio E1s

292

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

RADIO

Radio Branch. It manages the radio parameters.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

293

Radio Branch
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio.

For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Radio Branch 1A command. For the equipment in
1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration are present the Radio Branch 1A (branch 1 radio parameters) and Radio
Branch 2A (branch 2 radio parameters) commands.
The Radio Branch command manages the radio parameters.
Operations

Verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only)
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter)
Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply (RT PSU)
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Reference Modulation Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation)
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local
PRx)
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every
ACM profile
GUI

Radio Branch contextual area

Verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING This operation does NOT automatically modify also the RF channel of the remote equipment.

In 1+1 Hot Standby or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done
also on the other branch.
1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
The Frequency/Channel selection parameter indicates the RF channel expressed as channel number
and relevant frequency.
The wording:

Channel Not Set indicates that for the specific radio a channel is not planned.

Hardware Failure indicates a hardware problem. E.g. check that the connection cable between
the IDU and the ODU is not failure or missing.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
The frequency values change according to the equipment connected with the program.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

294

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Deactivating the modulation (option On) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
The Carrier Only parameter indicates the modulation status of the RF carrier:

On. The carrier is not modulated.

Off. The carrier is modulated.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are deactivating the modulation (selection of the On option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The modulation deactivation of the carrier activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the previous setting.

Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Switching the transmitter off (option Off) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

The permanent switch-off of the transmitter (option Permanent Off) is NOT a maintenance operation, so
the selection of this value is not subjected to the Timeout of MAN OP and the setting is not lost after a
controller restart.
1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
The Tx Transmitter parameter indicates the operation of the transmitter:

On. The transmitter is turned on.

Off. The transmitter is turned off.

Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The turning off of the transmitter activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and,
then, switched on, the transmitter is on, independently from the previous setting.

Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Switching the power supply off (option Off) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
The RT PSU parameter indicates the operation of the RT power supply:

On. The RT power supply is on.

Off. The RT power supply is off.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

295

Only if you are switching off the RT (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are executing
a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The deactivation of the RT power supply activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the power supply of RT is active, independently from the previous setting.

Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
The Prx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of
the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx
change).
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
The Ptx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of
the power transmitted by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx
change).
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
2. Select the Powers tab.
The Reference Modulation Tx Power Control area indicates the functioning status of the ATPC:

Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
In this condition, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (Max Ptx cursor).

Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
In this condition, the transmitted power is automatically adjusted according to the level of the
signal at reception.
The thresholds of the ATPC device can be configured (see Verify/modify the threshold of the
ATPC device). Then, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (see Verify/modify the
maximum output power value at the transmitter).

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

296

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING In 1+1 Hot Standby configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
2. Select the Powers tab.
The Max Ptx: <current value> dBm parameter indicates the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Ptx nominal value).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Reference Modu-

lation Tx Power Control parameter - Automatic value).
In 1+1 Hot Standby or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done
also on the other branch.
1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
2. Select the Powers tab.
The ATPC Regulation: <current value> dB parameter indicates the range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper
limit of the range.
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING In 1+1 Hot Standby or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automat-

ically done also on the other branch.
In 1+1 Freq. Div. configuration the changes, to be active, must be set in both branches.
1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
2. Select the Powers tab.
In the Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx area the threshold of the ATPC is pointed out:

High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set threshold
value.

Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold value.

3. To change the threshold move the High and/or Low cursor to the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

297

Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
2. Select the Powers tab.
In the Current ATPC Power area the table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM
profile is displayed.
Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:

Active Modulation. ACM profile

Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter

RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.

Press Refresh to update the table.

298

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Radio Branch contextual area
WARNING For equipment in 1+0 configuration, the Radio Branch 1A command is present, which opens

the Radio Branch 1A contextual area.
For equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration, the Radio Branch 1A command, which opens the Radio
Branch 1A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio branch 1, and Radio Branch 2A
command, which opens the Radio Branch 2A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio
branch 2, are present.
The contextual area displays the radio parameters.
Tabs

Settings tab. Radio parameters: RF channel, measurements resolutions, carrier only, Tx transmitter and RT PSU.
Powers tab. Radio parameters: ATPC.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Settings tab
The tab displays the radio parameters (RF channel, measurements resolutions, carrier only, Tx transmitter
and RT PSU).
Parameters

Frequency/Channel selection. RF channel: <frequency> MHz - Ch: <channel number>.
The wording:

Channel Not Set indicates that for the specific radio a channel is not planned.

Hardware Failure indicates a hardware problem. E.g. check that the connection cable
between the IDU and the ODU is not failure or missing.

Measurements Resolution. Resolution of the power received (Prx) and transmitted (Ptx):

Ptx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the
equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated Ptx
value corresponds to 10 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the
changing of the transmitted power when the Ptx gets a value < 8 or > 12.

Prx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated PRx
value corresponds to -70 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the
changing of the transmitted power when the PRx gets a value <-72 or > -68.

RT PSU. Operating status of the RT power supply:

On. The RT power supply is on.

Off. The RT power supply is off.

Tx Transmitter. Operating status of the transmitter:

On. The transmitter is turned on.

Off. The transmitter is turned off.

Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.

Carrier Only. Modulation status of the RF carrier:

On. The carrier is not modulated.

Off. The carrier is modulated.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

299

See also

Verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only)
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter)
Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply (RT PSU)
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)

Powers tab
The tab displays the radio parameters (ATPC).
Parameters

Reference Modulation Tx Power Control. Operating status of the ATPC device:

Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).

Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.

Max Ptx <current value> dBm. Maximum output power value at the transmitter. The parameter affects the ATPC device as when it is in manual functioning mode as in automatic one.
ATPC Regulation <current value> dB. Range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with
respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper limit of the
range.
Parameter available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Reference Modulation Tx Power Control parameter - Automatic value).
Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx. ATPC thresholds:

High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than
the set threshold value

Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted
power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the
set threshold value.

Current ATPC Power. The table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM
profile.
Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:

Active Modulation. ACM profile.

Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter

RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.

Push-button

Refresh. Update the table.
See also

Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Reference Modulation Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation)
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local
PRx)

300

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

MAINTENANCE

Lan Statistics. It manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying all the counters of
packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.
Lan Stat. Summary. It manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying, at the same
time, the main counters of packets/bytes in input/output for each port.
OAM. It manages the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
S/N Meas. It displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N).
PRBS. It manages the PRBS device.
Radio Loop. It manages the radio loops.
Radio Switch. It manages the radio switch.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

301

Lan Statistics
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The Lan Statistics command manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying all the
counters of packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.
The count of a counter is cyclic and always active.
The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32: when this limit is reached, the count
restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
Counters are compliant to specification RFC 2819 except for the counter Byte Received which does not include the bytes belonging to packets with size over the Max Packet Size.
Operations

Verify the counters of the Ethernet ports subdivided by each port
Reset the counters’ results
Activate/deactivate the division by 1000 of the counter results
GUI

Lan Statistics contextual area

Verify the counters of the Ethernet ports subdivided by each port
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > Lan Statistics.
The Lan Statistics contextual area displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying all
the counters of packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.

Reset the counters’ results
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > Lan Statistics.
2. Press Reset and confirm.
All the counters of all the Ethernet ports are set to zero.

Activate/deactivate the division by 1000 of the counter results
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > Lan Statistics.
The parameter Divide by 1000 indicates if the results of the counters are divided by 1000 or not.
The active box ( ) indicates that the results are divided by 1000; the inactive box indicates that the
results are not divided by 1000.
2. To change a parameter, check or uncheck the box and confirm.

302

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Lan Statistics contextual area
The contextual area shows the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying all the counters of packets/bytes in input/output.
The count of a counter is cyclic and always active.
The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32: when this limit is reached, the count
restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
Counters are compliant to specification RFC 2819 except for the counter Byte Received which does not include the bytes belonging to packets with size over the Max Packet Size.
Parameters

Box. Port which the counters refer with corresponding value.
It is possible to display the counters of a single port at a time. To display the counters of a different Ethernet port, set the wished port in the box.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.11).
The value of the each counter refers to the moment when the relevant port is selected or the
context is updated.
Divide by 1000. This box indicates if the results of the counters are divided by 1000. Box:

Active ( ). The results are divided by 1.000. Next to the counter name, whose result
is divided, the wording (x1000) is displayed.

Inactive. The results are not divided by 1000.

Dropped Frame. Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the probe
due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets,
as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of
the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes.
Total Byte Received. Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received
on the network. This value includes 4 FCS octets.
Total Frame Received. Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets,
and multicast packets) received.
Broadcast Frame Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. This does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Frame Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to a
multicast address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
CRC Align Errors. Total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and n
(parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets with bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a no-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Frame. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and
were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Frame. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max
Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets and were otherwise well formed.
Fragments. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a
bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size,
it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with
an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a no-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.
Frame 64 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
and transmitted that were 64 octets in length.
Frame 65 to 127 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive.
Frame 128 to 255 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets)
received and transmitted that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

303

Frame 256 to 511 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets)
received and transmitted that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive.
Frame 512 to 1023 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets)
received and transmitted that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive.
Frame 1024 to max pck size [Sent+Received]. Total number of transmitted and received
packets with a length greater than 1024 octets (incorrect packets included).
Late Collisions. Evaluation relevant to the total number of collisions detected in this EthLannet
segment, after the transmission of more than 512 bits from the beginning of TXEnable.
Valid Byte Received. Total number of received bytes relevant to correct packets. This counter
is increased once for every data octet of good packets (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
Byte Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data octet of
a transmitted good packet.
Valid Frame Received. Number of received correct frames. This counter is increased once for
every good packet (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
Frame Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every transmitted good packet.
Out Multicast Frame. Number of Multicast frames sent. This counter does not include Broadcast packets.
Out Broadcast Frame. Number of Broadcast frames sent.
Out Unicast Frame. Number of Unicast frames sent. This is given by: Frame Sent - Out Multicast Frame - Out Broadcast Frame.
In Pause Frame. Number of good Flow Control frames received.
Out Pause Frame. Number of Flow Control frames sent.
Push-button

Refresh. Update the counters’ results.
Reset. Reset the counters’ results.
Help. Open the help on-line.

304

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Lan Stat. Summary
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The Lan Stat. Summary command manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying, at
the same time, the main counters of packets/bytes in input/output for every port.
The count of a counter is cyclic and always active.
The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32: when this limit is reached, the count
restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
Counters are compliant to specification RFC 2819 except for the counter Byte Received which does not include the bytes belonging to packets with size over the Max Packet Size.
Operations

Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports
Reset the counters’ results
GUI

Lan Stat. Summary contextual area

Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > Lan Stat. Summary.
The Lan Stat. Summary contextual area displays the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet
ports.

Reset the counters’ results
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > Lan Stat. Summary.
2. Press Reset All and confirm.
All the counters of all the Ethernet ports are set to zero.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

305

Lan Stat. Summary contextual area
The contextual area, displays the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports.
Every table row corresponds to a counter.
The count of a counter is cyclic and always active.
The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32: when this limit is reached, the count
restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
Counters are compliant to specification RFC 2819 except for the counter Byte Received which does not include the bytes belonging to packets with size over the Max Packet Size.
Parameters

Parameter. Counter name:

Byte Received (Total Byte Received). Total number of octets of data (including those
in bad packets) received on the network. This value includes 4 FCS octets.

Frame Received (Total Frame Received). Total number of packets (including bad
packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.

Byte Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data
octet of a transmitted good packet.

Frame Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every
transmitted good packet.

Dropped Frame. Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by
the probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number
of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition
occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded
also for other causes.

CRC Err. (CRC Align Errors). Total number of packets received that had a length of
between 64 and n (parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets
with bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error)
or a bad FCS with a no-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4, Port A, Port B. Value of the counters with respect to every single
port of the Ethernet Switch.
The value of each counter refer to the moment when the context is opened or updated.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.11).
The presence, next to the name of a port, of the wording:

(Brx), indicates that the Spanning Tree protocol is enabled for the specific port. The
value x indicates the Bridge which it belongs to.

(Elpx), indicates that the Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment)
is enabled for the specific port (only LANs). The value x indicates the protection
group.

(ElpNx), indicates that the Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node) is enabled
for the specific port (only LANs). The value x indicates the protection group.

(Trkx), indicates that the Trunking mode is enabled for the specific port (only LANs).
The value x indicates the aggregation group.

Push-button

Refresh. Update the counters’ results.
Reset All. Reset the counters’ results.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)

306

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

OAM
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the ETH OAM Functionality is enabled.

Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more
features can be enabled.
The OAM command manages the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment, the maintenance points of the OAMFM Domain, which the equipment belongs to, and allows monitoring the path of a service instance (VLAN)
by using the Continuity Check (CCM), LoopBack (LBM) and Link Trace (LTM) messages.
Operations

OAM-FM DOMAIN
Verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment
Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment
Remove the OAM-FM Domain of equipment
WARNING ALCplus2e equipment manages a single Domain. The name or the level of an
OAM-FM Domain associated to equipment cannot be modified. To change one or both the
parameters, it is necessary to remove the current Domain and to define a new one.

MAINTENANCE POINTS
Verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality
Associate a MA to a VLAN
Associate a MEP to a VLAN
Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN
WARNING The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA. In fact, the
definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic
definition of a MIP for every Switch port which the specific VLAN is enabled for.

CCM

MESSAGES MANAGEMENT

Enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP
Modify the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP
REMOTE MEP

TABLE

Verify the table of remote MEPs (RMep table)
Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table
Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table
Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table
Remove a remote MEP from RMep table
LBM

AND

LTM

MESSAGES MANAGEMENT

Send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP
Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of the
same VLAN
GUI

OAM contextual area
See also

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

307

Verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
The Domain parameter indicates the name of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment.
The Level parameter indicates the level of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment.
If the fields are empty and available for the setting, this means that no OAM-FM Domain is defined for
the equipment.

Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Before to define an OAM domain, checks that the control of the 802.1Q Tag for the LANs is ac-

tivated (Ingress Filtering Check parameter- value different from Disable 802-1Q).
1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Into the Domain box, type the OAM-FM Domain name of the equipment (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters).
3. Into the Level box, type a number between 0 and 7 according to the priority level you wish to assign
to the OAM-FM Domain (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
4. Press Create and confirm.
The equipment is associated to the set OAM-FM Domain.
In the contextual area, the OAM-FM MA/MEP table is displayed.

Remove the OAM-FM Domain of equipment
Access | Read & Write
WARNING An OAM-FM Domain cannot be removed if at least one MA is present.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Press Remove and confirm.
The equipment is not associated to an OAM-FM Domain any more.
In the contextual area, the OAM-FM MA/MEP table is removed.

Verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the OAM-FM Domain has been defined for the equipment.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
The OAM-FM MA/MEP table displays the status of the VLANs in relation to the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
The empty table means that no VLAN has been defined for the equipment (see Verify the existing virtual
LANs).

308

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Associate a MA to a VLAN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING ALCplus2e equipment manages a MA for every single VLAN.

A MA can be associated to a VLAN even during the creation of a MEP (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN).
The definition of a MA for a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP for every Switch port which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN which you wish to associate the MA to.
3. Press Bind MA.
4. Set, in the MA Name box, the name you wish to assign to the Maintenance Association (alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 15 characters).
The system suggests, in the box, the name of the VLAN to which you are assigning the MA. This name
can be changed at one’s wish.
5. Press Ok and confirm.
In the OAM-FM MA/MEP table, for the selected VLAN, the MA just created is pointed out (MA Name column).

Associate a MEP to a VLAN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING ALCplus2e equipment manages a single MEP per MA/VLAN and the maximum number of MEP is

32.
1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN which you wish to associate the MEP to.
A MEP can be associated to a VLAN which a MA has not been associated to yet or to a VLAN which a
MA is already associated to. In this last case, the port of the Ethernet Switch which the MEP will be
associated to, will be automatically converted from intermediate maintenance point (MIP) to end maintenance point (MEP).
3. Press Bind MEP.
4. Set, in the box MEP Id, the identifying number you wish to assign to MEP (value between 1 and 8191).
The system suggests, in the box, the identifying number of the VLAN which you are assigning the MEP
to. This value can be changed at one’s wish.
The identifying number of MEP must be univocal in the network for every specific VLAN.
5. Set, in the box MA Name, the name you wish to assign to the MA which MEP belongs to (alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 15 characters).
The system suggests, in the box, the name of the VLAN which you are assigning the MEP to. This name
can be changed at one’s wish.
If a MA has been already assigned to the VLAN (see Associate a MA to a VLAN), the parameter will be
already set and cannot be changed.
6. Set, in the box CCM Interval, the time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check messages (CCM):

1s. 1 second.

10s. 10 seconds (default value).

1m. 1 minute.

10m. 10 minutes.

Remember that, for a correct operation of the continuity check, the set CCM interval must be the same
for the MEPs of the same VLAN.
7. Set, in the box LAN(s), the Ethernet port where you wish to map the MEP.
The description of the values the same depicted for the OAM-FM MA/MEP table.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

309

The ports of the Ethernet Switch not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of
the specific VLAN cannot be selected (disabled port).
If the equipment if an Ethernet element of a node, the LAN 1 and LAN 2, even if enabled to the transit
of the packets, cannot be selected because not available for the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
8. Set, in the box Direction, the direction where you wish to send the CCM messages:

Up ( ). CCM messages are sent, as they were in input from the considered port, to the other
Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.

Down (

). CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.

9. Press Ok and confirm.
In the OAM-FM MA/MEP table, for the selected VLAN, the MA and/or MEP just created (MA Name, MEP
ID column).
The contextual area is expanded showing the RMEP tab, the LBM tab and the LTM tab.
If the message The selected port is neither aggregated (TRUNK/LAG) or electrically protected (ELP) is
displayed, the creation of MEP is failed because the Trunking modality (see Trunking mode (info)) or
the ELP modality (see Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)) is enabled for the selected port.

Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN to which you wish to remove the MA/MEP.
3. Press Unbind and confirm.
In the OAM-FM MA/MEP table, for the selected VLAN, the MA/MEP indication is removed.

Enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
For the VLAN which a MEP is associated to, the CCM Status column (OAM-FM MA/MEP table) displays
the transmission status of the CCM messages.
2. To modify the transmission status of the CCM messages of a MEP, select the relevant box and then the
option:

Enable. The transmission of CCM messages is enabled.

Disable. The transmission of CCM messages is disabled.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
For the VLAN which a MEP is associated to, the CCM Int. column (OAM-FM MA/MEP table) displays the
time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages.
2. To modify the interval relevant of a MEP, select the relevant box and then the option:

310

1s. 1 second.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

10s. 10 seconds (default value).

1m. 1 minute.

10m. 10 minutes.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the table of remote MEPs (RMep table)
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the local MEP whose relevant list of Remote MEPs you wish to
display.
The RMEP tab displays the RMep table.

Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the local MEP whose relevant list of Remote MEPs you wish to
display.
3. Press Add MEP.
4. Set, in the box MEP Id, the identifying number you wish to assign to the remote MEP (value between
1 and 8191).
The identifying number of a MEP must be univocal in the network for each specific VLAN.
5. Press Ok and confirm.
A row with the new remote MEP in status Idle is added to the RMEP tab.
The operations the user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Idle and the conditions causing
the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another are depicted in Fig.9.
The MAC Address of the remote MEPs inserted by the operator is set to value zero.

Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the local MEP whose relevant list of Remote MEPs you wish to
display.
3. Select, in the RMEP tab, the remote MEPs in status Start or Idle you wish to enable.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
4. Press Cross Check and confirm
The status of the selected remote MEPs changes from Start to Conn or from Idle to Start (see Fig.9).
If the operation is not executed (the status of the remote MEP continues to be Start or Idle) and the
alarm OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id: <local MEP identifier> Config. Mismatch Alarm is active, this

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

311

means that the considered remote MEP has raised or has contribute to raise the alarm because one of
its configuration parameters (Domain name, MA name or CCM interval) is different from the corresponding parameter set for the local MEP.
Align the configuration of remote MEP with that of the local MEP and repeat this procedure to enable
the remote MEP.

Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the local MEP whose relevant list of Remote MEPs you wish to
display.
3. Select, in the RMEP tab, the remote MEPs in status Conn. you wish to disable.
4. Press Remove and confirm.
The status of the selected remote MEPs changes from Conn. to Start.

Remove a remote MEP from RMep table
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the local MEP whose relevant list of Remote MEPs you wish to
display.
3. Select, in the RMEP tab, the remote MEPs in status Failed, Start or Idle you wish to remove.
4. Press Remove and confirm.
The selected remote MEPs are removed from the RMep table.

Send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the MEP from which you wish to sent the LBM message.
3. Select the LBM tab.
4. Set the maintenance point, which you wish to send the LBM message, in one of the following modes:

Select the option Use Found MEP.
Select, in the Remote MEP Selection table, the remote MEP in status Conn. which you wish to
send the LTM messages to.
If you select a MEP in status Start or Failed, the operation is refused.

Select the option Use MAC Address.
Set, in the box MAC Address, the physical address of the equipment where there is the remote
MEP or the MIP which you wish to send the LoopBack message to.

312

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

5. Set, in the box Messages to Send, the number of LoopBack messages you wish to send (value between1
and 5).
6. Press Run Test and confirm.
During the operation, the box:

Test Status displays the wording Running.

Sent Messages displays the progress of the number of sent messages (meaningful if a value different from 1 is set in the box Messages to Send).

At the end of the operation, the box/area:

Statistics indicates the statistics of the LBRs messages (LoopBack Replies - LBM messages received by the maintenance point as reply to the sent LBM messages) (see LBM tab).

Test Status displays the test result (see LBM tab).

Sent Messages indicates the number of sent LBM messages.

Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of the
same VLAN
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the MEP from which you wish to sent the LTM messages to trace
the path between the local MEP and a remote MEP of the same VLAN.
3. Select the LTM tab.
The Link Trace area indicates, if available, the last traced Link Trace.
4. Set the remote MEP, which you wish to send the LTM messages to, in one of the following modes:

Select the option Use Found MEP.
Select, in the Found MEP(s) & Selection table, the remote MEP in status Conn. which you wish
to send the LTM messages to.
If you select a MEP in status Start or Failed, the operation is refused.

Select the option Use MAC Address.
Set, in the box MAC Address, the physical address of the equipment containing the remote MEP
which you wish to send the Link Trace messages to.

5. Press Run Test and confirm.
At the end of the operation, the Link Trace area displays the list of the MAC Addresses of MIP-MEP
crossed to reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in Hops from the source MEP.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

313

OAM contextual area
The contextual area shows the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment, the maintenance points of the OAM-FM
Domain, which the equipment belongs to, and allows monitoring the path of a service instance (VLAN) by
using the Continuity Check (CCM), LoopBack (LBM) and Link Trace (LTM) messages.
Parameters/Tabs

OAM-FM Domain area. OAM-FM Domain configuration.
OAM-FM MA/MEP table. Status and configuration of the VLANs in relation to the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
RMEP tab. Remote MEPs table.
LBM tab. LoopBack messages configuration.
LTM tab. Link Trace messages configuration.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info)

OAM-FM Domain area
The area shows the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment.
Parameters

Domain. Name of the OAM-FM Domain.
Level. Level of the OAM-FM Domain:

0. Lowest priority.

7. Highest priority.

If the fields are empty and available for the setting, this means that no OAM-FM Domain is defined for the equipment.
Push-button

Create. Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment.
Remote. Remove the OAM-FM Domain of equipment.

OAM-FM MA/MEP table
WARNING Table available only if the OAM-FM Domain has been defined.

The table shows the status of the VLANs in relation to the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
Every row of the table corresponds to one VLAN.
Parameters

Label. VLAN identifier and name.
MA Name. Name of the MA associated to the VLAN.
If the field has a valid value, a MA is associated to the VLAN (VLAN for which the control of the
service instance is active - intermediate maintenance point).

314

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

If the field has value ---, no MA/MEP is associated to the VLAN (VLAN for which the control of
the service instance is not active).
MEP ID. Identifier of the MEP associated to the VLAN.
If the field has a valid value, a MA and a MEP area associated to the VLAN (VLAN for which the
control of the service instance is active - end maintenance point).
If the field has value ---, no MEP is associated to the VLAN.
CCM Status. Transmission status of CCM messages:

Enable. The transmission of CCM messages is enabled.

Disable. The transmission of CCM messages is not enabled.

CCM Int. Transmission interval of CCM messages:

1s. 1 second.

10s. 10 seconds (default value).

1min. 1 minute.

10min. 10 minutes.

LAN.../Port.... Status of the ports of the Ethernet Switch as regards the transit of packets with
VLan ID equal to that of the VLAN:

----. The port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan.

Tagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:

Of priority; the value is defined in the box Default Priority of the origin port of
the packet itself.

Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the
origin port of the packet.

Untagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in output from the port.

Unmodified. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to
that of the virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed
or added to the packets in output from the port.

If a MEP is mapped on a port, the direction where the CCM messages are transmitted is pointed
out:

( ). The CCM messages are sent as they were in input from the considered or to the
other Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.

(

). The CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.

The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.11).
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the LAN 1 and LAN 2 will not be present as not
available for the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
Push-button

Bind MA. Associate a MA to a VLAN.
Bind MEP. Associate a MEP to a VLAN.
Unbind. Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN.
The availability of the push-buttons depends on the status of the selected VLAN. If a MA or a
MEP is associated to the VLAN, only the Unbind push-button will be available. On the other
hand, if no MA or MEP is associated to the VLAN, the Bind MA and Bind MEP push-buttons will
be available.
The identifier and the name of the selected VLan are dynamically displayed next to the pushbuttons, between square brackets.
See also

Enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP
Modify the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

315

RMEP tab
WARNING Tab available only if the selected VLAN has a MEP associated.

The tab shows the table of Remote MEPs (RMep table).
Every line of the table represents a remote MEP.
Parameters

MEP Id. Identifier of the remote MEP.
MAC Address. MAC address (Media Access Control) of the equipment where the remote MEP is
present.
The field value equal to zero means that remote MEP has been manually inserted by the operator
and local MEP has not received a CCM message from the specific remote MEP yet (see Fig.9).
MEP State. Status of the remote MEP:

Idle. Initial status of the remote MEP just after its manual insertion in table.

Start. Initial status of the remote MEP just after it is manually inserted in the table or
status assumed by the remote MEP after it is enabled (remote MEP manually inserted)
or disabled.

Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches after an enabling command or after the first
CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP.

Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when local MEP does not receive (along a period of 2,5 times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP.

The operations the user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start, Conn. or Failed and
the conditions which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another are depicted
in Fig.9.
RDI State. Alarm status of the remote MEP acquired from the field RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) present in the CCM messages:

Active. The remote MEP is alarmed.

Not Active. The remote MEP is not alarmed.

Parameter meaningful only for the remote MEPs in status Conn.
Push-button

Add MEP. Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table.
Cross Check. Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table.
Remove. Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table or Remove a remote MEP from RMep table.
Refresh. Update the information present in the table.
The identifier and the name of the selected VLan are dynamically displayed next to the pushbuttons, between square brackets.

LBM tab
WARNING Tab available only if the selected VLAN has a MEP associated.

The tab shows the parameters for the management of LoopBack (LBM) messages.
Parameters

Remote MEP Selection area. This area contains the parameters to set the maintenance point
which the LBM must be transmitted to:

316

Table. Each row of the table represents a remote MEP. For each remote MEP is displayed in the column:

ID. Identifier of the remote MEP.

MAC Address. MAC address of the equipment where the remote MEP is present.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

State. Status of remote MEP. The description of the status of remote MEP is
the same depicted in Fig.9.

Table available only if the option Use Found MEP is selected.

MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment containing the remote maintenance
points.

Parameter available only if the option Use MAC Address is selected.

Selection. Maintenance point:

Use Found MEP. Remote MEP selected in the table present in the Remote MEP
Selection area.

Use MAC Address. Remote MEP or MIP present in the equipment whose physical address is set in MAC Address field.

Test area. This area contains the parameters necessary to set the test execution modality, the
result and the relevant statistics:

Messages to Send. Number of LoopBack messages you wish to send.

Sent Messages. During the test displays the progress of the number of sent messages
(meaningful if a value different from 1 is set in the box Messages to Send).

Statistics. At the end of the test, this area indicates the statistics of the LBRs messages (LoopBack Replies - LBM messages received by the maintenance point as reply
to the sent LBM messages):

Valid. Number of received valid packets.

Out Of Order. Number of packets received out of sequence.

Bad MSDU. Number of received packets with unknown format.

Test Status. Status/result of the test. Box with colour/wording:

Yellow - Running. Test in progress.

Green - OK. Test completed with positive result: the maintenance point has
correctly replied to the LBM messages (OAM-FM packets) sent by the local
MEP.

Red - Failed. Test completed with negative result: the maintenance point has
not correctly replied to the LBM messages (OAM-FM packets) sent by the local
MEP.

Grey - Stopped. Test not in progress.

Push-button

Run Test. Send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP.
Refresh. Update the context.
The identifier and the name of the selected VLan are dynamically next to the push-buttons, between square brackets.

LTM tab
WARNING Tab available only if the selected VLAN has a MEP associated.

The tab shows the parameters for the management of Link Trace (LTM) messages.
Parameters

Found MEP(s) & Selection area. This area contains the parameters used to set the remote
MEP which the Link Trace messages must be transmitted to:

Table. Each row of the table represents a remote MEP. For each remote MEP is displayed in the column:

ID. Identifier of the remote MEP.

MAC Address. MAC address of the equipment where the remote MEP is present.

State. Status of remote MEP. The description of the status of remote MEP is
the same depicted in Fig.9.

Table available only if the option Use Found MEP is selected.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

317

MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment containing the remote MEP.
Parameter available only if the option Use MAC Address is selected.

Selection. Maintenance point:

Use Found MEP. Remote MEP selected in the table present in the Found MEP(s)
& Selection area.

Use MAC Address. Remote MEP present in the equipment whose physical address is set in the MAC Address field.

Link Trace area. At the end of the operation, the Link Trace area displays the list of the MAC
Addresses of MIP-MEP crossed to reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in
Hops from the source MEP:

Table. List with the identifiers of the RMeps which has replied to the LTM message.
Column:

[RMEP] MAC. Type of maintenance point, identifier (only for MEPs) and physical address of the equipment where the maintenance point is present:

[*] <physical address>. Intermediate maintenance point (MIP) and MAC
address of the equipment where MIP is present.

[<identifier>] <physical address>. End maintenance point (MEP), relevant
identifier and MAC address of the equipment containing the MEP.

Hops. Position of the specific maintenance point with respect to the local MEP:

1. First maintenance point after the local MEP.

2. Second maintenance point after the local MEP.

3. Third maintenance point after the local MEP and so on.

When the heading of the column is selected, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumerical order with respect to the Hops column and the arrow with
the tip upwards is displayed. On the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing
order (the arrow with the tip downwards is displayed) an so on.

Destination MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment containing the remote
MEP.

Destination MEP ID. Identifier of the remote MEP.

Push-button

Run Test. Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of
the same VLAN.
Refresh. Update the context.
The identifier and the name of the selected VLan are dynamically next to the push-buttons, between square brackets.

318

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info)

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by WEB CT
OAM-FM

ELEMENTS

OAM-FM Domain
MA (Maintenance Association)
MEP (Maintenance End Point)
MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point)
Remote MEPs
CCM (Continuity Check Message)
LBM (LoopBack Message)
LTM (Link Trace Message)
Example of configuration of a OAM-FM Domain for a set of ALCplus2e equipment

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality
The OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) Ethernet functionality represents the set of processes, activities, rules, etc. which allow managing the operation, the monitoring and the fixing of troubles
in the Ethernet network.
These services are defined by the following reference specifications, which you must refer to for the detailed description of the OAM Ethernet functionality:

ITU-T Recommendation Y.1731 - OAM Functions and Mechanisms for Ethernet based Networks.

IEEE Standard 802.1ag - IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks – Virtual
Bridged Local Area Networks – Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management.

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by WEB CT
Among the above mentioned specifications, ALCplus2e equipment implement the functionality relevant to
Connectivity Fault Management (CFM).
This functionality has the purpose to monitor, in a Layer-2 Ethernet network, the end to end availability of
a service (implemented by a VLAN) and to monitor, in case of out-of-service, tools (LoopBack and Link
Trace) helping the operator in the analysis of the trouble.
Through WEB CT application of ALCplus2e, it is possible:

Define the network segment to monitor:

Define, for each VLAN (service) configured on the equipment, the maintenance points necessary
to diagnostic the connection troubles within a maintenance Domain:

Define the OAM-FM Domain of maintenance (name and level).

Define, for every service (VLAN), a Maintenance Association (MA) to monitor.

Define the end points to monitor the maintenance area (MEP).

Define the intermediate monitoring points of the maintenance area (MIP).

Manage, for every local MEP, the relevant table of Remote MEPs (RMep table).

Manage the Continuity Check Messages (CCM) which allow monitoring end-to-end a service instance (VLAN) pointing out any interruption.

Manage the LoopBack Messages (LBM) which, after the detection of a fault, allow isolating the
point where the fault occurred.

Manage the Link Trace Messages (LTM) which allow tracing the path followed by an OAM-FM
packet between two different MEPs within the same VLAN.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

319

OAM-FM Domain
The term OAM-FM Domain defines a network or a part of a network owned and managed by a single entity
(operator) and where the connection troubles can be managed.
The OAM-FM Domain is characterized by a name and a layer.
The name identifies the Domain.
The layer is used to define the hierarchical relationship among Domains. Greatest is the Domain, highest
will be the layer. In fact, the layer corresponds to a value from 0 to 7, where 0 represents the lowest layer
(lowest priority) and 7 the highest layer (higher priority).
All the other entities defined by OAM refer to the Domain: MA, MIP and MEP.
ALCplus2e equipment manages a single OAM-FM Domain.
The OAM-FM Domain must be defined in any equipment you wish to belong to the same OAM-FM maintenance segment (see Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment).
Once an OAM-FM Domain has been defined, its name or layer cannot be changed. To do this, the Domain
must be removed and a new one must be created with the new values.
An OAM-FM Domain cannot be removed if at least one VLAN exists, which one MA has been defined for.
This Domain is transparent as regards the OAM-FM messages with higher priority (messages to/from the
higher Domains), while stops all the messages with lower priority (messages to/from lower Domains).

MA
The term MA (Maintenance Association) identifies the service (VLAN) you wish to monitor.
Then, a Maintenance Association is coupled to a user-defined VLAN; creating a MA means enabling the control of the specified VLAN.
Within a specific OAM-FM Domain, there are as many MAs as the VLANs the user wishes to monitor.
ALCplus2e equipment manages one MA per each VLAN.
On equipment the definition of a MA can be executed by the user, through a specific command (see Associate a MA to a VLAN), or by the system, once the user has defined a MEP (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN).
The definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP per every single port of the Switch which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
Once a MA has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, the MA must be removed from the
VLAN and a new MA must be created with the new values.
The removal of a MA involves even the automatic removal of the MEP, if present, from the VLAN.

MEP
The term MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines the entity, associated to a specific service instance (VLAN),
representing the end point of a MA.
Fig.8 shows an example.
MEP can generate and terminate OAM-FM messages regarding the fault management and the performance
monitoring.
In fact, MEP is the entity set for the control of the service (VLAN) as, within the OAM-FM maintenance segment, the set of MEPs created in the end points of a VLAN allows controlling the correct end to end operation of the VLANs.
The control is achieved by means of the periodic transmission, by each MEP, of the CCM messages and of
the control of the reception of the same messages by the Remote MEPs.
ALCplus2e equipment manages a single MEP per each MA (VLAN) and a maximum of 32 MEPs (32 MA/
VLAN).
MEP must be defined only in ALCplus2e equipment acting as end points of the same VLAN (see Associate
a MEP to a VLAN).
The definition of a MEP for a VLAN involves even the automatic definition of the MA, if this has not been
already done.

320

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

The definition of a MEP requires the setting of:

A numeric identifier, which must be univocal within the network for the specific VLAN.

The name of the relevant MA (only if not already defined).

The time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check messages (CCM).
Once MEP has been created, the transmission of the CCM messages is disabled. They must be
enabled by the user (see Enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP).

The port of the Ethernet Switch, where you wish to map the MEP, and the direction to which you
wish to send the CCMs:

Up ( ). CCM messages are sent, as they were in input from the considered port, to the
other Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.

Down (

). CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.

Once a MEP has been defined, its configuration cannot be changed, exception of the interval (see Modify
the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP). To do this, remove the MEP
from the VLAN and create a new one with the new configuration.
The removal of a MEP involves event the automatic removal of the relevant MA from the VLAN.
ALCplus2e equipment, for every single MEP, manages the following alarms:

MEP Fail - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Fail Alarm
The alarm becomes active when at least one of the remote MEPs present in the RMep table of
the specific local MEP is in status Start or Failed.

MEP Configuration Mismatch - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Config.
Mismatch Alarm.
The alarm becomes active when the local MEP receives at least one CCM message, containing
configuration data different from those set for the local MEP itself, from one of the remote MEPs.
With configuration data we mean: Domain name, MA name, CCM interval.
When this alarm is active, the remote MEP, which has raised the alarm, cannot be enabled in
the RMep table.
Fig.8 OAM-FM functionality - Maintenance points
Domain: Test
A.1

MEP 10

Switch
1
2
A
3
4

VLAN Id:20
MA: Vlan 20

A.2

A.3

Switch
1
2
3
4

MIP

A

A.6

Switch

A

MEP 11

1
2
A
3
4

A.5
1
2
3
4

Switch

MIP

Switch
1
2
A
3
4

A.4
Switch
1
2
3
4

MEP 12

A

A.7
Switch
1
2
3
4

A

MIP
The term MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point) defines a passive entity, associated to a specific service
instance (VLAN).
MIPs are defined on transit equipment for the monitored VLAN, intermediate among the end MEPs.
Fig.8 shows an example.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

321

MIP can reply to the LoopBack (LBM) messages, sent in unicast by a MEP (MAC Address), and to the Link
Trace (LTM) messages, sent by a MEP, but it cannot generate requests of LoopBack and Link Trace towards
other MIP or MEP.
MIP is defined by the operator in ALCplus2e equipment which acts as intermediate points of the same VLAN
and the same OAM-FM maintenance segment.
The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA (see Associate a MA to a VLAN).
In fact, the definition of a MA within a VLAN for which a MEP is not defined, corresponds to the automatic
definition of a MIP for every single port of the Switch for which the specific VLAN is enabled.
Once a MA/MIP has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MA/MIP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new name.

Remote MEPs
The term Remote MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines entities which represent the other end points (remote points) of a VLAN with respect to the local MEP.
Example. Referring to Fig.8, if you are connected by WEB CT to equipment A.1, the local MEP will be MEP
10 while the remote MEPs will be MEP 11 and MEP 12.
Otherwise, if you are connected by WEB CT to equipment A.4, the local MEP will be MEP 11 while the remote MEPs will be MEP 10 and MEP 12.
A table of the remote MEPs (RMep table) is associated to every local MEP (then to every MA/VLAN).
The system records, in this table, the remote MEPs from which the local MEP waits for a CCM message.
If the CCM message does not arrive within a timeout period equal to 2,5 CCM interval set for the local MEP,
the remote MEP is set to status Failed and the relevant alarm is activated (OAM-FM MA: MEP Id: Fail
Alarm).
Example. Referring to Fig.8, if you are connected by WEB CT to equipment A.1, MEP 11 and MEP 12 will
be recorded in the RMep table (relevant to MEP 10).
The transmission of CCM messages is enabled at intervals of 10 sec between a transmission and the next
one.
If, after 25 sec. (2,5 times the CCM interval), MEP 10 does not receive a CCM message, for example from
MEP 11, in the RMep table MEP 11 will be set to status Failed and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Vlan 20 MEP Id:
10 Fail Alarm will be activated, pointing out that a Remote Mep in Failed is present in the RMep table of
the local MEP 10.
The remote MEP remains in status Failed until the local MEP receives a valid CCM message from the remote
MEP or the user removes the remote MEP from the table.
The recording of remote MEPs in the RMep table consists of two parts: the entry in the table and the enabling of the remote MEP (operation necessary so that the remote MEPs are acknowledged as valid end
points by the local MEP).
The entry of MEP in the table takes place:
a. AUTOMATICALLY, after the reception of the first CCM sent by a remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table indicates the identifier of the remote MEP and the MAC Address
of the equipment which the remote MEP belongs to.
The enabling for this type of remote MEPs must be executed manually by the operator (see
Fig.9).
b. MANUALLY, after a command of the operator, who adds the remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table indicates the identifier of the remote MEP (provided by the
operator) while the MAC Address is set to zero.
After the creation, the remote MEP must be manually set to status Start. The passage of Remote
MEP to the status connected (Conn) will take place when the equipment receives the first CCM
sent by the specific remote MEP (see Fig.9).
When the first CCM is received, the field MAC Address gets the value of the MAC Address of the
remote equipment, source of CCM.
The status of a remote MEP is pointed out in the table by the parameter MEP State and can be:

322

Idle. Initial status of the remote MEP just after its manual insertion in table.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Idle are pointed out in Fig.9.

Start. Initial status of the remote MEP just after it is automatically inserted in the table or status
assumed by the remote MEP after it is enabled (remote MEP manually inserted) or disabled.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start and the conditions which
cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one change depending on the
type of insertion of the MEP in the RMep table (automatic or manual) as depicted in Fig.9.

Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches from the status Start after an enabling command or at
the reception of the first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP, if previously recorded
by the operator (see Fig.9).
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Conn and the conditions which
cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are depicted in Fig.9.

Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when the local MEP does not receive (for a period of 2,5
times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP, as described at the beginning of the chapter.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Failed and the conditions
which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are depicted in Fig.9.

After the (automatic or manual) insertion of a remote MEP in the table, it can be removed only manually
by the operator.
In WEB CT, the RMep table of a local MEP can be displayed only after the local MEP has been associated to
a VLAN (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN).
Fig.9 OAM-FM - Management of the status of the Remote MEPs in the RMep table

The remote MEP is automatically inserted in
RMep table when the local MEP receives the first
CCM message sent by remote MEP

The remote MEP is manually
inserted in the RMep table by the user (1).
Remote MEP status: Idle
The user enables
the remote MEP
(2)

Remote MEP status
Start
The user
disables the
remote MEP
(3)

The user enables
the remote MEP
(2)

Remote MEP status
Start
The user
disables the
remote MEP
(3)

Remote MEP status
Conn.
Local MEP does
not receive the
CCMs from remote
MEP anymore

Local MEP
receives
again the
CCMs from
remote MEP

Remote MEP status
Failed
The user deletes
the remote MEP (4)

Removal of remote MEP
from the RMep table

Local MEP
receives the first
CCM sent by the
remote MEP
Remote MEP status
Conn.
Local MEP does
not receive the
CCMs from
remote MEP
anymore

Local MEP
receives
again the
CCMs from
remote MEP

The user
deletes the
remote MEP
(4)

Remote MEP status
Failed
The user deletes
the remote MEP (4)

Removal of remote MEP
from the RMep table

(1) Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table
(2) Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table
(3) Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

323

(4) Remove a remote MEP from RMep table

CCM
The term CCM (Continuity Check Message) defines the messages which constantly monitor the path of the
service instance pointing out the connection troubles.
CCMs are multicast messages sent by a MEP entity to the other MEP entities belonging to the same MA
(Remote MEPs).
Moreover, CCMs are unidirectional messages (do not need a reply) and are periodically sent.
Within a MA which n MEPs belongs to, every MEP periodically sends a CCM in multicast; every MEP waits
to periodically receive n-1 CCMs.
The missed reception of a CCM by a MEP means the presence of a fault in the path of the service instance
(VLAN).
When a MEP does not receive a CCM message, it goes to status Failed: this status is notified to the other
MEPs setting the field RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) present in the sent CCM message.
In this way, all the MEP entities know the existence of a fault along their own path.
The CCM management in ALCplus2e equipment is strictly bound to the MEP management.
In fact, the configuration parameters of the CCM messages must be set when MEP is created. The user is
required to define:

The time interval used for the transmission of CCMs (CCM interval).
For a correct operation of the CCM messages, the CCM interval must be the same for all the
MEPs of the same VLAN.

The direction you wish to send the CCM messages to.

Once the MEP has been defined, the enabling of the transmission of CCMs is required.
Then, the user can disable and enable again the transmission of the CCM messages at his wish (see Enable/
disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP) and modify the interval (see Modify the time interval
used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP).
The direction cannot be modified. To do this, remove the MEP from the VLAN and create a new one with
the new values.
In ALCplus2e equipment, the CCM messages (OAM-FM packets) are routed on the VLANs only if the control
of Tag VLan Id is active (Fallback or Secure).
In the CCM messages sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets) is used as:

Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3x with x from 0 to 7 according to the layer of OAM-FM Domain

Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated
the CCM message (MAC Address associated to the management LAN of the controller).

LBM
The term LBM (LoopBack Message) defines the LoopBack messages which, once a fault has been detected
through the CCM messages, allow isolate the point where the fault has occurred.
The operation modalities of OAM-FM LoopBack is similar to IP ping.
From a MEP an OAM-FM packet is sent in unicast with a request of Echo Request (LoopBack Message) to a
MIP or MEP belonging to the same MA. The MEP waits for the relevant reply Echo Reply (Loopback Replies)
sent in unicast from the remote maintenance point.
The missed reply to a LBM message indicates the presence of a fault between the MEP which has sent the
message and the maintenance point which has not replied to the message.
The LBM messages are sent after a command from operator (see Send one or more LoopBack messages
(LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP).
The transmission of LoopBack messages requires the setting of:

324

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

The local MEP, which you wish to send the messages from.

The remote maintenance point, belonging to the same Domain and the same MA of the local
MEP, which you wish to send the messages to. The setting of a:

MEP can be done choosing the MEP in the RMep table or setting the MAC Address of the
equipment where the remote MEP is defined.

MIP can be done setting the MAC Address of the equipment where MIP is defined.

Number of messages (OAM-FM packets - Echo Request) you wish to send in sequence with a
single sending confirmation (minimum 1 maximum 5).

At the end of the operation, a statistics is available with the number of sent packets (Sent Messages), the
number of received correct packets (Valid), the number of packets received out of sequence (Out Of Order)
and the number of packets received with unknown format (Bad MSDU).
ALCplus2e equipment, in the LBM messages sent in unicast, uses as:

Destination address (Destination MAC address): physical address of the addressee of the LoopBack message.

Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated
the LoopBack message.

LTM
The term LTM (Link Trace Message) defines the Link Trace messages which allow determining the path
covered by an OAM-FM packet between the end-points of a service instance (VLAN).
The operating modality of OAM-FM Link Trace is similar to TraceRoute IP.
A Link Trace message is sent in multicast from a MEP (local) to a remote MEP, whose physical address must
be known.
In the Link Trace messages, the TTL (Time To Live) field, which indicates the number of equipment of the
specific OAM-FM Domain the packet can pass through before being declared expired, is properly configured.
The LTM messages are captured by all the MEPs-MIPs installed on the same VLAN on the equipment
touched to reach the destination MEP.
Every MEP-MIP, once the message has been intercepted, decreases the TTL field, replies to the originating
MEP with an unicast message and re-transmits the LTM message to the destination MEP.
This operation is repeated until the packet arrives to the addressee remote MEP.
At the end of the operation, the local MEP has acquired the list of the physical addresses (MAC Address) of
the equipment where the Link Trace messages have passed.
The LTM messages, to trace the path between two different MEPs of the same VLAN, are sent after a command by operator (see Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of
the same VLAN).
To trace a path, the operator must set the two path ends:

Local MEP.

Remote MEP. This setting can be done choosing the MEP from the RMep table or setting the MAC
Address of the equipment whose remote MEP has been defined.
The remote MEP, to make the operation being successful, must be in status Conn. (see Fig.9).

Then the operator must send the LTM message (Run Test).
At the end of the operation, the Link Trace will contain the list of the MAC Addresses of the MIPs-MEPs
crossed to reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in Hops from the origin MEP.
The LTM messages are sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets), use as:

Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3y with y from 80xF according to the layer of the OAM-FM Domain.

Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated
the Link Trace message.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

325

Example of configuration of a OAM-FM Domain for a set of ALCplus2e equipment
Fig.10 shows an example of configuration of a maintenance OAM-FM area among four ALCplus2e equipment (A.1, A.2, A.3 and A.4). This area is used to monitor the end to end availability of VLAN 20.
Fig.10 OAM-FM - Example of configuration of a maintenance area
Domain: Test
A.1
Switch
1
2
A
3
4

MEP 10

VLAN Id:20
MA: Vlan 20

A.2

A.3

Switch
1
2
3
4

A

MIP

Switch

MEP 11

A.4
Switch

1
2
A
3
4

1
2
3
4

A

The steps to execute, through the WEB LCT application on every single equipment, are the following:
1. Configure the VLAN with identifier 20 on the 4 equipment (see Create a virtual Lan).
The VLAN must be operating, so beyond being created it is necessary:

Execute the suitable physical connections.

Activate the Ethernet ports involved by the VLAN (parameter Rate Control).

Configure properly the transit of the messages in input from the Ethernet port (parameter Port
Based VLAN).

Activate the control of Tag VLan Id (parameter Ingress Filtering Check).

2. Define the OAM-FM Domain with name Test (see Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment) and layer
equal to 5.
The OAM-FM Domain must be defined in every equipment of the Domain Test and the name and the
layer of the Domain must be the same for all pieces of equipment.
3. Associate the MA with name Test 20 (see Associate a MA to a VLAN) to the VLAN.
The MA must be associated to VLAN 20 in every equipment of Domain Test and the name of MA must
be the same for all pieces of equipment.
4. Define the MEPs (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN) in the following way:

Only for equipment A.1, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:

Identifier: 10

CCM Interval: 10 sec.

Ethernet port: LAN 3

Direction of CCMs: Down (

) - The CCM messages are sent in output from LAN 3.

Only for equipment A.4, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:

Identifier: 11

CCM Interval: 10 sec.

Ethernet port: LAN 1

Direction of CCMs: Down (

) - Messages will be sent in output from LAN 1.

5. Enable the transmission of CCM messages for the MEPs created in the previous step (see Enable/
disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP).
After some seconds, the RMep table (see Remote MEPs) relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1) records
the MEP 11 in status Start and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm becomes active.
Differently, the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4) records the MEP 10 in status Start and
the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm becomes active.
6. In RMep tables, enable the remote MEPs (see Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table).
In the RMep table relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1), the remote MEP 11 changes to status Conn and
the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
In similar mode, in the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4), the remote MEP 10 changes
to status Conn and the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.

326

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

The configuration of the maintenance area depicted in Fig.10 is completed and the end to end monitoring
of VLAN 20 is active.
At this point, when a fault is detected (activation of the alarm OAM-FM Fail Alarm) or in order to execute
checks on the OAM-FM path, it is possible to use the LTM messages to verify the path of the VLAN or, when
the Fail alarm is detected, it is possible to use the LBM messages for the detection of the interruption point
of the VLAN.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

327

S/N Meas
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with radio.

The S/N Meas command displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N), which allows evaluating the
quality of the radio communication channel.
Operations

Verify the value of the S/N measure
Update the value of the S/N measure
GUI

S/N Meas. contextual area

Verify the value of the S/N measure
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas.
The S/N Meas. contextual area displays the value of the signal/noise ratio.

Update the value of the S/N measure
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas.
The S/N parameter indicates the value of the signal/noise ratio.
2. Press Refresh to update the value.
For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Branch 1 area. For the equipment in 1+1 or
2x(1+0) configuration are present the Branch 1 (branch 1 S/N measure) and Branch 2 (branch 2 S/N
measure) areas.
When the measures of the two branches are present, the selection of the push-button updates both the
values.

328

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

S/N Meas. contextual area
The contextual area shows the value of the S/N measure.
Parameters

S/N. Value of the signal/noise ratio.
The measure is always in progress.
For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Branch 1 area. For the equipment in 1+1
or 2x(1+0) configuration are present the Branch 1 (branch 1 S/N measure) and Branch 2
(branch 2 S/N measure) areas.
Push-button

Refresh. Update the value of the S/N measure
Help. Open the help on-line.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

329

PRBS
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The PRBS command manages the PRBS device.
Operations

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure
Activate/reset the PRBS measure
Deactivate the PRBS measure
Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure
GUI

PRBS contextual area

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > PRBS.
The PRBS contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure.

Activate/reset the PRBS measure
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > PRBS.
2. Select the Start-Reset option (Start/Stop parameter).
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The measure will be active until the user does not stop it.

Deactivate the PRBS measure
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > PRBS.
2. Select the Stop option (Start/Stop parameter).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > PRBS.
The Test Pattern parameter indicates the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

330

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used for the measure.

2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.

2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Maintenance > PRBS.
The E1 Signal parameter indicates the status of the used E1 signal for the measure.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or B) or of
the expansion (1÷16 or 1÷32).
The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s
tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate
by means of the PRBS functionality.

Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream/data channel.

3. ONLY if the enabled the E1 signal, set the tributary in the 2 Mbit/s Selection box.
If the Trib A or Trib B value is not available, the relevant tributary is used as synchronism in output
(see Synchronisation).
4. Press Apply and confirm.
Only if the Enable option is selected a message is displayed informing that the set tributary is immediately enabled to the use and then a message warns you are executing a forcing and displays the current
setting of the timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
Enabling of the E1 signal activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on the forcing is inactive independently from the previous setting.
If the message Operation fail! Wrong user profile! is displayed, check that the user profile can enable
the tributary.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

331

PRBS contextual area
The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure.
Parameters

BER. Dynamically updated BER value during the measure
Errors. Number of errors detected from the start of the measure
Elapsed Time. Time (expressed in day/hours/minutes/seconds) range after the measure active
Fail Alarms. Number of times that the Sync Loss Alarm activated from the start of the measure.
Sync Loss Alarm. Status of the “PRBS Fail Alarm”. The colour of the boxes represents the
alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Start/Stop. Activation status of the measure:

Start-Reset. The PRBS measure is active.

Stop. The PRBS measure is deactivated.

Test Pattern. Type of pattern used for the measure:

Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used as pattern for the measure.

2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.

2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.

E1 Signal. Status of the E1 signal used for the measure:

Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or
B) or of the expansion (1÷16 or 1÷32).

Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream.

2 Mbit/s Selection. Tributary used for the measure.
Parameter meaningful only if the Enable option (E1 Signal parameter) is active.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Activate/reset the PRBS measure
Deactivate the PRBS measure
Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure

332

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Radio Loop
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with radio.

The Radio Loop command manages the radio loops.
Operations

Verify the radio loops status
Activate a radio loop
Deactivate a radio loop
Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN
GUI

Radio Loop contextual area
See also

Radio loop (info)
Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info)

Verify the radio loops status
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.
The Radio Loop contextual area displays the current status of the radio loops.

Activate a radio loop
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

The activation of the radio loop can affect the traffic (see Radio loop (info).
1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.
2. Select the option relevant to the loop that you want to activate.
It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically disables
the preceding one.
If next to the option there is the box Test Loop Result, this means the equipment is equipped with ODU
ASN. For this ODU type, a Test RF is available (see Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment
with ODU ASN).
The values RF Loop and RF Loop (ETH not squelched) are available only if the RF loop is supported by
the equipment hardware.
3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned
on again, the loop results deactivated without taking into account the preceding setting.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

333

Deactivate a radio loop
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.
2. Select the Loop OFF option present in the Loop Branch… area, relevant to the loop that you want to
deactivate.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

Operation available only for equipment provided with ODU ASN (see Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info).
1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.
2. Select the RF Loop option.
3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm.
During the execution of the test, the Test Loop box shows the progression of the operation.
The status of the test is pointed out by the Test Loop Result box:

Grey box - wording None. Test to execute.

White box - wording Running. Test in progress.

Green box - wording Passed. Test executed correctly (ODU operating).

Red box - wording Fail. Test failed (ODU faulted).

Red box - wording Interrupted. Test interrupted by the system.
Possible cause: the set timeout of the MAN OP is lower than the time for the execution of the
test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that of execution of the test.

5. Select the Loop OFF option.
6. Press Apply and confirm.

334

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Radio Loop contextual area
The contextual area shows the current status of the radio loops.
Parameters

Loop Branch <radio branch>. Current status of the radio loops of the specific radio branch:

Loop OFF. No loop active.

RF Loop. RF loop active: Ethernet traffic is not looped.
If next to the option there is the box Test Loop Result, this means the equipment is
equipped with ODU ASN. For this ODU type, a Test RF is available (see Test (RF Loop)
for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info).

IF Loop. IF loop active: Ethernet traffic is not looped.

RF Loop (ETH not squelched). RF loop active: Ethernet traffic is looped.

IF Loop (ETH not squelched). IF loop active: Ethernet traffic is looped.

The values RF Loop and RF Loop (ETH not squelched) are available only if the RF loop is supported by the equipment hardware.
For the equipment in configuration 1+0, it is present the Loop Branch 1 area. For the equipment
in configuration 1+1 or 2x(1+0), there are present the Loop Branch 1 (loops branch 1) and Loop
Branch 2 (loops branch 2) areas.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Activate a radio loop
Deactivate a radio loop
Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN
Radio loop (info)
Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

335

Radio loop (info)
In the 1+0 and 2x(1+0) systems, the activation of the radio loop affects the traffic.
In the 1+1 systems, the activation of the radio loop on the active branch affects the traffic. The activation
of the radio loop on the stand-by branch does not affects the traffic. However, in this case, before executing
the loop, the receiver must be forced to the active branch (see Radio Switch).
Anyway, before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set.
If the timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the switch-off/switchon of the equipment or the equipment reset.

336

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info)
The ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN of old generation was not provided with the RF loop, because not
designed to execute a loop in accordance with the specifications of emission of the spurious signals.
The ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN of new generation (ODU unit with Part. Number GE8xxx) is provided with an internal diagnostics functionality, based on a loop executed in preset operating condition in
such a way to verify the transceiver functionality.
The execution of the test is independent from the type of traffic (TDM, Ethernet, hybrid) and does not need
any external measurement tools.
At the end of the test, the result of the diagnosis is displayed: test executed correctly (ODU operating),
test failed (ODU faulted).
The test is a manual operation (MAN OP), so its execution is subjected to the timeout of the manual operations.
If the timeout:

Is enabled, at the end of the test the condition of Loop RF is preserved until the expiry of the
duration of the MAN OP unless it is removed immediately at the end of the test, as described in
the specific procedure.

Is not enabled, at the end of the test it is necessary to remove the condition of Loop RF, as described in the specific procedure.

If the test is interrupted by the system, a possible reason could be that the set timeout was lower than the
execution time of the test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that of execution of
the test.
In case of 1+1 Hot Standby radio configuration systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch
involves the loss of the connection of the working branch, because the remote transmitter is switched off.
In case of 1+1 Freq. Div radio configuration systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch
involves the degradation or the loss of the connection of the working branch, because even on this one the
same modulation is (mandatory) set.
With:

ACM enabled: reduction of the traffic to the test profile.

ACM disable: loss of traffic.

In case of systems configured with constant peak, it is ensured that the rated power of the connection is
not exceeded during the execution of the test.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

337

Radio Switch
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio in protected configuration.

The Radio Switch command manages the radio switch.
Operations

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)
Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
GUI

Radio Switch contextual area
See also

Radio switch (info)

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch.
The Radio Switch contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the radio
switch.

Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch.
The Rx Forced Switch parameter indicates the management of the switching in reception.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the equipment).

Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.

Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch… option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.

338

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration (1+1 Hot Standby).

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch.
The Tx Forced Switch parameter indicates the management of the switching in transmission.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the equipment).

Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.

Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch… option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.

Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration (1+1 Hot Standby).

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch.
The Tx Preferential parameter indicates the management of the preferential branch in transmission.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a
branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.

Branch-1. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the
branch 1.

Branch-2. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the
branch 2.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the Wait Time parameter
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration (1+1 Hot Standby).

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch.
The Wait Time parameter indicates the value of Wait Time.
2. To change the parameter, type the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 150 sec.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

339

Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration (1+1 Hot Standby).

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch.
2. Press Reset and confirm

340

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Radio Switch contextual area
The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switch.
Parameters

Rx Forced Switch. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching
at reception between the service branch and the reserve one:

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the
alarms.

Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.

Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.

Tx Forced Switch. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching
at transmission between the service branch and the reserve one:

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the
alarms.

Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.

Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.

Tx Preferential. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the function of
preferential branch for the service at transmission:

Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does
not use a branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.

Branch-1. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
use the branch 1.

Branch-2. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
use the branch 2.

Wait Time (Tx Preferential). Time period during which the service is kept on the non-preferential branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue
switch between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
WARNING Tx Forced Switch, Tx Preferential and Wait Time parameters are available only for the equipment

in 1+1 isofrequential configuration (1+1 Hot Standby). For the 1+1 heterofrequential configuration (1+1
Freq. Div), the parameters are not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the same time
because the selection of the signal is executed at reception.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Reset. Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
See also

Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)
Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Radio switch (info)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

341

Radio switch (info)

Management of the radio switch
Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission)

Management of the radio switch
The radio switches (reception and transmission), for the ALCplus2e equipment in protected configuration,
generally operate in automatic mode: the equipment executes a switch when specific alarms raises on the
operating radio branch.
The user can manage the radio switch executing some forcing operations and enabling the preferential
branch.

Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)
This function foresees the user can force a radio branch to operate independently from alarms which can
be active (see Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)/Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the radio switch in reception and/or transmission. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user deactivates it or the timeout
period of the manual operation expires (if set).

Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission)
This function provides the choice of a branch to be used in a preferential way in transmission when there
are not alarms that cause the switching (see Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission
(Tx Preferential).
In fact, when the switching is automatically managed by the controller, it executes the switching when on
the branch on service there are present some specific alarms.
When the alarms have been reset, the controller does not execute again the switching. While, if it has been
set a preferential branch when the operator resets the alarms, if the branch on service is not the preferential one, the controller executes the switching and it uses for the service the branch set by the operator
as the preferential one (naturally if the branch does not have any alarms).
Besides a time period can be defined (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the non-preferential
branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue switch between
the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
For instance, suppose that an alarm occurs causing the switch of the service from the preferential branch
to the other branch. When the alarm clears, the preferential branch is not immediately restored to service
but postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the same alarm
has not occurred again on the preferential branch. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the alarm has not
occurred again, the service is restored to the preferential branch. Otherwise, the switch is delayed by other
n seconds, during which the controller verifies that the same alarm has not occurred again and so on.
In any moment the user can Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration.

342

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

SWITCH

STM-1. It manages the switch of the protected STM-1.
Nodal. It manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

343

STM-1
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the protection of the STM-1 is active (MSP mode - see Configurator).

The STM-1 command manages the switch of the protected STM-1.
Operations

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch
Modify the management of the STM-1 switch
Modify the logic of STM-1 switch
Set the primary STM-1 as preferential
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
GUI

STM-1 contextual area
See also

STM-1 switch (info)

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Switch > STM-1.
The STM-1 contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch.

Modify the management of the STM-1 switch
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Switch > STM-1.
The MSP Protection parameter indicates the management mode of the STM-1 switch.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch).

Lock Out. The equipment is forced to use the primary STM-1.

Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch will be never executed,
independently from the type of alarm which can raise.

Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch is executed only in
case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Lock Out, Forced or Manual option) a message
warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.

344

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Modify the logic of STM-1 switch
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Switch > STM-1.
The Direction parameter indicates the modality of management of the logic of the STM-1 switch.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment, which
commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote equipment.

Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at Link level: the local equipment agrees the switch
with the remote equipment.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the primary STM-1 as preferential
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Switch > STM-1.
The Protection Mode parameter indicates if the primary STM-1 is set as preferential.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Not Revertive. The primary STM-1 is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary) the
secondary STM-1 remains active even when the alarms that caused the switch clear.

Revertive. The primary STM-1 is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary), when the
alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the Wait Time parameter
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Switch > STM-1.
The Wtr Time (Min) parameter indicates the time (expressed in minutes) during which a no alarm condition must persist on the main stream so that the service is restored on it.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 minutes.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Switch > STM-1.
2. Press Wtr Clear and confirm.
The main stream, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for the
service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

345

STM-1 contextual area
The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch.
Parameters

Switch Status area. Operating status of the switch. The STM-1 in operation is pointed out by
green box and wording Active, while the STM-1 in StandBy by the grey box and the wording
StandBy.
Primary STM-1 (Switch Status area.). Main STM-1.
Protection STM-1 (Switch Status area.). Secondary STM-1.
Wtr Time (Min.). Time (expressed in minutes) during which an alarm condition must persist
on the main stream so that the service is restored on it.
Protection Mode. Management mode of the primary STM-1 as preferential:

Not Revertive. The primary STM-1 is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary) the secondary STM-1 remains active even when the alarms that caused the switch
clear.

Revertive. The primary STM-1 is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary),
when the alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1

MSP Protection. management modality of the switch:

Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch).

Lock Out. The equipment is forced to use the primary STM-1.

Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch is never executed, independently from the type of alarm that can raise.

Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch is executed
only in case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.

Direction. Management modality of the switching logic:

Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment, which commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote
equipment.

Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at link level: the local equipment agrees
the switch with the remote equipment.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Wtr Clear. Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Modify the management of the STM-1 switch
Modify the logic of STM-1 switch
Set the primary STM-1 as preferential
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
STM-1 switch (info)

346

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

STM-1 switch (info)

Management of the STM-1 switch
STM-1 switching criteria
Forcing of the STM-1 to operation
Preferential primary STM-1

Management of the STM-1 switch
The ALCplus2e equipment that manage the STM-1 (see Tab.5) can be configured by the user to operate
with the STM-1 disabled, enabled or protected (see Modify the management of the STM-1 switch).
When the user enables the protection of the STM-1 (MSP mode - Multiplex Section Protection) even the
management of the STM-1 switch is enabled.
The switch generally operates automatically: the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raise
on the operating STM-1.

STM-1 switching criteria
When the STM-1 switch operates in automatic mode, the user can set one of the following switching logics:
Unidirectional Logic. Only the local alarms are considered among the criteria which determine the
switch.
Bidirectional Logic. The local equipment agrees the switch of the STM-1 with the remote equipment: both the local and the remote alarms are considered among the criteria which determine the
switch.

Forcing of the STM-1 to operation
This function foresees the possibility for the user to force the primary or secondary STM-1 to operate, independently from the alarms which could be active (see Modify the management of the STM-1 switch).
This operation must not be used for the normal operation of the STM-1 switch. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operation
expires (if set).

Preferential primary STM-1
This function foresees the choice of the primary STM-1 to use in preferential mode when there are not
alarms which determine the switch (see Set the primary STM-1 as preferential).
In fact, when the switch operates in automatic mode, the equipment executes the switch when specific
alarms raises on the STM-1 in service.
When the alarms clear, the controller does not execute the switch again.
If the primary STM-1 is set as preferential, when the switch is executed, if the STM-1 in service is not the
primary, the controller executes the switch and uses the primary STM-1 for the service (naturally if the
stream is not alarmed).
Moreover it is possible to define a time period (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the not preferential (secondary) STM-1 before this returns to the preferential (primary) STM-1, in such a way to avoid
the continue switch between the two STM-1 in case of fluctuating alarms.
For example, suppose an alarm raises which determines the switch of the service from the primary STM1 to the secondary. When the alarm clears, the service is not immediately restored on the primary (pref-

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

347

erential) STM-1, but this is postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies
that the alarms has not raised again on the preferential STM-1. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the
alarm has not raised again, the service is restored on the primary STM-1. On the contrary, the switch is
postponed by other n seconds during which the system verifies the alarm has not raised again and so on.
In any moment the operator can Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration.

348

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Nodal
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the protection of the Nodal Bus is active (see Configurator)

The Nodal command manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus.
Operations

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch
Modify the management of the nodal switch
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
GUI

Nodal contextual area
See also

Nodal switch (info)

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select Switch > Nodal.
The Nodal contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch.

Modify the management of the nodal switch
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Switch > Nodal.
The Forced Switch parameter indicates the management mode of the nodal switch.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch).

NBUS1. The equipment is forced to use the primary Nodal Bus.

NBUS2. The equipment is forced to use the secondary Nodal Bus.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the NBUS1 or NBUS2 option) a message warns that
you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

349

Modify the Wait Time parameter
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Switch > Nodal.
The Wtr Time (s) parameter indicates the time during which a no alarm condition must persist on the
preferential NBUS connection so that the service is restored on it.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 seconds.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait
Time expiration
Access | Read & Write

1. Select Switch > Nodal.
2. Press Wtr Clear.
The primary Bus, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for the
service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.

350

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Nodal contextual area
The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch.
Parameters

Wtr Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which an alarm condition must persist on the
preferential NBUS connection so that the service is restored on it.
Forced Switch. Management modality of the switch:

Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch).

NBUS1. The equipment is forced to use the primary Nodal Bus.

NBUS2. The equipment is forced to use the secondary Nodal Bus.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Wtr Clear. Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait
Time expiration
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Modify the management of the nodal switch
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Nodal switch (info)

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

351

Nodal switch (info)

Management of the nodal switch
Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation
Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection

Management of the nodal switch
The ALCplus2e equipment that manage the nodal Bus (see Tab.5), can be configured by the user to operate
with the Nodal Bus disabled, enabled or protected (see Configurator).
When the user enables the protection of the Nodal Bus even the management of the nodal switch is enabled.
The switch generally operates automatically: the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raise
on the operating Nodal Bus.

Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation
This function foresees the possibility for the user to force the primary or secondary Nodal Bus to operate,
independently from the alarms which could be active (see Modify the management of the nodal switch).
This operation must not be used for the normal operation of the nodal switch. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until when the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires
(if set).

Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection
When the user executes a single connection, which involves a protected NBUS channel, the matrix automatically executes the protection connection creating, in fact, a protected connection.
In this case, the connection created by the user is the preferential connection (preferential NBUS connection) while the connection created by the matrix is the protection connection (protection NBUS connection).
When the switch operates in automatic modality, the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms
are present on the working NBUS connection.
When the alarms clear, the controller, if the working NBUS connection is not the preferential one, executes
the switch and uses the preferential NBUS connection to work (of course if alarms are not present on the
connection).
In this condition it is possible to define a time period (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the
not preferential NBUS connection before this returns to the preferential NBUS connection, in such a way
to avoid the continue switch between the two connections in case of fluctuating alarms.
For example, suppose an alarm occurs causing the switch from the preferential NBUS connection to the
protection one. When the alarm clears, the service is not immediately switched to the preferential NBUS
connection, but postponed of n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the
alarm on the preferential NBUS connection has not occurred again. At the end of the Wait Time period, if
the alarm has not occurred again, the switch takes place. Otherwise, the switch is postponed of other n
seconds, during which the system verifies that the alarm has not occurred again and so on.
In any moment the operator can Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for
the Wait Time expiration.

352

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

USER INPUT

Local User Input. It manages the local User Input.
Remote User Input. It manages the remote User Input.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

353

Local User Input
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The Local User Input command manages the local User Input configuration.
Operations

Verify the local User Input status and configuration
Modify the name of a local User Input
Modify the rest condition of a local User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local User Input
GUI

Local User Input contextual area
See also

Enabling the User Input alarms (info)

Verify the local User Input status and configuration
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select User Input > Local User Input.
The Local User Input contextual area displays the status and the configuration of local User Inputs.

Modify the name of a local User Input
Access | Read & Write

1. Select User Input > Local User Input.
The Label column displays the name of the Local User Inputs.
2. To change the name of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string
with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Modify the rest condition of a local User Input
Access | Read & Write

1. Select User Input > Local User Input.
The Input Operation column shows the rest condition of the local User Inputs.
2. To change the rest condition of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and set the value:

Normally Open. The User Input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is referred to ground.

Normally Close. The User Input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is open.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

354

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local User Input
Access | Read & Write

1. Select User Input > Local User Input.
The Severity column shows the status/severity of the local User Inputs alarms.
2. To change the status/severity of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and set the value:

Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the User Input.

Status, to:

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.

Warning, to:

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Warning level.

Minor, to:

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Minor level.

Major, to:

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Major level.

Critical, to:

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Critical level.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

355

Local User Input contextual area
The context displays the status and the configuration of local User Inputs.
Every row of the table corresponds to one User Input.
Parameters

Label. User Input name.
Status. User Input status:

Inactive (green box). User Input alarm not activated.

Active (green box). User Input status signal activated.

Active (light blue box). User Input alarm activated and with Warning severity level.

Active (yellow box). User Input alarm activated and with Minor severity level.

Active (orange box). User Input alarm activated and with Major severity level.

Active (red box). User Input alarm activated and with Critical severity level.

Severity. Status/seriousness of the alarm created at the activation of the User Input:

Disable. The alarm is disabled.

Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling.

Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of
level Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.

Input Operation. Rest condition of the User Input:

Normally Open. The User Input is considered active when its terminal is referred to
ground.

Normally Close. The User Input is considered active when its terminal is open.

Push-button

Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
See also

Modify the name of a local User Input
Modify the rest condition of a local User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local User Input
Enabling the User Input alarms (info)

356

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Enabling the User Input alarms (info)
Disabling an User Input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not recorded in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the
alarm has never occurred.
On the other hand, enabling an User Input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is recorded
in the equipment controller and communicated to the management program which displays it in the current
alarms and in the alarm history.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

357

Remote User Input
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The Remote User Input command manages the remote User Input configuration.
Operations

Verify the remote User Input status and configuration
Modify the name of a remote User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote User Input
GUI

Remote User Input contextual area
See also

Enabling the User Input alarms (info)

Verify the remote User Input status and configuration
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select User Input > Remote User Input.
The Remote User Input contextual area displays the status and the configuration of remote User Inputs.

Modify the name of a remote User Input
Access | Read & Write

1. Select User Input > Remote User Input.
The Label column shows the name of the remote User Inputs.
2. To change the name of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string
with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote User Input
Access | Read & Write

1. Select User Input > Remote User Input.
The Severity column shows the status/severity of the remote User Inputs alarms.
2. To change the status/severity of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and set the value:

Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the User Input.

Status, to:

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.

Warning, to:

358

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012


Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Warning level.

Minor, to:

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Minor level.

Major, to:

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Major level.

Critical, to:

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Critical level.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

359

Remote User Input contextual area
The context displays the status and the configuration of remote User Inputs.
Every row of the table corresponds to one User Input.
The remote User Input changes according to the equipment radio configuration:

1+0 or 1+1 configuration. 4 remote User Input.

2x(1+0) configuration. 8 remote User Input.

Parameters

Label. User Input name.
Status. User Input status:

Inactive (green box). User Input alarm not activated.

Active (green box). User Input status signal activated.

Active (light blue box). User Input alarm activated and with Warning severity level.

Active (yellow box). User Input alarm activated and with Minor severity level.

Active (orange box). User Input alarm activated and with Major severity level.

Active (red box). User Input alarm activated and with Critical severity level.

Severity. Status/seriousness of the alarm created at the activation of the User Input:

Disable. The alarm is disabled.

Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling.

Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of
level Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.

Push-button

Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
See also

Modify the name of a remote User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote User Input
Enabling the User Input alarms (info)

360

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

USER OUTPUT
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

The User Output command manages the User Output configuration.
Operations

Verify the User Output status and configuration
Modify the name of an User Output
Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output
Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output
Force the User Output activation
Remove the forcing of the User Output
GUI

User Output contextual area

Verify the User Output status and configuration
Access | Read Only, Read & Write

1. Select User Output.
The User Output contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the User Outputs.

Modify the name of an User Output
Access | Read & Write

1. Select User Output.
The Label column shows the name of the User Outputs.
2. To modify the name of an User Output, double click on the relevant box and type an alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output
Access | Read & Write

1. Select User Output.
The Active Status column shows the operating modality of the relay contacts of the User Output.
2. To modify the operation mode of an User Output, double click on the relevant box and select the option:

Open. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open

Closed. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

361

Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write

1. Select User Output.
The User Output contextual area displays the signals associated to the User Output (UO).
2. Double click on the Linked To box and select the Map option
3. Press Mapping.
The signals are subdivided in groups. The selection of a group expands or compresses the list of the
underlaying signals. At each selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if
compressed it becomes expanded, or vice versa). The symbol:
identifies an expanded group.
identifies a compressed group.
4. Activate the check-box of the:

Alarm Synthesis box, to associate the group of alarms, which a specific severity level corresponds to, to the UO. Select the wished severity level or the levels:

Alarm Synthesis Warning. Alarms, which the Warning severity corresponds to.

Alarm Synthesis Minor. Alarms, which the Minor severity corresponds to.

Alarm Synthesis Major. Alarms, which the Major severity corresponds to.

Alarm Synthesis Critical. Alarms, which the Critical severity corresponds to.

Radio Branch box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms (ODU).
Select the group or the groups of wished alarms:

Radio Branch Local Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch of
the ODU section of the local equipment.

Radio Branch Remote Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch
of the ODU section of the remote equipment.

Signals available only for equipment with the radio equipped (see Configurator).

Radio Equipment box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms
(IDU). Select the group or the groups of wished alarms:

Radio Equipment Local IDU A. Alarms relevant to LIM section of the local equipment.

Radio Equipment Remote IDU <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the LIM section of the
remote equipment connected with the specific radio branch.

User Input box, to associated to the UO one or more local (User Input …) and/or remote (User
Input Remote…) User Inputs. Select the wished User Inputs.

The selection of a signal is indicated by the check sign inside the box. Its deactivation removes the
check sign.
The selection/deselection of a group automatically selects/deselects all the relevant signals.
5. Press Ok.
6. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Force the User Output activation
Access | Read & Write

1. Select User Output.
2. Double click on the Linked To box and select the Forced by Op. option.
3. Double click on the Force Status box and select the Force option.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.
The User Output will remain activated until the removal of the forcing.

362

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Remove the forcing of the User Output
Access | Read & Write

1. Select User Output.
2. Double click on the Force Status box and select the Unforce option.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

363

User Output contextual area
The table present in the context displays the status and the configuration of the User Outputs.
Every row of the table corresponds to one User Output.
Parameters

Label. User Output name.
Status. User Output status:

Inactive (green box). User Output not activated.

Active (red box). User Output activated (relay contacts activated).

State. User Output setting:

Forced by Op. The UO is enabled to force the activation by operator.

Unmapped. No signal is associated to UO.

Mapped. One or more signals are associated to UO (group of alarms and/or User Input). Press Mapping to verify the signals.

Active State. Functioning mode of the relay contacts:

Open. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open

Closed. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays
contacts are open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.

Linked To. Activation modality associated to the User Output:

Forced by Op. UO is enabled to the forcing of the activation by the operator.

Map. UO is enabled to the association of one or more signals (group of alarms and/
or User Inputs).

Force Status. Status of the forcing of the User Output:

Unforce. UO is not active after the forcing by the operator.

Force. UO is active after the forcing by operator.

Push-button

Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
Mapping. Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output. Push-button not available when
the forcing of the activation by the operator is enabled (Linked To column - Forced by Op value).
See also

Modify the name of an User Output
Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output
Force the User Output activation
Remove the forcing of the User Output

364

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

ALARMS LIST
Tab.15 indicates the list of the alarms relevant to the equipment.
The alarms are not listed in alphabetical order but they are grouped according to the corresponding parts
of the equipment.
Equipment
User Input
Common
Eth Lan
IDU
Node
P.M. G.828
P.M. G.829 B1
P.M. G.829 B2-M1
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. VC-12 G.828
P.M. ACM
Plug-in module
Radio
RIM
RT
SETS
SNTP
STM-1
Unit
Vc4
Vc12

For each alarm, the wording present in the Events area (see Equipment status area) of the WEB CT page
is displayed.
Some alarms have some wordings in italic contained between the symbols < >. They represent a variable.

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

365

Tab.15 Alarms list
Events alarms
Equipment
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Critical
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Major
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Minor
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Warning
User Input
User Input - <UI number> <UI name> Alarm Status
Common
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Line side AIS Alarm
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Line side Fail Alarm
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Internal side AIS Alarm
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Internal side Fail Alarm
Communication EOC (E1/Stm1) Data Link Alarm
Equip Manual Operation
Fan Alarm
MNGT/1 cable Fail
MNGT/2 cable Fail
RMON Alarm <alarm description>
WAKE UP Manager IP address: <IP address>
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Communication Radio EOC Data Link Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Local-Remote Terminal Setup Mismatch Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rescue Setup Active Alarm
OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<MEP identifier> Fail Alarm
OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<MEP identifier> Config. Mismatch Alarm
One Plus One IDU Active Status
One Plus One Configuration Mismatch Alarm
One Plus One Twin Alarmed
Xpic Procedure: RADIO <1A, 2A> Xpic disable
Remote Xpic Procedure: TX-<1A, 2A> Off
Ethernet Traffic Concatenation fail on radio link
Ethernet Compression/Fragmentation Configuration Mismatch
One Plus One Preferential IDU is not active
One Plus One Transmitter Switch on Remote Terminal BER
G.8032 Ring: <Ring label> Port: <Lan-1, Lan-2, Port A> Alarm Status
IEEE 1588 PTP Configuration Mismatch
IEEE 1588 PTP PPS Unlock
PWE3: Local TDM Down channel <channel label>
PWE3: Remote TDM Down channel <channel label>

366

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Events alarms
PWE3: Local PSN Down channel <channel label>
PWE3: Remote PSN Down channel <channel label>
Eth Lan
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Link Loss Forwarding Alarm
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Loss of Signal Alarm
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Master-Slave Configuration fault Alarm
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Physical Coding Sublayer Sync Alarm
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Unresolved Autonegotiation Alarm
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Link Aggregation LACP protocol down
IDU
IDU Board IDU Temperature
IDU Board Trib.-<tributary number> [<tributary label>] Rx AIS Alarm
IDU Board Trib.-<tributary number> [<tributary label>] Signal loss Alarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Demodulator Fail Alarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Modulator Fail Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] ODU-IDU Communication fail Alarm
Local [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis
REMOTE IDU Radio <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis
IDU Trib.-<tributary number> [<tributary label>] Re-Timing Alarm
IDU <tributary number> [<tributary label>] Protection Alarm
IDU <tributary label> Ais Alarm
IDU <tributary label> Ber5 Alarm
IDU <tributary label> Out of Frame Alarm
IDU <tributary label> Out of Multiframe Alarm
Node
Node <bus number> Signal loss Alarm
Node <bus number> Loss of frame Alarm
Node <bus number> MS AIS Alarm
Node <bus number> Check identifier Alarm
Ethernet Nodal Configuration Mismatch <Lan1, Lan2, Lan1&Lan2, Nodal Config. Parameters>
P.M. G.828
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 15Mcounter ES threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 15Mcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 15Mcounter SES threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 24Hcounter ES threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 24Hcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 24Hcounter SES threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) UAS Alarm

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

367

Events alarms
P.M. G.829 B1
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) UAS Alarm
P.M. G.829 B2-M1
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS-BIDI Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS-FE Alarm
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts3 threshold cross Alarm

368

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Events alarms
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts4 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts3 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts4 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. VC-12 G.828
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-BIDI Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-FE Alarm
P.M. ACM
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 16QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 32QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 64QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 128QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 256QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 16QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 32QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 64QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 128QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 256QAM threshold cross Alarm

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

369

Events alarms
Plug-in module
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Fail Alarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Loss of Signal Alarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Mismatch Alarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Status
Radio
[<radio branch label>] PRBS Fail Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity Notification
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Id. Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Telemetry Fail Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Transmitter Switch on Remote Terminal BER
RADIO SWITCH 1A [<radio branch label>] Reserve Radio Branch Selected in Revertive Mode
RIM
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] REMOTE RIM Alarm Synthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Open Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Short Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] LOCAL RIM Alarm Synthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RIM Power Supply Alarm
RT
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT IDU-ODU Communication fail Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT If Fail Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT LOCAL ODU Alarm Synthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT REMOTE ODU Alarm Synthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Vco Fail Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Rx Power Low Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Tx Power Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx If Out Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Warning
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Active Status
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Tx Active Status
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] XPIC Fail
SETS
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Active Status
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Drift Alarm
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> LTI Alarm
IDU Sets Free Running Status
IDU Sets Holdover Status

370

ALCplus2e Manager - Release 1.9.0 - No Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00276.E - 012

Events alarms
BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm
BASE BAND Sets T4 Fail Alarm
SNTP
SNTP servers lost Alarm
STM-1
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Excessive Ber Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Signal Degrade Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Frame Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Signal Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Ais Alarm
IDU Stm1-&